Repair Manual CX

Tplljb
REPAIR MANUAL
CX series
CX-101
CX-102
CX-103
CX-105
CX-107
COMPACT X-ELLENCE STATION
1st edition FEBRUARY 2012

NOTICE
This document contains proprietary and confidential information of Topcon Corporation
and its description is protected under copyright law and international conventions.
Any unauthorized use, duplication, reproduction, modification, disclosure, distribution

or transfer of any part of this document is strictly prohibited.
Copyright © 2012 Topcon Corporation. All rights reserved.

3
Compact X-ellence Station CX series – Repair Manual
Table of Contents
INTRODUCTION.................................................................. 11
1. ELECTRICAL AND OPTICAL DIAGRAMS ..................1-1

1.1 OPTICAL LIGHT PATH DIAGRAM ...............................................................1-1
1.2 DT UNIT - BLOCK DIAGRAM..........................................................................1-2
1.3 EDM UNIT - BLOCK DIAGRAM......................................................................1-3
1.4 DT UNIT - CONNECTION DIAGRAM ............................................................1-4
1.5 EDM UNIT –CONNECTION DIAGRAM ........................................................1-8
2. EXTERNAL APPEARANCE CHECK AND

INSPECTION WITH COLLIMATORS ............................2-1
2.1 SUMMARY OF INSPECTION ...........................................................................2-1
2.2 INSPECTION PROCEDURES............................................................................2-2
2.2.1 EXTERNAL APPEARANCE CHECK....................................................................2-2
2.2.2 ROTATING/MOVING PARTS FUNCTION CHECK ..........................................2-2
2.2.3 KEY FUNCTION CHECK .......................................................................................2-3
2.2.4 DATE AND TIME SETTING CHECK ...................................................................2-3
2.2.5 USB PORT FUNCTION CHECK ............................................................................2-4
2.2.6 BLUETOOTH FUNCTION CHECK.......................................................................2-4
2.2.7 SIGHTING COLLIMATOR CHECK ......................................................................2-7
2.2.8 H AND V CONSTANT INPUT AND SLIT CHECK.............................................2-7
2.2.9 OPTICAL PLUMMET CHECK .............................................................................2-10
2.2.9A LASER PLUMMET CHECK .................................................................................2-11
2.2.10 INSPECTION WITH COLLIMATORS – PREPARATION................................2-14
2.2.11 INDEX ERROR OF TILT SENSOR ......................................................................2-15
2.2.12 ACCURACY OF TILT SENSOR...........................................................................2-16
2.2.13 TILT SENSOR RANGE OF COMPENSATION..................................................2-17
2.2.14 CIRCULAR LEVEL CHECK.................................................................................2-18
2.2.15 VERTICALITY OF VERTICAL AXIS .................................................................2-18
2.2.16 HORIZONTAL AXIS WOBBLE...........................................................................2-19
2.2.17 SIGHTING AXIS DEVIATION.............................................................................2-19
2.2.18 HORIZONTALITY OF HORIZONTAL AXIS (HEIGHT OF STANDARD,
INCLINATION).......................................................................................................2-20
2.2.19 DOUBLE CENTER ADJUSTMENT OF HORIZONTAL AXIS AND
TELESCOPE AXIS (COLLIMATION).................................................................2-22
2.2.20 HORIZONTAL ECCENTRICITY .........................................................................2-23
2.2.21 VERTICAL 0 POINT ERROR, VERTICAL CONSTANT DIFFERENCE AND
VERTICAL ECCENTRICITY................................................................................2-24
4
Compact X-ellence Station CX series - Repair Manual
2.2.22 VERTICAL 0 POINT / ES / EL OFFSET ADJUSTMENT ................................. 2-25

2.2.23 HORIZONTAL ANGLE ACCURACY................................................................. 2-26
3. DT UNIT PARTS REPLACEMENT AND ADJUSTMENT. 3-1

3.1 DCPU BOARD........................................................................................................3-1
3.1.1 REPLACEMENT ...................................................................................................... 3-1
3.1.2 INSPECTION AND ADJUSTMENT ...................................................................... 3-3
3.1.3 LITHIUM BATTERY REPLACEMENT.............................................................. 3-12
3.2 JX BOARD ............................................................................................................3-13
3.2.1 REPLACEMENT .................................................................................................... 3-13
3.2.2 INSPECTION........................................................................................................... 3-14
3.3 X-Y TILT SENSOR .............................................................................................3-14
3.3.1 REPLACEMENT.........................................................................................3-14
3.3.2 PREPARATION FOR ADJUSTMENT .....................................................3-16
3.3.3 ADJUSTMENT............................................................................................3-16
3.4 DISPLAY UNITS .................................................................................................3-17
3.4.1 REPLACEMENT.........................................................................................3-17
3.4.2 CHECK .........................................................................................................3-23
3.5 OPTICAL PLUMMET .......................................................................................3-24
3.5.1 REPLACEMENT.........................................................................................3-24
3.5.2 ADJUSTMENT............................................................................................3-24
3.6 LASER PLUMMET (OPTION) ........................................................................3-25
3.6.1 REPLACEMENT.........................................................................................3-25
3.6.2 ADJUSTMENT............................................................................................3-27
3.7 IF COVER .............................................................................................................3-29
3.7.1 DISASSEMBLING......................................................................................3-29
3.7.2 ASSEMBLING.............................................................................................3-32
3.8 TR COVER ...........................................................................................................3-41
3.8.1 DISASSEMBLING......................................................................................3-41
3.8.2 ASSEMBLING.............................................................................................3-43
3.9 EXT-CN1 UNIT....................................................................................................3-47
3.9.1 ASSEMBLING.............................................................................................3-47
3.10 TRIBRACH TR-102 ............................................................................................3-49
3.10.1 PARTS REPLACEMENT...........................................................................3-49
5
4. HORIZONTAL ENCODER (VERTICAL AXIS) UNIT....4-1

4.1 DISASSEMBLING.................................................................................................4-1
4.1.1 STANDARD BASE FROM BASE UNIT ...............................................................4-1
4.1.2 CMOS FRAME COMPLETE H...............................................................................4-2
4.1.3 H SLIP-RING UNIT (CX-101/CX-102/LOW TEMPERATURE MODELS) ......4-3
4.1.4 VERTICAL AXIS......................................................................................................4-6
4.2 BASE UNIT ASSEMBLING ................................................................................4-7
4.2.1 ASSEMBLING FLOW CHART...............................................................................4-7
4.2.2 VERTICAL AXIS ASSEMBLING ..........................................................................4-7
4.2.3 INSTALLING THE H CMOS UNIT .....................................................................4-11
4.3 ENCODER SIGNAL INSPECTION AND ADJUSTMENT (OPTION) ....4-14
4.3.1 INSPECTION AND ADJUSTMENT FLOW CHART ........................................4-14
4.3.2 PREPARATION ......................................................................................................4-15
4.3.3 LED CHECK............................................................................................................4-17
4.3.4 DETECTOR CHECK ..............................................................................................4-18
4.3.5 H ENCODER CONSTANT INPUT.......................................................................4-19
4.3.6 DUST CONFIRMATION .......................................................................................4-22
4.4 STANDARD BASE TO BASE UNIT ASSEMBLING AND INSPECTION...4-25
4.4.1 ASSEMBLING.........................................................................................................4-25
4.4.2 INSPECTION AND ADJUSTMENT ....................................................................4-28
5. VERTICAL ENCODER (HORIZONTAL AXIS) UNIT....5-1

5.1 DISASSEMBLING.................................................................................................5-1
5.1.1 HORIZONTAL AXIS AND TELESCOPE FROM STANDARD BASE .............5-1
5.1.2 CMOS FRAME COMPLETE V...............................................................................5-7
5.2 HORIZONTAL AXIS UNIT ASSEMBLING ...................................................5-8
5.2.1 ASSEMBLING FLOW CHART...............................................................................5-8
5.2.2 INSTALLING THE CMOS FRAME COMPLETE V ............................................5-9
5.3 ENCODER SIGNAL INSPECTION AND ADJUSTMENT (OPTION) ....5-11
5.3.1 INSPECTION AND ADJUSTMENT FLOW CHART ........................................5-11
5.3.2 PREPARATION ......................................................................................................5-12
5.3.3 LED CHECK............................................................................................................5-14
5.3.4 DETECTOR CHECK ..............................................................................................5-15
5.3.5 V ENCODER CONSTANT INPUT.......................................................................5-16
5.3.6 DUST CONFIRMATION .......................................................................................5-19
5.4 HORIZONTAL AXIS TO STANDARD BASE ASSEMBLING AND
INSPECTION .......................................................................................................5-22
5.4.1 ASSEMBLING.........................................................................................................5-22
5.4.2 INSPECTION AND ADJUSTMENT ....................................................................5-27
6
6. INSPECTION OF DISTANCE DATA WITH BASELINE 6-1

6.1 SUMMARY OF INSPECTION WITH BASELINE ..................................... 6-1
6.2 INSPECTION WITH BASELINE - PROCEDURES ................................... 6-2
6.2.1 RETURN SIGNAL CHECK............................................................................... 6-2
6.2.2 MINIMUM FOCUS CONFIRMATION ............................................................ 6-2
6.2.3 COINCIDENCE TEST........................................................................................ 6-2
6.2.4 MISPOINTING ERROR CHECK ...................................................................... 6-3
6.2.5 CYCLIC ERROR CHECK.................................................................................. 6-4
6.2.6 MECHANICAL CONSTANT SETTING AND TOTAL CHECK.................... 6-5
6.3 GUIDE LIGHT UNIT INSPECTION AND ADJUSTMENT...................... 6-7
6.3.1 INSPECTION ...................................................................................................... 6-7
6.3.2 ADJUSTMENT ................................................................................................... 6-9
7. TELESCOPE UNITS AND EDM PCB SYSTEM ............ 7-1

7.1 ECPU BOARD........................................................................................................7-1
7.1.1 REPLACEMENT ...................................................................................................... 7-1
7.1.2 ADJUSTMENT ......................................................................................................... 7-3
7.2 PX BOARD AND PX BASE WITH ALC COMPLETE .................................7-4
7.2.1 REPLACEMENT ...................................................................................................... 7-4
7.2.2 ADJUSTMENT ......................................................................................................... 7-5
7.3 DICHROIC PRISM ...............................................................................................7-5
7.3.1 REPLACEMENT ...................................................................................................... 7-5
7.3.2 ADJUSTMENT ......................................................................................................... 7-6
7.4 GUIDE LIGHT COMPLETE ..............................................................................7-6
7.4.1 REPLACEMENT ...................................................................................................... 7-6
7.4.2 ADJUSTMENT ......................................................................................................... 7-7
7.5 TX BOARD .............................................................................................................7-7
7.5.1 REPLACEMENT ...................................................................................................... 7-7
7.5.2 ADJUSTMENT ......................................................................................................... 7-8
7.6 SOLENOID COMPLETE ....................................................................................7-9
7.6.1 REPLACEMENT ...................................................................................................... 7-9
7.6.2 ADJUSTMENT ....................................................................................................... 7-10
7.7 CX/LD WITH FRAME AND SHUTTER UNIT.............................................7-11
7.7.1 CX/LD WITH FRAME REPLACEMENT............................................................ 7-11
7.7.2 SHUTTER UNIT PARTS REPLACEMENT........................................................ 7-12
7.7.3 ADJUSTMENT ....................................................................................................... 7-13
7.8 MIRROR COMPLETE AND LASER BEAM MASK ..................................7-14
7.8.1 REPLACEMENT .................................................................................................... 7-14
7.8.2 ADJUSTMENT ....................................................................................................... 7-15
7.9 OBJECTIVE LENS .............................................................................................7-15
7.9.1 REPLACEMENT .................................................................................................... 7-15
7.9.2 ADJUSTMENT ....................................................................................................... 7-17
7
7.10 EYEPIECE ............................................................................................................7-18

7.10.1 CLEANING..............................................................................................................7-18
7.10.2 ADJUSTMENT........................................................................................................7-18
7.11 TELESCOPE RETICLE ....................................................................................7-19
7.11.1 REPLACEMENT.....................................................................................................7-19
7.11.2 ADJUSTMENT........................................................................................................7-20
7.12 FOCUSING UNIT................................................................................................7-20
7.12.1 REPLACEMENT.....................................................................................................7-20
7.12.2 ADJUSTMENT........................................................................................................7-21
7.13 CABLE LAYOUT IN TELESCOPE UNIT.....................................................7-22
8. EDM ADJUSTMENT............................................................8-1
8.1 LASER EMITTING BEAM AND RECEIVING DIODE ADJUSTMENT....8-1
8.1.1 EDM COLLIMATION TOOL..................................................................................8-1
8.1.2 ADJUSTMENT FLOW CHART..............................................................................8-4
8.1.3 PREPARATION FOR ADJUSTMENT ...................................................................8-5
8.1.4 LASER DIODE FOCUS AND POSITION ADJUSTMENT .................................8-9
8.1.5 LASER BEAM MASK POSITION ADJUSTMENT ...........................................8-15
8.1.6 POSITION ADJUSTMENT OF SLIT MASK OF SOLENOID COMPLETE.......8-17
8.1.7 RECEIVING DIODE (APD) POSITION ADJUSTMENT ..................................8-19
8.1.8 SUMMARY OF ADJUSTMENT WITH EDM COLLIMATION TOOL...........8-23
8.2 TEMPERATURE AGING..................................................................................8-25
8.3 TCXO FREQUENCY CHECK .........................................................................8-26
8.3.1 PREPARATION ......................................................................................................8-26
8.3.2 CONFIRMATION ...................................................................................................8-26
8.3.3 CHECK AND REGISTRATION............................................................................8-27
8.4 RETICLE ILLUMINATION CHECK.............................................................8-30
8.4.1 PREPARATION ......................................................................................................8-30
8.4.2 CHECK .....................................................................................................................8-30
8.5 GUIDE LIGHT CHECK.....................................................................................8-31
8.5.1 PREPARATION ......................................................................................................8-31
8.5.2 CHECK .....................................................................................................................8-31
8.6 SHUTTER OPERATION CHECK...................................................................8-32
8.6.1 PREPARATION ......................................................................................................8-32
8.6.2 CHECK .....................................................................................................................8-32
8.7 ATT OPERATION CHECK ..............................................................................8-33
8.7.1 PREPARATION ......................................................................................................8-33
8.7.2 CHECK .....................................................................................................................8-33
8.8 CPU AND FPGA CHECK..................................................................................8-34
8.8.1 PREPARATION ......................................................................................................8-34
8.8.2 CHECK .....................................................................................................................8-34
8.9 ND FILTER UNIT (SOLENOID) OPERATION CHECK...........................8-35
8.9.1 PREPARATION ......................................................................................................8-35
8.9.2 CHECK .....................................................................................................................8-35
8
8.10 LASER DIODE POWER ADJUSTMENT ......................................................8-36

8.10.1 PREPARATION ...................................................................................................... 8-36
8.10.2 ADJUSTMENT ....................................................................................................... 8-36
8.11 REVERSE VOLTAGE (RV) ADJUSTMENT ................................................8-39
8.11.1 PREPARATION ...................................................................................................... 8-39
8.11.2 RV OFFSET REGISTRATION.............................................................................. 8-40
8.11.3 PX TEMPERATURE MEASUREMENT ............................................................. 8-42
8.11.4 RV VOLTAGE ADJUSTMENT............................................................................ 8-42
8.12 GAIN ADJUSTMENT.........................................................................................8-45
8.12.1 PREPARATION ...................................................................................................... 8-45
8.12.2 ADJUSTMENT ....................................................................................................... 8-46
8.13 CAL SIGNAL ADJUSTMENT..........................................................................8-49
8.13.1 PREPARATION ...................................................................................................... 8-49
8.13.2 ADJUSTMENT ....................................................................................................... 8-49
8.14 ATT LEVEL SETTING – CONFIRMATION................................................8-54
8.14.1 PREPARATION ...................................................................................................... 8-54
8.14.2 CONFIRMATION................................................................................................... 8-54
8.15 ATT FULL BLOCK POSITION SETTING – CONFIRMATION .............8-55
8.15.1 PREPARATION ...................................................................................................... 8-55
8.15.2 CONFIRMATION................................................................................................... 8-55
8.16 COINCIDENCE CONSTANT SETTING .......................................................8-56
8.16.1 PREPARATION ...................................................................................................... 8-56
8.16.2 SETTING ................................................................................................................. 8-56
8.17 COINCIDENCE CONSTANT CONFIRMATION........................................8-57
8.17.1 PREPARATION ...................................................................................................... 8-57
8.17.2 CONFIRMATION................................................................................................... 8-57
8.18 PHASE CHECK ...................................................................................................8-60
8.18.1 PREPARATION ...................................................................................................... 8-60
8.18.2 CONFIRMATION................................................................................................... 8-60
8.19 OPTICAL AND ELECTRICAL NOISE CORRECTION CHECK AND
REGISTRATION.................................................................................................8-61
8.19.1 PREPARATION ...................................................................................................... 8-61
8.19.2 CHECK AND REGISTRATION ........................................................................... 8-62
8.20 MISPOINTING ERROR CHECK....................................................................8-63
8.20.1 PREPARATION ...................................................................................................... 8-63
8.20.2 CONFIRMATION................................................................................................... 8-63
8.21 CHECKING THE DISTANCE MEASUREMENT IN TRACKING MODE....8-64
8.21.1 PREPARATION ...................................................................................................... 8-64
8.21.2 CONFIRMATION................................................................................................... 8-64
8.22 DEVICE CHECK.................................................................................................8-66
8.22.1 PREPARATION ...................................................................................................... 8-66
8.22.2 CHECK..................................................................................................................... 8-66
8.23 SAVING THE PARAMETERS ..................................................................................... 8-67
8.23.1 PREPARATION ...................................................................................................... 8-67
8.23.2 SAVING THE PARAMETER FILE...................................................................... 8-67
8.24 EDM OVERALL CHECK..................................................................................8-68
9
9. SERVICE MODE...................................................................9-1
9.1 SERVICE MODE SETTING ...............................................................................9-3
9.2 SERVICE FUNCTIONS .......................................................................................9-4
9.2.1 INITIALIZE MODE ..................................................................................................9-4
9.2.2 EDM MODE.............................................................................................................9-13
9.2.3 ENCODER, TILT MODE .......................................................................................9-21
9.2.4 TEST MODE............................................................................................................9-34
10. ERROR MESSAGES AND ERROR CODES..................10-1

10.1 ERROR MESSAGES ..........................................................................................10-1
10.2 ERROR CODES...................................................................................................10-4
10.2.1 EDT ...........................................................................................................................10-4
10.2.2 EDM..........................................................................................................................10-9
11. EXPLODED VIEW

(NAMES OF PARTS, LUBRICATION) ..................................11-1
11.1 TRIBRACH TR-102 ............................................................................................11-3
11.2 AXIS FLANGE, H-SLIPRING ..........................................................................11-5
11.3 VERTICAL AXIS, CMOS FRAME H .............................................................11-7
11.4 OPTICAL PLUMMET, LASER PLUMMET, HANDLE.............................11-9
11.5 TR COVER, TRIGGER KEY, TRGK BOARD ...........................................11-11
11.6 CLAMP AND FINE MOTION SCREWS, DISPLAY .................................11-13
11.7 IF COVER ...........................................................................................................11-15
11.8 TILT SENSOR, TELESCOPE CLAMP, V CONTACT RING,
JX BOARD, LASER BOARD ..........................................................................11-17
11.9 HORIZONTAL AXIS, CMOS FRAME V.....................................................11-19
11.10 TELESCOPE FRAME AND TELECOPE COVERS, ECPU BOARD,
PX BOARD, DICHROIC PRISM.................................................................11-21
11.11 CX/LD, SHUTTER, CAL FILTER, SOLENOID COMPLETE,
GUIDE LIGHT, TX BOARD ........................................................................11-23
11.12 OBJECTIVE LENS, FOCUSING TUBE, FOCUSING RING ................11-25
11.13 PORRO PRISM, RETICLE, EYEPIECE ...................................................11-27
11.14 CASE PARTS...................................................................................................11-29
11.15 CASE WITH CARDBOARD AND CUSHION ..........................................11-31
11.16 DCPU BOARD .................................................................................................11-33
10
12. APPENDICES ...................................................................... 12-1

I. SPECIFICATIONS .......................................................................................... 12-3
II. NAMES OF PARTS......................................................................................... 12-9
III. REMOVING THE HANDLE ........................................................................ 12-13
IV. INSTALLING / REMOVING THE BATTERY........................................ 12-15
V. KEY FUNCTIONS......................................................................................... 12-17
VI. DISPLAY SYMBOLS..................................................................................... 12-21
VII. MODE DIAGRAM.......................................................................................... 12-25
VIII. CHANGING THE INSTRUMENT PARAMETERS ............................... 12-27
VIII.1 EDM SETTINGS (ITEMS SET, OPTIONS,
INPUT RANGE) ................................................................................... 12-27
VIII.2 CONFIG MODE SETTINGS (ITEMS SET, OPTIONS,
INPUT RANGE) ................................................................................... 12-28
IX. EDM ADJUSTMENT PROGRAM: “1131EDM-ADJ.EXE”
AND “1131EDM-ADJ.XLS”......................................................................... 12-35
IX.1 PROGRAM INSTALLATION............................................................. 12-35
IX.2 USING THE PROGRAM.................................................................... 12-35
IX.3 PROGRAM FUNCTIONS .................................................................. 12-36
X. TOOLS.............................................................................................................. 12-41
X.1 STANDARD TOOLS ............................................................................ 12-41
X.2 MEASURING INSTRUMENTS ......................................................... 12-42
X.3 SPECIAL TOOLS ................................................................................. 12-42
XI. POWER SUPPLY SYSTEM ......................................................................... 12-51
XII. LOW TEMPERATURE MODELS AND
HIGH TEMPERATURE MODELS............................................................. 12-53
XIII. CX SERIES WITH BLUETOOTH FUNCTIONALITY .......................... 12-59
XIII.1 PARTS OF BLUETOOTH COMMUNICATION UNIT ................ 12-91
XIII.1 ACTIVATION OF BLUETOOTH FUNCTION USING
SERVICE MODE .................................................................................. 12-59
XIV. TROUBLESHOOTING ................................................................................. 12-61
XIV.1 TROUBLE IN ANGLE UNIT ............................................................. 12-61
XIV.2 TROUBLE IN EDM UNIT .................................................................. 12-67
XIV.3 OTHERS................................................................................................. 12-71
11
INTRODUCTION
This manual describes the replacement, adjustment and inspection procedures for the following
units of the CX-101/CX-102/CX-13/CX-105/CX-107 instruments:
- horizontal encoder and vertical axis unit,
- vertical encoder and horizontal axis unit,
- PCBs of the theodolite part,
- X-Y tilt sensor,
- telescope unit,
- EDM unit (PCBs, LD and APD, ALC sensor, ATT motor with filter, shutter motor, solenoid
motor with ND filter and optical parts).
The CX Series replaces previous generation of Sokkia’s products Series 50RX. The instruments
are featured by the following main functions:
• EDM performs accurate measurements to either standard glass prisms, reflective sheet targets
or reflectorless targets. The reflectorless distance measurement range has been extended to
500m (1,640ft).
• Tilt sensor range of compensation is ±6’.
• Keyboard of the instruments is equipped with 25 keys (soft function, operations, power on,
light) with illuminator
• One-touch star key {} offers instant access to functions.
• Conveniently located “trigger” key lets taking a series of measurements with the push of a
button without taking operator’s eye off the telescope.
• CX conforms to IP66 (IEC 60529: 2001) specifications for waterproofing and dust resistance
when the battery cover and external interface hatch are closed and connector cap is attached
correctly.
• Rechargeable Li-ion batteries BDC70 (new type) featured by longer working duration are used.
• As an external memory USB flash memory (up to 8GB) can be used.
• Guide light is available as a standard feature.
• The standard models (operating temperature -20°C to 50°C (-4°F to 122°F)), Low
Temperature Models (operating temperature -30°C to 50°C (-22°F to 122°F)) and High
Temperature Models (operating temperature -20°C to 60°C (-4°F to 140°F)) are available.
• Depending on the instrument type the serial connector is installed in the standard base (CX-
103/CX-105/CX-107) or combined communications and power source connector is installed
in the axis flange (CX-101/CX-102/Low Temperature Models: CX-103/CX-105).
• IACS and IACS-SD (Independent Angle Calibration System and Independent Angle
Calibration System for Single Detector) for all models except CX-103 are provided to enhance
accuracy of angle measurement. Double detection encoder is applied in CX-101/CX-102/
CX-103 and single detection encoder is used in CX-105/CX-107.
• The angle reading is fast as a result of fast slit check operation. The disk pattern has been
redesigned to minimize the error and the CMOS linear sensor has been applied as a detector
of the encoder unit instead of the CCD linear sensor.
• The plate level is not used any more. The rough levelling is done referring to the circular level
and fine levelling is done by reading the X-Y tilt sensor data shown on the instrument display.
12
• Optionally the laser plummet and Bluetooth functionality is available.

• TSshield is a standard feature. Its advanced communication system provides reliable and quick
security, asset tracking and remote diagnostics, and support to users based upon the data in the
server.
Caution! If the brand new CX is equipped with
TSshield functionality, this instrument
requires registration of TSshield. If the
registration is not done, the “User
registration” screen is always displayed after
turning the instrument ON.
User registration
CX-103 A
SN XXXXXX
ID Code : XXXX-XXXX
Un lo ck cd: a b fg h ik lm
CHECK DEMO iOKi
TSshield sticker is attached to

the instruments equipped with
TSshield functionality
Press [DEMO] key to go to Demonstration mode. The instrument will display prompt for
registration frequently for a period of 5 seconds. Please note that all inspections and
adjustments described in this manual can be carried out in Demonstration mode and the
registration can be performed later by subsidiary, dealer or user referring to the “TSshield
Instruction manual – “Introduction” volume”.
When operating, repairing, or adjusting the instruments follow the precautionary measures:
CX is classified as a Class 1 Laser Product according to IEC Standard Publication 60825-1
ED.2.0: 2007 and United States Government Code of Federal Regulation FDA CDRH 21CFR
Part 1040.10 and 1040.11 (Complies with FDA performance standards for laser products except
for deviations pursuant to Laser Notice No.50, dated June 24, 2007.)
• EDM device in objective lens: Class 3R Laser Product
• Laser plummet (option): Class 2 Laser Product
13
Caution! Use of controls, adjustment, or performance of procedures other than those

specified herein may result in hazardous radiation.
• When repairing, adjusting or inspecting the CX, avoid direct exposure to the laser beam.
Doing so could cause permanent eye damage.
• Personnel exposed to the laser beam at close range are
advised to wear eye protection glasses for Helium-Neon
radiation.
Recommended safety glasses from Yamamoto Optics Co.,
Ltd. – full absorption type YL-331 (for He-Ne laser
radiation) or maintenance type YL-331M (for visible
semiconductor laser radiation), or goggle type – full
absorption type YL-110 (for He-Ne laser radiation),
or maintenance type YL-110M (for visible semiconductor laser radiation).
Caution
• Never point the laser beam at another person. If the laser beam strikes skin or an eye, it
could cause serious injury.
• Do not look directly into the laser beam source. Doing so could cause permanent eye
damage.
• Do not stare at the laser beam. Doing so could cause permanent eye damage.
• If an eye injury is caused by exposure to the laser beam, seek immediate medical attention
from a licensed ophthalmologist.
• Perform checks at start of work and periodic checks and adjustments with the laser beam
emitted under normal conditions.
• When disposing of the instrument, destroy the battery connector so that the laser beam
cannot be emitted.
• Operate the instrument with due caution to avoid injuries that may be caused by the laser
beam unintentionally striking a person in the eye. Avoid setting the instrument at heights at
which the path of the laser beam may strike pedestrians or drivers at head height.
• Do not point the laser beam at mirrors, windows or surfaces that are highly reflective. The
reflected laser beam could cause serious injury.
• When using the Laser-pointer function, be sure to turn OFF the output laser after distance
measurement is completed. Even if distance measurement is canceled, the Laser-pointer
function is still operating and the laser beam continues to be emitted. (After turning ON the
Laser-pointer, the laser beam is emitted for 5 minutes, and then automatically switches OFF.
But in the Status screen and when target symbol (ex. ) is not displayed in the OBS mode,
the laser beam is not automatically turned OFF.)
14
• Only those who have been received training as per the following items shall use this product.
• Read the Operator’s Manual for usage procedures for this product.
• Hazardous protection procedures (read this chapter).
• Requisite protective gear (read this chapter).
• Accident reporting procedures (stipulate procedures beforehand for transporting the
injured and contacting physicians in case there are laser induced injuries).
• Areas in which the lasers are used should be posted with laser warning notices.
• Wherever reasonably practicable the beam should be terminated at the end of its useful path,
and the laser should not be aimed at people (at head height).
• When using Service mode, especially the EDM mode, exit immediately the respective
functions after the instrument inspection is completed.
• When the instrument is not being used and any long run test or other service inspections are
not being carried out, turn OFF the power.
Follow the safety instructions on the labels attached to the instrument as well as in this manual to
ensure safe use of this laser product.
* : only for instruments with laser plummet option

15
Restoring Default Settings

The following explains the two methods of restoring default settings:
- Restoring set items to initial settings and turning power on
- Initializing the data and turning power on
• Restore the following items to the initial settings when the CX was shipped: EDM setting,
Config mode settings (including softkey arrays).
• Initialize the data. The following data is initialized:
Data within all jobs
Known point data within memory
Code data within memory
PROCEDURE Restoring set items to initial settings and turning power on
1. Turn the power off.
2. While pressing {F4} and {B.S.}, press { }.
3. The CX is turned on, “Default set” appears on the screen and all items are restored to their
initial settings.
PROCEDURE Initializing the data and turning the power on
1. Turn the power off.
2. While pressing {F1}, {F3} and {B.S.}, press { }.
3. The CX is turned on, “Clearing memory...” appears on the screen and all items are restored
to their initial settings.
Symbols:
The following conventions are used in this manual:
" Indicates supplementary explanation (note)
) Indicates the chapter (section) or illustration which are relevant or should be referred to
[OK] Indicates softkeys on the display
{ESC} Indicates operation keys on CX
Maintenance:
• Wipe off moisture completely, if the instrument gets wet during survey work.
• Always clean the instrument before returning it to the case. The lenses require special care.
First, dust them off with the lens brush to remove tiny particles. Then, clean using mixture of
alcohol and ether or after providing a little condensation by breathing on the lens, wipe it with
the wiping cloth.
• If the display is dirty, carefully wipe it with a soft, dry cloth. To clean other parts of the
instrument or the carrying case, lightly moisten a soft cloth in a mild detergent solution.
Wring out excess water until the cloth is slightly damp, then carefully wipe the surface of the
unit. Do not use any alkaline cleaning solutions, alcohol, or any other organic solvents on the
instrument or display.
16
The CX Series is available in "standard", "High Temperature", and "Low Temperature" models.
Users with a "Low Temperature Model" should read the additional precautions specific to use
under low temperatures.
This service manual describes the adjustment and inspection procedures specific for each model.
The parts compatibility is also stated.
● Low Temperature Models
Low Temperature Models display the seal shown at
right. Do not remove the Low Temperature Model
seal (sticker 1) from the instrument. This seal is used
for model recognition.
Low Temperature
Model sticker 1
1-1
1. ELECTRICAL AND OPTICAL DIAGRAMS

1.1 OPTICAL LIGHT PATH DIAGRAM
1-2
1.2 DT UNIT - BLOCK DIAGRAM

1-3
1.3 EDM UNIT - BLOCK DIAGRAM

1-4
1.4 DT UNIT - CONNECTION DIAGRAM
USB(A) INT_BATT
CN6
1-5
BZ
ECPU
TS_COMM
EXT_BATT EXT_BATT
1-6
TSshield 2G unit
1-7
TSshield 3G unit
1-8
1.5 EDM UNIT –CONNECTION DIAGRAM

to SLIPRING
CN204
PI3
PI SENSOR
PI1 PI2
RTCL
LED1 PI SENSOR
Z242
Z241
Z240
2-1
2. EXTERNAL APPEARANCE CHECK AND INSPECTION

WITH COLLIMATORS
2.1 SUMMARY OF INSPECTION
* Checking recommended for the new instruments as a pre-delivery inspection (PDI)
INSPECTION SPECIFICATION
CX-101 CX-102 CX-103 CX-105 CX-107
1* Setup of collimator system (1) Align reticles of collimator A and B to each other
2* External appearance check Outer sections and optics clean. Painted, plated and
plastic parts without damages, scratches, etc.
3* Rotating/moving parts function check Smooth movement and rotation
4* Key function check All keys in good operating conditions
5* Date and time setting check -----
6 USB port function check -----
7 Bluetooth function check -----
8 Sighting collimator check (Left/Right) ≤ ±10’ (e.g. ≤ ±14mm at 5m distance)
H and V constant input (5) -----
9 Slit check (5) -----
10* Optical plummet centering ≤ 0.5mm (when tripod head height is 1.3m)
Laser plummet centering 1mm or less (when tripod head height is 1.3m)
Laser spot diameter check φ3mm or less
11* Index error of X-Y tilt sensor (3) ≤ ±10”
12 Accuracy of tilt sensor (2) (at ±6’) (3) ≤ ±3” ≤ ±6” ≤ ±10” ≤ ±15”
13 Tilt sensor range of compensation (2) ±6’ or more
14* Circular level check -----
15 Verticality of vertical axis (2) ≤ 6” ≤ 10”
16 Horizontal axis wobble (3) at horizontal position: ≤ 5”, at ±30°: ≤ 7”
17* Sighting axis Left/Right ≤ 0.24mm
(3)
deviation Up/Down ≤ 0.24mm
18* Horizontality of horizontal axis (2) < 10”
19* Double center adjustment of horizontal ≤ 8”
axis and telescope axis (collimation) (2) ≤ 8” ≤ 10”
≤ 6” (4)
Reticle vertical hair-line inclination 1 vertical hair-line or less
20 Horizontal eccentricity (2) --- --- --- ≤ 12” ≤ 30”
21 Vertical eccentricity (2) --- --- --- < 12” < 30”
22* Vertical 0 point error (2) ≤ 15” ≤ 20” ≤ 30”
23 Vertical constant difference (2) ≤ 10” ≤ 20” ≤ 30”
24 Hor. angle 2-collimator inspection ≤ 10” ≤ 20” ≤ 30”
accuracy (2) 5-collimator inspection ≤ 1” ≤ 2” ≤ 3” ≤ 5” ≤ 7”
(4) (4) (4) (4)
≤ 0.7” ≤ 1.4” ≤ 2.1” ≤ 3.5” ≤ 4.9” (4)
2-2
(1)
Reference: JSIMA 114: 2002 (“Guideline for the Checks and Adjustments of the Collimator
System to Surveying Instruments”)
(2)
The inspection tolerances are in accordance with Japanese Surveying Instruments
Manufacturers’ Association standard: JSIMA 101: 2002 (“Theodolites”)
(3)
The inspection tolerances comply with manufacturer’s standard
(4)
Specifications for Chinese market
(5)
If the instrument was adjusted in advance (for example the pre-delivery inspection is carried
out), do not perform “H and V Constant input” function. In this case the next inspection – “Slit
check” should be done using “Standard” mode () section 2.2.8 step (3)).
Perform all inspections with the battery BDC70 installed in the instrument.
2.2 INSPECTION PROCEDURES
2.2.1 EXTERNAL APPEARANCE CHECK

(1) Check visually that the outer sections of the instrument are clean. Check the painted,
plated and plastic parts for any damages, scratches, etc.
(2) Confirm that the optical units are clean (objective lens, eyepiece, inner optical parts as
seen through the objective lens, optical plummet optics).
2.2.2 ROTATING/MOVING PARTS FUNCTION CHECK

(1) Check to confirm smoothness of rotation of the CX units: focusing rings, eyepiece
knobs, clamp and fine motion screws and levelling screws.
(2) Turn the standard base and telescope to verify smooth rotation of the vertical axis and
horizontal axis.
" If any abnormality is supposed to occur, confirm the horizontal axis torque (standard: force
250g or less). Check the force inspecting the telescope at the eyepiece. The standard torque
for the vertical axis is specified by force within 150g as checked at the optical plummet
eyepiece (laser plummet).
(3) Confirm smooth functioning of the external interface (USB) hatch and battery cover
with lock buttons.
2-3
2.2.3 KEY FUNCTION CHECK Example:
(1) Confirm that the instrument is turned OFF. While Key check
holding {F1}, {F4} and {FUNC} keys, press { } to ( F4 )

enter Service mode.
Hit any key
(2) Press { T } key a few times until service mode “Test”
is highlighted. Press {ENT} key and then select
service function “Key check”. Press { F4 } key
Key check
(3) Press the instrument keys one by one and confirm the
correct display indication. ( F4 )
" When pressing any key, the relevant key name is Hit any key
shown on the display. The { } and {ESC} keys
are only exception.
Press { SHIFT } key
If { } key is pressed, the illumination is
ON and OFF and (ILM) message is displayed. If Key check
{ } key is pressed, dual tone beep sounds and
( SFT )
(STAR) is displayed. If {±#%@} is pressed, (+) is
displayed. If {ESC} key is pressed, the instrument Hit any key
exits to “Test” mode submenu.
(4) When the inspection is completed press {ESC} key to
exit to “Test” mode submenu.
2.2.4 DATE AND TIME SETTING CHECK

(1) Enter Service mode () section 9.1).
(2) Select service function “Date and time” in “Initialize”
Date and time
mode submenu. Verify the proper setting of date and
time. If necessary, input the correct data. Date: 12032011
Time: 11:25:33
Date: Manually input date (format MMDDYYYY), e.g.
December 3, 2011 is input as “12032011.
Time: Manually input time (format HHMMSS), e.g.
Date and time
2:43:59 pm is input as “144359”.
Press {ENT} key. Date: Dec/03/2011
Time: 14:43:59
" Date and time can be set (confirmed) in Service mode
as well as User mode.
2-4
2.2.5 USB PORT FUNCTION CHECK

(1) Enter Service mode () section 9.1).
(2) Select service function “Media check” in “Test” mode submenu.
" “Media” function is activated when the “Media” option
is set by “Initialize” Æ “Inst. flg” service function to Set USB memory.
“Yes”.
(3) When the screen as shown at right is displayed insert
the USB flash memory in the USB port located in the
external interface hatch.
media test - USB
(4) The communication with the USB flash memory will be 0x55 : OK
checked automatically. Make sure that “USB check 0xAA : OK
0x00 : OK
OK!!” message is displayed when the test is completed. 0xFF : OK
USB check OK!!
(5) Press {ESC} key and remove the USB flash memory
from the USB port.
2.2.6 BLUETOOTH FUNCTION CHECK

" The Bluetooth function is available when the CX is equipped with the Bluetooth module
and dipole antenna.
(1) Connect the adapter with the Bluetooth module to the computer or use Bluetooth
functionality of the computer equipped with Bluetooth function.
" If the Bluetooth adapter (USB type or COM port type) is not available, any device with
Bluetooth module, for example NET, SET, SRX, CX instruments, data collectors etc., can
be used for Bluetooth function check. Simple inspection can be done by checking that the
Bluetooth ID and Address are displayed in “Config” mode “Comms setup” Æ “My
device info” Æ “Bluetooth ID” screen.
(2) In the CX “Config” mode, select “Comms setup”.
Wireless :Yes
Set “Wireless” option to “Yes”. Bluetooth setup
" If the companion Bluetooth device is intended to Link device list
My device info
be set to “Master”, select “My device Info”. The
Bluetooth information for the CX is displayed. The
“BD ADDR” of the CX must be registered on your
paired Bluetooth device. Bluetooth ID:
XXXXXXX, XXXXXXXX
Firmware: X.X.X
BD_ADDR:
ABCDEF012345
2-5
(3) Select “Link device list”. Link device list

" Either instrument Bluetooth device or paired DEVICE1
DEVICE2
Bluetooth device can be set to “Master” mode. DEVICE3
Setting mentioned in this manual is based on the DEVICE4
EDIT DEL
assumption that the CX Bluetooth device specified
in “Bluetooth setup” screen is set to “Master”.
Device registration
(4) In “Link device list” screen, press [EDIT] while Name: A
DEVICE1aaaa
DEVICE1 is highlighted to set the paired BD_ADDR:
Bluetooth device as DEVICE1.
REG
" Any DEVICE in “Link device list” screen can be
selected for the paired Bluetooth device. Device registration
Name: A
(5) Press [REG] or { T } key and then [SEARCH] to DEVICE1
search for the Bluetooth companion devices. BD_ADDR:
abcdefghiklm
SEARCH REG
(6) When the device identification code(s) is shown on the Inquiry…

screen, press { T } or { S } key to select the 000B53120592
001B54110570
companion device. Press [OK] and then [REG] to
return to “Link device list” screen.
SEARCH OK
(7) Press {ESC} and then select “Bluetooth setup”. Using Mode :Master
{ S } or { T } key highlight “Mode” setting and using Link:DEVICE1
Authentication:No
{ X } or { W } key set “Mode” to “Master”. Then press
{ENT} key.
Check sum: No
(8) Press {ESC} key 3 times and [OBS] key to return to OBS
OBS mode screen. Wait a while and make sure that the ppm 0
S
Bluetooth icon is displayed, indicating the established ZA 90°00’09” ⊥+
communication. HA-R 129 ° 0 0 ’ 0 9 ” P 1
M E A S S H V 0 S E T COORD
" The Bluetooth icon indicates communication status.
When “Mode” in “Bluetooth setup” is set to “Master”, Bluetooth icon indicates
CX will attempt to establish connection with the status of established
designated Bluetooth device (specified in “Link device communication
list” in “Bluetooth setup” screen).
If communication is not initiated, press [ ] in the
4th page of OBS mode screen. The Bluetooth module
in the CX powers on and connection starts.
2-6
(9) Start TeraTerm communication program (free software terminal emulator) on the
computer (on the condition that the Bluetooth communication is established with the
computer) and set the following communication parameters:
Baud rate: 9600
Data: 8bit
Parity: none
Stop 1bit
Flow control: Xon/Xoff
Select the communication port respectively.
(a) Sight any target and start distance measurement sending 11hex ⎡CR⎦ ⎡LF⎦ start
command from the computer (press <Ctrl> <Q> keys on the computer keyboard,
followed by <ENTER> key).
" The measuring mode: repeat / single and reflector type N-Prism / Prism / Sheet can be
selected in EDM screen of the CX (press [EDM] in 2nd page of OBS mode).
" When repeat mode is selected for distance measurement, use stop command 12hex
⎡CR⎦ ⎡LF⎦ sent from the computer to stop measurement (press <Ctrl> <R> keys on the
computer keyboard, followed by <ENTER> key).
(b) Confirm that the distance is measured by the CX and the Tera Term screen shows
distance and angle data respectively.
Sdist ZA HA-R
" If the tilt error codes are displayed instead of angles, the instrument is not levelled.
(10) Turn the instrument OFF.

2-7
2.2.7 SIGHTING COLLIMATOR CHECK

(1) Sight any target at a distance of about 5m. If necessary, Tolerance:
loosen the fixing screw and turn the sighting
collimator left or right, so that it is pointing towards Left/Right ±10’ or less
the target. The tolerance for adjustment is 10’ (±14mm
on the conditions that the distance to the target is 5m).
After adjustment tighten the screw fixing the sighting
collimator. Check the sighting collimators on both
telescope covers.
±14mm/5m
fixing screw
Fig.2-1 Fig. 2-2
2.2.8 H AND V CONSTANT INPUT AND SLIT CHECK

Only if there are any abnormalities in the horizontal and (or) vertical angle measurement, or the
encoder unit was repaired, input the horizontal and vertical encoder constant data. Otherwise
proceed directly to “Slit check” as described below.
• Horizontal and vertical encoder constant check and input to the internal memory
• Slit check
(1) Using Service mode, select function “Constant” in Constant
“Encoder, Tilt” mode submenu and press [H] key.
H :1/4
" If the instrument was adjusted in advance (for example HA-R 194°00’00”
the pre-delivery inspection of the factory adjusted >>> <<<
OKi
instrument is carried out), do not perform “Constant”
setting function. In this case the next inspection – “Slit
Check” should be carried out using “Standard” mode. (To find out the difference between
“Standard” mode and “Initial” mode refer to section 9.2.3 step (3), page 9-29).
(a) Turn the standard base each 90° and press [OK] key Constant
to calculate and input to the internal memory the
H :4/4
horizontal encoder constant data (for details ) OK !!
section 9.2.3 step (2)).
OKi
2-8
(2) Select service function “Constant” in “Encoder, Tilt”

Constant
mode submenu and press [V] key.
V :1/4
ZA 202°00’00”
OKi
…
(a) Turn the telescope each 90° and press [OK] key to
calculate and input to the internal memory the V constant
vertical encoder constant data (for details ) section V :4/4
9.2.3 step (2)). OK !!
OKi
(3) Select service function “Slit check” in “Encoder, Tilt”
mode submenu.
" If the inspection of the instrument is performed directly by “Slit Check” function without
“Constant” input, use “Standard” mode for testing the encoders. If necessary, press
[MD_H] key and [MD_V] key to select “Standard” mode for the horizontal encoder and
vertical encoder slit check function. “H: S, V:S” will be displayed on the upper line of the
screen.
(4) Press [ H ] to select H encoder for the following test. Example: press [ H ]
(5) Turn the standard base slowly all around (360°) to Slit check (H:S,V:S)
confirm the horizontal encoder slit pattern configuration.
Make sure that “END !!” message is displayed when the HA-R 202°46’41”
test is finished. If the “Warning” counts are different Start !!
_MD_H _MD_V H i V i
than “000-000” for double detector or “000” for single
detector (the dust particles are detected), however the
…
display does not show any error code(s), you can regard
the test as successful and you do need to take any Slit check (H:S,V:S)
Warning:002-001
additional measures (i.e. cleaning the encoder unit is not ZA 177°53’37”
necessary). HA-R 191°59’56”
END !!
" To complete all procedures the standard base can be _MD_H _MD_V H i V i
rotated either clockwise or counterclockwise. Any
position of the standard base can be selected as the test
starting point.
" If any error code(s) is displayed, repeat the test and if the problem persists, check the
connections and clean the disk and (or) CMOS sensor(s). After cleaning perform the
following procedures:
(1) After cleaning the CMOS sensor(s):
Input “Constant” and perform “Slit check” in “Initial” mode (H:I, V:S”). Make sure
that error code(s) in no more displayed. Even if the “Warning” counts are different
than ”000-000” (or “000”), no further measures are necessary on the condition that
“END !!” message is displayed, when the test is completed.
(2) After cleaning the disk only:
Perform “Slit check” in “Standard” mode (H:S, V:S”). Make sure that error code(s)
is no more displayed and “END !!” message is shown, when the test is completed.
2-9
(3) If the error code(s) is displayed despite cleaning the encoder, perform detail inspection
– check the encoder signals using “Running Test” function () section 9.2.4 step (1)).
" If during the test display shows message “Back !!” Slit check (H:S,V:S)
instead of “Go !!” and beep sounds continuously, turn Warning:000-000
the standard base backwards (reverse to the originally
HA-R 206°48’49”
selected direction), until both displayed HA-R angles HA-R 188°23’49”Back
become close to each other. The short beep sounds and _MD_H _MD_V H i V i
display instantly shows “Check !!” and then “Go !!”.
Subsequently continue the test, turning the standard
base forward (in the originally selected direction).
(6) Press {ESC} key and perform inspection of the vertical Example: press [ V ]
encoder. To select the encoder press [ V ] key.
Slit check (H:S,V:S)
(7) Turn the telescope slowly all around (360°) to confirm ZA 175°03’35”
the vertical encoder slit pattern configuration. Make sure
that “END !!” message is displayed when the test is Start !!
_MD_H _MD_V H i V i
finished. If the “Warning” counts are different than
“000-000” for double detector or “000” for single
…
detector (the dust particles are detected), however the
display does not show any error code(s), you can regard Slit check (H:S,V:S)
Warning:001-002
the test as successful and you do not need to take any ZA 177°51’22
additional measures (i.e. cleaning the encoder unit is not HA-R 191°59’56”
END !!
necessary). _MD_H _MD_V H i V i
" To complete all procedures the telescope can be rotated
either clockwise or counterclockwise. Any position of
the telescope can be selected as the test starting point.
" If any error code(s) is displayed, repeat the test and if the problem persists, check the
connections and clean the disk and (or) CMOS sensor(s). After cleaning perform the
following procedures:
(1) After cleaning the CMOS sensor(s):
Input “Constant” and perform “Slit check” in “Initial” mode (H:S, V:I”). Make sure
that error code(s) in no more displayed. Even if the “Warning” counts are different
than ”000-000” (or “000”), no further measures are necessary on the condition that
“END !!” message is displayed, when the test is completed.
(2) After cleaning the disk only:
Perform “Slit check” in “Standard” mode (H:S, V:S”). Make sure that error code(s)
is no more displayed and “END !!” message is shown, when the test is completed.
(3) If the error code(s) are displayed despite cleaning the encoder, perform detail
inspection – check the encoder signals using “Running Test” function () section
9.2.4 step (1)).
2-10
" If during the test display shows message “Back !!” Slit check (H:S,V:S)
instead of “Go !!” and beep sounds continuously, turn Warning:000-000
ZA 199°06’42”
the telescope backwards (reverse to the originally
selected direction), until both displayed ZA angles ZA 183°03’35” Back
become close to each other. The short beep sounds and _MD_H _MD_V H i V i
display instantly shows “Check !!” and then “Go !!”.
Subsequently continue the test, turning the telescope
forward (in the originally selected direction).
(8) Press {ESC} key and turn the instrument OFF.
2.2.9 OPTICAL PLUMMET CHECK

(1) Set up the tripod at a height of approx. 1.3m. Affix the Tolerance:
instrument on the tripod head.
Centering within 0.5mm
(2) Carefully level the instrument and exactly center the at 1.3m height
target point in the reticle of the optical plummet.
Turn the levelling screws for the fine alignment.
(3) Turn the upper part through 180° and check
the position of the target point in the
plummet reticle. If the target is still
centered, no adjustment is necessary. correct half of
If the target point is not centered within the deviation by
tolerance, perform the following adjusting screws
adjustment:
correct half of
(a) Correct half the deviation with the deviation by
levelling screws. levelling screws 1/2
1/2
(b) Remove the optical plummet reticle

cover. Use the 4 adjusting screws of the
optical plummet to adjust the remaining
half of the deviation. Be careful to adjust
all the adjustment screws by the same
amount so that none will be over-
tightened.
(c) Check to make sure that the target point
remains centered even if the standard
base is rotated. If necessary, perform the
adjustment again. optical plummet
reticle cover
(d) Replace the optical plummet reticle
cover. Fig. 2-3
2-11
2.2.9A LASER PLUMMET CHECK

(1) Set up the tripod at a height of approx.
Tolerance:
1.3m. Affix the instrument on the tripod
head. Centering within 1mm at 1.3m height
Laser spot diameter: φ3mm or less
(2) Level the instrument and turn on the laser
plummet. Press [TILT] in the second
page of OBS mode to display the circular
level on the screen. Press [L-ON]. The laser plummet beam will be emitted from the
bottom of the instrument.
(3) Use the { X } or { W } key to adjust the brightness of the laser.
" If the instrument is checked in the workshop (where the
room light is relatively weak comparing, for example, to the
outdoor conditions), it is recommended to set the brightness
of the laser beam to minimum.
(4) Rotate the standard base and place a target so that it is
aligned with the center of the circle created by the
rotating laser plummet beam.
" You can prepare the adjustment target using the graph target
paper with the 1mm grid pattern.
If the laser beam spot deviation from the center of the
target remains within 1mm, no adjustment is necessary.
If the laser beam strays from the center of the target
more than standard, proceed to the adjustment. Fig. 2-4
Make sure that the diameter of the laser beam spot is
within φ3mm (the spot size should be within standard as checked at the maximum laser
brightness selected by the instrument key operation).
Adjustment procedures:
(5) Remove the laser plummet cap by turning
counterclockwise.
(6) Turn ON the laser plummet.
Fig. 2-5
2-12
(7) Note the current position (x) of the laser beam.

(8) Turn the standard base through 180° and
note the new position (y) of the laser beam.
Adjustment will bring the laser beam to a
point midway along a line drawn between Fig. 2-6
these 2 positions.
(9) Check the position of the desired final position. Place a
target so that its center is aligned with the desired final
position.
target
Fig. 2-7
The remaining deviation will be adjusted using the 4 fine adjustment screws.
" Be careful to adjust all the fine adjustment screws by the same amount so that none will
be over-tightened. Tighten the screws with torque of 3kgfcm (0.3Nm).
(10) When the laser beam is on the upper (lower) part of Fig. 2- desired final position
8 the up/down adjustment is made as follows:
Using the hexagonal key wrench slightly loosen the upper
(lower) screw and tighten the lower (upper) screw.
Make sure that the tightening tension for both screws is
identical.
Continue to adjust until the laser beam is on the horizontal
line of the target.
Fig. 2-8
(11) When the laser beam is in the right (left) part of Fig. 2-9
the left (right) adjustment is made as follows:
Using the hexagonal key wrench slightly loosen the
right (left) screw and tighten the left (right) screw.
Make sure that the tightening tension for both screws
is identical.
Continue to adjust until the laser beam is aligned with
the target center.
Fig. 2-9
2-13
(12) Turn the standard base and check that the laser beam is now aligned with the target
center.
(13) Reattach the laser plummet cap.
Tightening each of the fine adjustment screws moves the laser plummet beam in the directions
shown below.
Tighten “Up” screw
Tighten “Right”
screw Tighten “Left”
screw
Tighten “Down” screw
Laser plummet adjustment cap

pointing towards user
Fig. 2-10
2-14
2.2.10 INSPECTION WITH COLLIMATORS – PREPARATION

(1) Level collimators A and B and align their optical axes.
(2) Place the instrument on the inspection stand approximately at the center of the base so
that one levelling screw is pointing towards collimator A. Bring the instrument to
collimator height and tighten the fixing clamp.
collimator A position of levelling screws collimator B

Fig. 2-11
collimator C
(1)
collimator B
(2)
(5)
collimator D
(3)
collimator A inspection
(4) stand
Fig. 2-12
2-15
" Standard Sokkia’s collimator system includes the 4 collimators: A, B, C and D. At least one
more collimator is necessary, while checking the horizontal angle accuracy of the CX-101
and CX-102. Total 5 collimators (1)∼(5) are necessary, if you intend to inspect the
horizontal angle accuracy according to JSIMA standard (precise 5-collimator inspection).
" Before starting the CX adjustment and inspection using collimators, check (change) the
instrument parameters to the factory settings. The default settings are restored easily when
the instrument power is OFF and then while holding {F4} and {B.S.} keys, { } is pressed.
The CX is turned ON and “Default set” message is briefly displayed. Note however that, if
any softkey allocations are preset in advance by user, they will be reset to the default
settings. The procedure mentioned does not initialize the user data.
" For inspection of the angular data set the angle resolution to 1”.
2.2.11 INDEX ERROR OF TILT SENSOR

(1) Press { } key to turn the CX ON. When the Tilt Tolerance:
screen is displayed level the instrument so that the face
±10” or less
left (F1) and face right (F2) tilt indications differ no
more than 10”.
" The Tilt screen is also accessible in the 2nd page of
Tilt x
OBS mode. Press {FUNC} key to go to the 2nd page
and then [TILT] key to enter Tilt screen. X 0’12”
Y -0’08” Y
(2) Collimate the collimator A in face left (F1). Wait for a few seconds until the tilt angle
readings are steady and read the tilt angle values, as X1 and Y1.
(3) Rotate the upper part of the CX through 180° (i.e. collimate the collimator A in face
right (F2)). Wait a few seconds for the display to stabilize, then read the tilt angles X2
and Y2.
(4) Calculate the offset value:
X (X direction index error) = (X1 + X2) / 2
Y (Y direction index error) = (Y1 + Y2) / 2
(5) If the index errors X and Y are within the tolerance, no adjustment is necessary.
2-16
If out of the tolerance:

(1) Turn the instrument OFF. While holding {F1}, {F4} and {FUNC} keys, press { } to
enter Service mode.
(2) In “Initialize” mode select service function “Tilt offset”. Initialize
Default & Clear
V offset,ES,EL
Tilt offset
ID
ROM View
(3) Perform the tilt offset adjustment according to the
…
procedures described in section 9.2.1 step (3).
Tilt offset
X = 1198
Y = -997
Confirm data (ENT)
(4) Turn the instrument OFF and repeat steps (1)∼(5).
2.2.12 ACCURACY OF TILT SENSOR

(1) Turn the CX ON and carefully level the
instrument observing the Tilt screen. Tolerance:
CX-101: ±3” or less
(2) Exit to Status screen and press {CNFG} key. CX-102: ±6” or less
Then select “Obs. condition” and set CX-103/CX-105: ±10” or less
“coll.crn.” to “No”. Press {ENT} and then
CX-107: ±15” or less
{ESC} key twice to return to Status screen.
(3) Press [OBS] key to enter OBS mode. OBS PC 0
ppm 0
(4) Collimate the collimator A in face left (F1) and note SD
the zenith angle θX1. ZA 90°00’10” ⊥+
HA-R 93°14’31” P1
(5) Using the fine motion screw, change the displayed
zenith angle +6’00”.
(6) Using the levelling screw facing collimator A, realign
the horizontal hair-lines of the instrument and collimator
reticles. Note the zenith angle θX2.
(7) Press {0SET} twice to set the horizontal angle to zero.
(8) Turn the standard base of the instrument exactly through 90°00’00” referring to the
display of the horizontal angle. Note the horizontal angle θY1.
(9) Turn the telescope of the instrument exactly through 45°00’00” referring to the display
of the zenith angle. Note the horizontal angle θY2.
2-17
(10) Use the values calculated according to the formula below as the examination data:
∆X = θX2 - θX1
∆Y = 6’00” - |θY1 - θY2|
(11) In the 2nd page of OBS mode press [TILT] key to enter OBS PC 0
Tilt screen. Precisely level the instrument and press ppm 0
SD
{ESC} key. Enter 1st page of OBS mode. ZA 90°00’12” ⊥+
HAR 93°14’31” P2
(12) Repeat steps (4)∼(10), changing the displayed zenith MENU TIL T H-SET E D M
angle -6’00”.
Tilt x
X 0’01”
Y -0’02” Y

If any of the examination data is out of standard, replace and adjust the tilt sensor unit ()
section 3.3).
When the inspection is completed, select “Obs. condition” in “Cnfg” screen and set
“coll.crn.” to “Yes”. Press {ENT} and then {ESC} key twice to return to Status screen.
2.2.13 TILT SENSOR RANGE OF COMPENSATION

(1) Turn the CX ON and level the instrument observing the Tolerance:
Tilt screen.
±6’ or more
" The Tilt screen is also accessible in the 2nd page of OBS
mode. Press {FUNC} key to go to the 2nd page and then
[TILT] key to enter Tilt screen. Tilt x
X 0’03”
Y -0’08” Y
(2) Using the levelling screw(s) tilt the instrument in the Y
direction. Check the maximum Y tilt angle displayed
before the asterisk marks appear on the screen (asterisk
marks indicate that the tilt angle is out of the Tilt x
compensation range). Make sure that the displayed tilt
X 0’03”
angle at the limit position is 6’ or more. Check ±6’ Y **** Y
range.
(3) Re-level the CX and then tilt the instrument in the X
direction. Check the maximum X tilt angle displayed Tilt x
before the asterisk marks appear on the screen. Make
X ****
sure that the displayed tilt angle at the limit position is Y -0’04” Y
6’ or more. Check ±6’ range.
2-18
2.2.14 CIRCULAR LEVEL CHECK

(1) Observing the Tilt screen of the CX level the instrument and check the position of the
circular level bubble. If the bubble is off-center, adjust as follows:
(a) Verify the off-center direction of the bubble
and loosen the adjusting screw farthest from
that direction to center the bubble.
(b) Adjust all 3 adjusting screws until the
tighening tension of each screw is the same,
and the bubble is centered.
Fig. 2-13
2.2.15 VERTICALITY OF VERTICAL AXIS

(1) Observing the Tilt screen of the CX level the
instrument and collimate the collimator A. Tolerance:
CX-101/CX-102/
(2) Rotate the standard base of the instrument 360° CX-103/CX-105 : 6” or less
clockwise and counterclockwise, reading the CX-107 : 10” or less
difference between the horizontal hair-lines of the
CX and collimator A reticles. Repeat this step
several times.
(3) Turn the lower part of the instrument (with tribrach) approx. 90°. Repeat the above steps
(1)∼(2).
(4) Carry out the same procedure in the 180° and 270° directions.
(5) Use the maximum value as the examination data.
Replace the vertical axis complete.
2-19
2.2.16 HORIZONTAL AXIS WOBBLE

instrument and collimate the collimator A Tolerance:
(align precisely the vertical hair-lines of the at horizontal position: 5” or less
CX and collimator A reticles). at ±30°: 7” or less
(2) Transit the telescope 360° clockwise and
counterclockwise, and note the difference
between the vertical hair-lines of the CX and collimator A reticles. Repeat the procedure
several times.
(3) Use the maximum value as the examination data.
Replace the horizontal axis complete.
2.2.17 SIGHTING AXIS DEVIATION

instrument and collimate the ∞ reticle of the Tolerance:
collimator A in face left (F1). Left - Right: 0.24mm or less
Up - Down: 0.24mm or less
(2) Focus on the collimator A 10m, 5m and 3m
reticles in turn and read the difference in X
(left - right) and Y (up - down) reticle graduations from the CX center. The reticles of
Sokkia’s collimators are graduated to the increment values shown in the following table:
COLLIMATOR RETICLE GRADUATION INTERVAL

2m 0.3mm
3m 0.5mm
5m 1.0mm
10m 2.0mm
30m 6.2mm
(3) Repeat the above steps in face right (F2). Use the half values of the differences between
the face left and face right readings as the examination data, i.e.: (face left - face right) /
2.
Replace the focusing tube or the telescope frame complete.
2-20
2.2.18 HORIZONTALITY OF HORIZONTAL AXIS (HEIGHT OF

STANDARD, INCLINATION)
(1) Observing the Tilt screen of the CX level the instrument. Tolerance:
" If the reticle is tilted (cross-hair inclined), pre-adjust the reticle 10” or less
inclination as described in section 2.2.19 () Fig. 2-18).
(2) Collimate the collimator C in face left (F1).
(3) Transit the telescope to collimator D and
check the difference (α1incl ) of the vertical
hair-lines of the reticles. collimator C
(4) Repeat the above steps in face right (F2) and
check the difference (α2incl ).
(5) Use the value (α1incl - α2incl ) / 2 as the
examination data.
collimator D
Fig. 2-14
Caution! After adjustment of the horizontality of horizontal
axis and (or) double center (collimation),
confirmation of the EDM unit optical alignment is
necessary () section 8.1).
(a) Unscrew the 6 screws fixing the TR cover (the
cover with the trigger key – section 3.2.1). Be
careful to disconnect the cable(s) of the side
cover from the JX board.
(b) Slightly loosen the 3 screws fixing the
horizontal axis bushing R. (Clean the screw
locking agent in advance).
3 fixing screws for

horizontal axis bushing R
Fig. 2-15
2-21
(c) Tap the telescope clamp using the suitable adjustment bar to move the horizontal axis
bushing R straight upward or downward until the horizontality of horizontal axis is
within the tolerance. Adjust the height of the bushing R by removing 1/2 (half) of the
error.
(d) Tighten the 3 fixing screws with torque of 10kgfcm (1 Nm) and repeat steps (1)∼(4)
to confirm that the error is within the tolerance.
" After adjustment apply the locking agent Three Bond 1401C to the fixing screws and
reinstall the TR cover. Reconfirm the horizontality of horizontal axis.
adjustment of horizontal axis bushing R from lower to higher position
tap the telescope clamp to move it straight

upward (insert the adjustment bar in the
space between the coil spring and rod of
the upper clamp)
Fig. 2-16
adjustment of horizontal axis bushing R from higher to lower position
tap the telescope clamp to move

it straight downward
Fig. 2-17
" If the horizontality of horizontal axis adjustment has been carried out, check the
inclination of the reticle (vertical hair-line) and double center (collimation) adjustment
() section 2.2.19).
2-22
2.2.19 DOUBLE CENTER ADJUSTMENT OF HORIZONTAL AXIS

AND TELESCOPE AXIS (COLLIMATION)
Before inspection and adjustment confirm that the reticles
of collimators A and B are precisely aligned to each other. Tolerance:
Take special care of the vertical hair-lines of the reticles. CX-101: 8” (6”*) or less
FX-102: 8”
CX-103/CX-105/
instrument and collimate the collimator A in
CX-107 : 10” or less
face left (F1).
(2) Transit the telescope to collimator B and check the * Specification
difference (αcol) of the vertical hair-lines of the reticles. for Chinese market
(3) Use the value αcol / 2 as the examination data.
Option:
Collimator A’s and B’s reticles should be approximately aligned to each other. (It is not required
very precise alignment of the reticles.)
Caution! Although optional procedures as mentioned hereinafter assure proper reference for the
collimation error calculation, the specific collimator system setting (i.e. collimator A’s
and B’s reticles are not precisely aligned in advance) is not verified by JSIMA standard
document.
(1) Collimate the collimator A in face left (F1).
(2) Transit the telescope to collimator B and check the deviation (α1col ) between the vertical
hair-lines of the reticles.
(3) Repeat steps (1) and (2) in face right (F2) and check the difference (α2col ).
(4) Use the value (α1col - α2col ) / 4 as the examination data.
If out of the tolerance: Porro prism Porro prism reticle
frame screw frame adjusting screw
Caution! After adjustment of the horizontality
of horizontal axis and (or) double
center (collimation), confirmation of
the EDM unit optical alignment is
necessary () section 8.1).
(a) Remove the 2 cross-recessed screws
of the reticle cover and remove the
reticle cover.
" If the reticle is tilted (cross-hair
inclined), loosen the Porro prism
frame screws (3 hexagonal socket
head screws) and turn the Porro prism
frame to correct the error (tolerance:
one vertical hair-line). Tighten the
reticle Porro prism
fixing screws.
fixing screws frame screws
Fig. 2-18
2-23
(b) Loosen the 2 reticle fixing screws and remove αcol/2 (or (α1col– α2col ) / 4) of the difference
with the reticle adjusting screw. Tighten the fixing screws.
(c) Repeat steps (1)∼(3) (or (1)∼(4)) above and attach the reticle cover.
" If the double center (collimation) adjustment and (or) horizontality of horizontal axis
adjustment has been carried out, input “Voffset, ES,EL” correction () section 2.2.22
and 4.2.2).
2.2.20 HORIZONTAL ECCENTRICITY

instrument. Tolerance:
(2) Collimate the collimator A in face left (F1). CX-105: 12” or less
CX-107: 30” or less
(3) Press {0SET} twice to set the horizontal angle to 0.
(4) Rotate the standard base and collimate the collimator
B. Note the horizontal angle as θ1.
(5) Collimate the collimator A in face right (F2). Press {0SET} twice to set the horizontal
angle to 0.
(6) Rotate the standard base of the instrument and collimate the collimator B. Note the
horizontal angle as θ2.
(7) Use the absolute value of ∆θH = |(θ1 - θ2) / 2| as the examination data.
(8) Turn the lower part of the instrument (with tribrach) 90° and repeat steps (1)∼(7).
Check the horizontal encoder using Service mode.
2-24
2.2.21 VERTICAL 0 POINT ERROR, VERTICAL CONSTANT

DIFFERENCE AND VERTICAL ECCENTRICITY
Before inspection and adjustment make
sure that the tilt offset adjustment was Tolerance:
carried out in advance () section 2.2.11). V0 pnt error: 15” or less (CX-101/CX-102)
20” or less (CX-103/CX-105)
30” or less (CX-107)
V. const. diff.: 10” or less (CX-101/CX-102)
20” or less (CX-103/CX-105)
30” or less (CX-107)
V. eccentr.: 12”or less (CX-105)
30”or less (CX-107)

instrument.
(2) Collimate the collimator B in face left (F1). collimator C
Note the zenith angle as lB.
(3) Transit the telescope to collimator C and note
the zenith angle lC.
(4) Collimate the collimator D in face left (F1)
and note the zenith angle lD. collimator B
(5) Collimate the collimator B in face right (F2)

and note the zenith angle rB.
(6) Transit the telescope to collimator C and note collimator D
the zenith angle rC.
(7) Collimate the collimator D and note the
zenith angle rD.
Fig. 2-19
(8) Calculate K1, K2 and K3 by the following
formula:
K1 = lB + rB - 360°
K2 = lC + rC - 360°
K3 = lD + rD - 360°
(9) Calculate the examination data:
Vertical 0 point error: |K1 / 2|
Vertical constant difference: |K2 - K3|
Vertical eccentricity: |(rB - lB - 180°) / 2| (only CX-105/CX-107)
2-25

(a) If the vertical eccentricity or vertical constant difference are out of standard, check the
vertical encoder using Service mode.
(b) If the vertical 0 point error is out of standard, carry out the adjustment of the vertical 0
point offset () section 2.2.22 below).
2.2.22 VERTICAL 0 POINT / ES / EL OFFSET ADJUSTMENT

Before this adjustment, make sure that the tilt offset adjustment was carried out in advance - ()
section 2.2.11).
(1) Level the instrument observing the Tilt screen in User mode and turn the CX OFF. Then
enter Service mode () section 9.1).
" Service function “Tilt” in “Encoder, Tilt” mode submenu can be used to level the
instrument as well.
(2) Select service function “V offset, ES, EL” in Initialize
“Initialize” mode submenu and input vertical 0 point Default & Clear
offset, ES and EL correction according to the V offset,ES,EL
Tilt offset
procedures described in section 9.2.1 step (2). ID
ROM View
…
V offset,ES,EL
ES: -0°00’05”
EL: -0°00’01”
V Offs: 0° 3 0 ’ 2 1 ”
Confirm data (ENT)
(3) Turn the CX OFF and repeat procedures of section 2.2.21.

2-26
2.2.23 HORIZONTAL ANGLE ACCURACY

The horizontal angle accuracy, if necessary, can be Tolerance:
checked using simplified 2-collimator inspection, or
precise 5-collimator inspection. 5-collimator inspection is (2-collimator inspection)
a time consuming method and it is recommended only to CX-101/CX-102: 10” or less
test the highest accuracy instruments CX-101/CX-102, CX-103/CX-105: 20” or less
e.g. after the mechanical adjustment of the encoder and CX-107: 30” or less
after inputting the new horizontal angle parameters (IACS (5-collimator inspection)
function). CX-101: 1” (0.7*) or less
" 5-collimator inspection performed in accordance CX-102: 2” (1.4”*) or less
with “JSIMA 101: 2002” standard corresponds CX-103: 3” (2.1”*) or less
in the terms of error calculations to ISO standard CX-105: 5” (3.5”*) or less
(17123-3: 2001). Check is performed with CX-107: 7” (4.9”*) or less
collimators, which assure good reference for
evaluation of the horizontal angle accuracy (this * Specifications for Chinese market
method even surpasses the testing method,
which applies the field procedures).
Inspection with 2 Collimators (coarse method):

(1) Using the Tilt screen of the CX level the instrument and collect first complete directional
pointing sighting collimators A and B in face left (F1) and then face right (F2).
(2) After collecting first complete directional pointing, the base (lower part of the CX) is to
be advanced about 60°.
(3) After collecting second complete directional pointing, the base (lower part of the CX) is
to be advanced about 120°.
(4) Calculate the angle difference between subsequent readings in each face.
(5) Use as the examination data the difference between maximum and minimum values
calculated in step (4).
Example of horizontal angle measurement data:
Instrument Observed Horizontal angle
Target
setting horizontal angle difference
A 0°00’03” A–A 0°00’00”
F1
B 180°00’01” B–A 179°59’58”
0°
B 0°00’06” B–A 180°00’02”
F2
A 180°00’04 A–A 0°00’00”
A 240°00’20” A–A 0°00’00”
F2
B 60°00’21” B–A 180°00’01”
60°
B 240°00’18” B–A 179°59’00”
F1
A 60°00’19” A–A 0°00’00”
A 120°00’10” A–A 0°00’00”
F1
B 300°00’13” B–A 180°00’03”
120°
B 120°00’14” B–A 179°59’57”
F2
A 300°00’17” A–A 0°00’00”
Maximum (B – A) angle difference (Max) 180°00’03”
Minimum (B – A) angle difference (Min) 179°59’57”
Examination data: |(Max) – (Min)| 6”
2-27
Inspection with 5 Collimators (precise method):

" This inspection is recommended only to test the highest accuracy instruments CX-101/
CX-102. Both types of the instruments apply the internally stored horizontal angle
parameters and inspection can be carried out especially after horizontal encoder adjustment
and inputting the horizontal angle parameters (refer to section 3.1.2 step (23) to find out the
procedures of the calculation and input of the angle parameters).
" Precise inspection method requires 5 collimators according to the JSIMA standard. If the
angular accuracy confirmation is necessary only for reference of service center, especially
after adjustment of the horizontal encoder and input of the horizontal angle parameters, 3
collimators (5 sets) instead of 5 collimators (3sets) and single series of observations instead
of 4 series can be applied as well.
(1) Set up 5 collimators as shown in Fig. 2-12 and Fig. 2-20.
(2) The collimators are to be collimated in the Example of horizontal angle measure-
telescope face left (F1) in order 1, 2, 3, 4, 5 ment data (5 targets, 3sets, 1 series):
and next in the telescope face right (F2) in Instrument Target Observed
order 5, 4, 3, 2, 1. The full set of data setting No. horizontal angle
defines one complete directional pointing. 1 0°00’00”
2 90°26’52”
(3) After collecting first complete directional L 3 180°00’01”
4 269°28’14”
pointing, the base (lower part of the CX) is
5 315°32’12”
to be forwarded about 60°. 0°
5 135°32’09”
4 89°28’10”
(4) After collecting 2nd directional pointing R 3 359°59’58”
(2nd set), the base (lower part of the CX) is 2 270°26’51”
to be advanced about additional 60° for the 1 179°59’57”
3rd complete directional pointing. 1 240°00’03”
2 330°26’55”
R 3 60°00’02”
horizontal layout of collimators 4 149°28’16”
5 195°32’16”
60°
5 15°32’19”
4 329°28’22”
(1)
L 3 240°00’10”
2 150°27’01”
(5) 1 60°00’07”
1 120°00’02”
2 210°26’53”
L 3 300°00’03”
4 29°28’16”
(4) (2) 5 75°32’11”
120°
5 255°32’12”
4 209°28’13”
R 3 120°00’02”
2 30°26’54”
(3) 1 299°59’57”
standard deviation σ = 0.57”

Fig. 2-20
2-28
(5) Calculate the standard deviation σ of the horizontal angle measurement. The calculated
value represents 1 series of measurements.
(6) Perform test described in steps (2)∼(5) total 4 times (4 series) and calculate the standard
deviation σj for each test. Then calculate total standard deviation σ as the root of mean
squares.
(7) Confirm that the standard deviation is within the specified tolerance.
3-1
3. DT UNIT PARTS REPLACEMENT AND ADJUSTMENT

When you disassemble the CX, remove the battery from the instrument in advance to avoid
damages to the electrical parts.
3.1 DCPU BOARD
3.1.1 REPLACEMENT
IF cover
Before replacement of the DCPU board, if fixing screw
necessary output the user JOB data to the
computer.
(1) Unscrew the 6 fixing screws and detach

the IF cover from the standard base.
While removing the cover, disconnect
the FC-4 flexible cable (battery cable)
from the CN8 connector on the DCPU
board. To release the connector pull the
connector lock plate upward () Fig. 3-
2).
CN8 connector
DCPU board
Fig. 3-1
CN8 connector
Æ
FC-4
flexible cable
Fig. 3-2
(2) Disconnect the flexible cables from the respective connectors on the DCPU board: FC-1
flexible cable (V encoder cable) for the CN1 connector, FC-2 flexible cable (H encoder
cable) from the CN2 connector, FC-8 flexible cable (face left (F1) display / DCPU
board) from the CN4, FC-9 flexible cable (face right (F2) display / DCPU board) from
the CN5 connector (CX-107 does not use the CN5 connector). At first release the
connectors: pull the connector lock plates upward and remove the flexible cables.
3-2
(3) Disconnect the flexible cable FC-3 (DCPU board / JX board) from the CN3 connector.
First pull the lock plate upward and set it at obtuse angle, then slightly lift the flexible
cable at an angle of approximately 10° and remove the cable from the connector. Do not
bend the cable.
Caution! Do not push the connector lock plate in the direction indicated by arrow mark while in
open position. At the angle exceeding limit position (more than 135°, ) Fig. 3-4) the
connector may be broken.
CN3 connector removing the cable
CN5 Æ
connector 2 FC-3 flexible cable
CN1, CN2
connectors
CN4
connector
2
Fig. 3-3 Fig. 3-4
(4) Unscrew the 4 fixing screws and remove the DCPU board () Fig. 3-5).
to CN2 (FC-2 passes

through ferrite core)
ferrite core
to CN1
CN1
CN2
CN4
to CN3
CN5
DCPU board
CN3 fixing screw

Fig. 3-5
3-3
" The ferrite core for the horizontal encoder flexible cable is adhered to the standard base.
clean up with
mixture of alcohol
and ether
ferrite core
double sided
adhesive tape 5mm
align bottom
Fig. 3-6
3.1.2 INSPECTION AND ADJUSTMENT

The following adjustments, settings and inspections are required after the board replacement:
• MBAT voltage 5.3 ± 1.7% (5.21∼5.39)V check: Z2 on JX board
• EBATD voltage 5.0 ± 1.7% (4.92∼5.08)V check: Z4 on JX board
• DVCC1 voltage 5.0 ± 1.7% (4.92∼5.08)V check: Z5 on JX board
• EBATA voltage 6.0 ± 4.2% (5.79∼6.28)V check: Z8 on JX board
• VCONS voltage 3.3 ± 2.0% (3.23∼3.37)V check: Z9 on JX board
" Voltage is detectable at Z2 test point when the power is supplied to the instrument, even
if the instrument is not turned ON.
" Voltages are detectable at Z4 and Z8 test points when the EDM is turned ON.
" TP1 (DGND) terminal is the ground terminal
3-4
• BTVCC voltage 3.3 ± 2.0% (3.23∼3.37)V check: Z16 on DCPU board

• VCCUSB voltage 5.0 ± 1.0% (4.95∼5.05)V check: Z17 on DCPU board
• VCC3P3 voltage 3.3 ± 2.0% (3.23∼3.37)V check: Z19 on DCPU board
" Voltage is detectable at Z17 and Z19 test points when the power is supplied to the
instrument, even if the instrument is not turned ON.
" Voltage is detectable at Z16 test point when the Bluetooth is turned ON.
" All standards for power supply voltages are determined exclusively for the instrument
electric circuit. Take into consideration the measuring equipment (digital voltmeter)
accuracy, which may affect the inspection.
• DCPU board initialization
• Serial No. input and instrument type confirmation
• Selections of instrument flags
• Date and time input
• BATLOW adjustment
• Input of display LCD constant and contrast check
(The LCD constants of display units in face left (F1) and face right (F2) can be read and
recorded in advance while using the old DCPU board and later same levels can be input
to the internal memory of the new DCPU board)
• Horizontal and vertical encoder constant setting and input to the internal memory
• Slit check
• Input of tilt offset of X-Y tilt sensor () section 2.2.11)
• Input of vertical 0 point offset and collimation and inclination error correction offset
(EL, ES) () section 2.2.22)
• Input of horizontal and vertical angle parameters using IACS function of Service mode
(except CX-103)
• Input of laser plummet LD power levels (in the instruments equipped with the laser
plummet)
(The power levels can be read and recorded in advance while using the old DCPU board
and later same levels can be input to the internal memory of the new DCPU board)
• Inspection with collimators (setting of horizontal and vertical encoder constant can be
omitted, this operation is performed in steps (17) and (18) on the following pages)
• Inspection of EDM unit operation
Measurement instruments and tools:
- Regulated DC power supply (6.0∼8.0V DC, 2.5A)
- Digital voltmeter
- Power supply cable tool (part No. ST-CX-04)
- Ext. power supply & communication cable (ST-CX-01) or battery BDC70
(1) Remove the side covers: TR cover and IF cover () section 3.1.1 and 3.2.1). Be careful
of the cables connecting the side covers with the DCPU board and JX board.
(2) Connect the external power supply to the CN8 connector on the DCPU board via power
supply cable tool (part No. ST-CX-04).
(3) Set the voltage of the power supply to 7.2V ± 0.1V as read on the digital voltmeter.
3-5
(4) While holding {F1}, {F4} and {FUNC} keys, press {ON} to enter Service mode.
(5) Check the power supply voltages at the test points on the JX board using the digital
voltmeter. If the voltages are faulty, check the connection between DCPU board and JX
board and if necessary, replace the JX board.
Z2 (MBAT) 5.3 ± 1.7% (5.21∼5.39)V
Z4 (EBATD) 5.0 ± 1.7% (4.92∼5.08)V
Z5 (DVCC1) 5.0 ± 1.7% (4.92∼5.08)V
Z6 (DVCC2) 3.3 ± 2.2% (3.25∼3.35)V
Z7 (DVCC3) 1.2 ± 2.2% (1.17∼1.22)V
Z8 (EBATA) 6.0 ± 4.2% (5.79∼6.28)V
Z9 (VCONS) 3.3 ± 2.0% (3.23∼3.37)V
Use TP1 (DGND) on the JX board as the ground terminal.
Z8 Z6
JX
board
Z4 Z5
Z7
Z9
Z2
TP1
Fig. 3-7
3-6
(6) Check the power supply voltages at the test terminals on the DCPU board using the
digital voltmeter. If the voltages are faulty, check the connection between DCPU board
and JX board and if necessary, replace the DCPU board.
Z16 (BTVCC) 3.3 ± 2.0% (3.23∼3.37)V
Z17 (VCCUSB) 5.0 ± 1.0% (4.95∼5.05)V
Z19 (VCC3P3) 3.3 ± 2.0% (3.23∼3.37)V
Use TP1 (DGND) on the DCPU board as the ground terminal.
DCPU
board
Z16
Z17
Z19 TP1
Fig. 3-8
(7) Select service function “Default & Clear” in Default set

“Initialize” mode () section 9.2.1, step (1)). &
Clearing memory...
(a) Press {ENT} to start initialization of the DCPU
board. Press <ENT> start
(b) When “End!” is displayed, press {ESC} to exit to

“Initialize” submenu.
3-7
(8) Select “ID” in “Initialize” mode () section 9.2.1, step ID

(4)). A
Serial No.: AB1234
(a) Input the instrument serial No. and confirm the Type:CX-101
instrument type.
o OKo
Caution! The instrument serial No. can be input only once in
the brand new DCPU board. When [OK] key is pressed
the currently selected serial No. will be permanently fixed and will not be editable any
more. Be very careful to confirm the correct setting before pressing [OK] key.
" The instrument type is not selectable by the service centers; it is fixed in the factory. The
DCPU boards with the different part codes are supplied as spare parts depending on the
instrument type, Tshield function availability and software language version (English /
Chinese / Korean). Be careful to place the order for the proper type of the DCPU board.
(b) When setting is completed press [OK] to input selection to the instrument internal
memory.
(9) Select service function “Inst. flg” in “Initialize” mode and select the proper instrument
flags (be careful with “L-plummet” setting; if the optional laser plummet is used, set the
“L-Plummet” option to “Yes”. If the Bluetooth unit is used, set the “Bluetooth” option to
“WT” and select the Bluetooth power: normal “Norm” or “Low” depending on the
regulations in the country where the instrument is used).
Inst. flag Inst. flag Inst. flag
Media : Yes --------- : --- Contrast : Norm
Key define : Free Bluetooth : No L-plummet : No
Guide light : Yes BT Power : Norm
--------- : --- Russia : No
o OKo o OKo o OKo
(10) Select service function “Date and time” in “Initialize” mode () section 9.2.1, step (9)).
Toggle between “Date” and “Time” using { T } or { S } key.
Date: Manually input date (format MMDDYYYY), e.g. Date and time
January 25, 2012 is input as “01252012”. Press { T }
key or {ENT} key. Date: 01252012
Time: 11:25:33
2:43:59 pm is input as “144359”.
Press {ENT} key.
Date and time
Date: Dec/03/2011
Time: 14:43:59
(11) Select service function “Battery check” in “Test”

Battery check (Int)
mode () section 9.2.4, step (4)). Bat. = 7.201 (V)
AD.c = 1.015190
Temp = +25.517(C)
INIT SETi
3-8
(a) Using digital voltmeter check the voltage at Z17

(BAT1) test point (TP1 (DGND) is the ground Z17
terminal) on the JX board () Fig. 3-9).
(b) Set the external power supply connected to CN8
connector on the DCPU board via power supply cable
tool (part No. ST-CX-04) to 6.7 ± 0.01V as read on
the voltmeter.
" Make sure that “(Int)” message is displayed, indicating
that the instrument recognizes the power supply as the
internal battery.
(c) Press [SET] to memorize the calculated battery level
coefficient and battery low detection level. TP1 JX board
" When the internal battery voltage is 6.7V ± 0.1V as Fig. 3-9
read by the voltmeter, BATLOW symbol ( ) is
displayed in User mode.
(12) Select service function “Display check” in “Test” mode
Constant
and set to “Constant” () section 9.2.4, step (2)). Set Face :1
the constants for both display units (F1 and F2) to the Level :7
Count :32
relevant values by changing “Count” number and input QR: :32
this values to the instrument internal memory as “QR” _FACE _LEV. _INIT _SET
by [SET] key. The “QR” values – individual for each
display, can be read in advance by the same service
function before replacement of the DCPU board, or obtained by reading the QR code
printed on the sticker attached to the shield sticker on the back side of the display unit.
Confirm the contrast by “Contrast check” function of “Display check “ service function
in “Test” mode () section 9.2.4 step (2)).
" If the original QR cannot be confirmed, input default value 32 and check the contrast by
service function and in user mode. The contrast setting characteristics may change in hot
or cold weather conditions. When the constant value is increased, the display becomes
more dark. When the constant value is decreased, the display becomes more bright.
(13) Turn the power OFF. Disconnect the power supply cable tool from the CN8 connector
on the DCPU board and reinstall the side covers: TR cover and IF cover.
(14) Connect the regulated DC power supply (7.5V∼8.0V, 2.5A) to the instrument via ext.
power supply & communication cable (part No. ST-CX-01) or use the battery BDC70.
(15) Enter Service mode () section 9.1) and select service
function “Select class” in “Encoder, Tilt” mode Select class
submenu. Confirm that the proper instrument class is Class 5(V=1,H=1)

displayed and press [OK] key.
CX-101: Class 1(V=2,H2), double detector OKi
CX-102: Class 2(V=2,H2), double detector
CX-105: Class 5(V=1,H1), single detector (double detector of Low Temperature Model)
CX-107: Class 7(V=1,H1), single encoder (double detector of Low Temperature Model)
3-9
(16) Select service function “Constant” in “Encoder, Tilt” Constant

mode submenu.
Select encoder
V:ST=2
H:ST=2
O H i OV i
(17) Press [H] key to carry out the constant calculation and Constant
input for the horizontal encoder.
H :1/4
HA-R 194°00’00”
>>> <<<
OKi
(a) Turn the standard base each 90° ± 10° and press
[OK] key to calculate and input to the internal Constant
memory the horizontal encoder constant data (for
H :2/4
details ) section 9.2.3, step (2)). When “OK !!” HA-R 0°00’00”
message is displayed, press [OK] key to exit to
OKi
“Encoder, Tilt” mode submenu.
" The correct angular setting is indicated by “>>> <<<” Constant
mark shown at the lower part of the display. The
H :2/4
procedure can be started at any position of the HA-R 90°00’00”
standard base. After pressing [OK] key in initial >>> <<<
screen, the HA-R angle will be automatically set to OKi
0°00’00”.
…
Constant
H :4/4
OK !!
OKi
(18) Select service function “Constant” in “Encoder, Tilt” Constant

mode submenu. Press [V] key to carry out the constant
calculation and input for the vertical encoder. V :1/4
ZA 202°00’00”
OKi
…
(a) Turn the telescope each 90° ± 10° and press [OK]
key to calculate and input to the internal memory the V constant
vertical encoder constant data (for details ) section
V :4/4
9.2.3, step (2)). When “OK !!” message is displayed, OK !!
press [OK] key to exit to “Encoder, Tilt” mode
submenu. OKi
(19) Select service function “Slit check” in “Encoder, Tilt” Slit check (H:I,V:I)
Select Encoder
mode submenu. ZA 98°21’04”
HA-R 177°10’11”
H i V i
3-10
(a) Press [H] and turn the standard base slowly all around Slit check (H:I,V:I)
to confirm the horizontal encoder slit pattern
configuration (for details ) section 9.2.3, step (3)). HA-R 202°46’41”
Start !!
H i V i
…
Slit check (H:S,V:I)
Warning:001-001
ZA 177°53’37”
HA-R 191°59’56”
END !!
_MD_H H i V i
(b) Press [V] and turn the telescope slowly all around to Slit check (H:I,V:I)
confirm the vertical encoder slit pattern configuration
ZA 175°03’35”
(for details ) section 9.2.3, step (3)).
" Only if the error code(s) is displayed, confirm Start !!
H i V i
connections and if necessary, carefully clean the disk
…
and (or) CMOS sensor units. If the “Warning” counts
are different than “000-000” for double detector or Slit check (H:S,V:S)
“000” for single detector (the dust particles are Warning:005-004
detected), however “END !!” message is finally ZA 177°53’37”
HA-R 191°59’56”
displayed, it is not necessary to take any measures. END !!
_MD_H _MD_V _H__ _V__
(20) When the “Slit check” is successfully completed, the
Standard mode (H:S, V:S) will be available for both
horizontal and vertical encoders (for details ) section
9.2.3, step (3)). Exit to “Initialize” mode submenu.
" If any troubles are found in angle measurement unit, check the H/V encoder CMOS
sensor signals data using service function “Running test” as described in section 9.2.4
step (1)).
(21) Select service function “Tilt offset” in “Initialize” mode Initialize
submenu. Default & Clear
V offset,ES,EL
(a) Input the tilt offset according to the procedures Tilt offset
ID
described in section 9.2.1 step (3). ROM View
(b) When the tilt offset input screen is displayed make
…
sure that the X and Y offset is within ±2400 counts

Tilt offset
(i.e. within ±40’). Press {ENT} to memorize the new X = 1198
offset data. Y = -997
Confirm data (ENT)

3-11
(22) Select service function “V offset, ES, EL” in Initialize

“Initialize” mode submenu. Default & Clear
V offset,ES,EL
Tilt offset
ID
(a) Using collimators C and D, check the vertical 0 point ROM View
offset, inclination and collimation offset and input
the offset data to the instrument internal memory (for
details ) section 9.2.1, step (2)). Press {ENT} to V offset,ES,EL
memorize the new offset data. ES: -0°00’05”
EL: -0°00’01”
V Offs: 357°30’21”
Confirm data (ENT)
(23) In the CX-101/CX-102/CX-105/CX-107 (i.e. all models except CX-103) input the
horizontal (and vertical) angle parameters. Perform service function “IACS” of
“Encoder, Tilt” mode. After collecting the angular data the angle parameters will be
calculated to enhance the encoder accuracy. When all data is collected wait until the
buzzer beeps twice and “OK!!” message is shown on the display. Press [OK] key (for
details ) section 9.2.3, step (6)).
" If “Constant” is not input in advance, the error code E501 may be displayed in initial
screen of “IACS” function.
CX-101/CX-102 (input horizontal and CX-105/CX-107 (input horizontal and
vertical angle parameters) vertical angle parameters)
Rotate axis each 5° ± 10” to collect Rotate axis each 20° ± 10” to collect
data at 72 points data at 18 points
IACS IACS-SD
Select Encoder Select Encoder
_OH_ _OV_ _OH_ _OV_

…
…
IACS IACS-SD
OK!! OK!!
_OK_ _OK_
3-12
(24) In the instruments equipped with the laser plummet, input the LD power levels (the
original levels memorized in the old DCPU board can be input, or if this data is not
available, the laser plummet unit power should be readjusted (for details ) section 9.2.4,
step (6)).
Service Mode Laser plummet Level1 01

Initialize Level2 25
EDM Level3 43
Encoder,Tilt Level4 57
Test Level5 61
oO N o C A L C I N I T SETo
User mode
(25) Turn the instrument OFF and ON. If initially the
Password input screen is displayed, clear the A
unspecified password using service function “Clear
Password: ********
Password” in “Initialize” mode submenu () section
9.2.1 step (7)).
Service mode
“Initialize” mode submenu
Inst. flg
Clear Password
Bluetooth Clear Password...
Date and time Æ
TS_COMM
Press <ENT> start
(26) After adjustment of the DCPU board carry out the inspection with collimators ()
chapter 2).
3.1.3 LITHIUM BATTERY REPLACEMENT

If the lithium battery becomes low, an error message “Clock error” will be displayed in User
mode.
(1) Remove the DCPU board () section 3.1.1).

silicone glue
(2) Remove the lithium battery from the DCPU SE9186
board.
(3) Solder the replacement battery taking care of lithium battery
polarity.
(4) Apply the silicone glue SE9186 (clear)
(part No. S209C) to the battery. DCPU board
Fig. 3-10
3-13
3.2 JX BOARD
CN14
CN13 CN17
TR cover
CN12
CN15
CN11
CN18
CN16
JX board
Fig. 3-11
3.2.1 REPLACEMENT
(1) Unscrew the 6 screws and remove the TR cover from the instrument. Be careful to
disconnect the TRG_HNS cable (cable connecting the JX board and TRGK board) from
the CN16 connector on the JX board (to disconnect draw the connector forward). In the
instruments equipped with TSshield functionality disconnect the FC-6 (TS) flexible cable
(cable connecting the JX board and TS_COMM_2G or TS-COMM_3G module) from
the CN15 connector on the JX board and antenna coaxial cable from the COAX-TB
board (of TSshield 2G unit) or 3G_COAX_HNS board (of TSshield 3G unit) installed in
the TR cover.
(2) Disconnect the 2 cable connectors of the H-slipring cable (CX-101/CX-102 and Low
Temperature Models) or EXT-CN1 unit cable connectors (CX-103/CX-105/CX-107)
from the CN12 and CN14 connectors.
(3) Remove the connector of the vertical contact ring cable (brush unit) from the CN13
connector.
(4) Disconnect the FC-3 flexible cable (connecting the DCPU board with JX board) from
the CN11 connector (for procedures refer to section 3.1.1 step (3) and Fig. 3-4).
Disconnect the FC-5 flexible cable (connecting the Tilt board with JX board) from the
CN17 connector. At first release the connectors: draw them forward and remove the
flexible cable. Do not pull the cables while the connectors are locked.
(5) In the instruments with the laser plummet disconnect LP-HNS cable from the CN18
connector.
3-14
(6) Remove the JX board fixing screws (3 pcs) and install the replacement board reversing
procedures described above.
3.2.2 INSPECTION
No electrical adjustment is necessary after the JX board replacement. For confirmation,
check the DC voltages as described in section 3.1.2. Carry out the inspection with
collimators () chapter 2). Check proper operation of the EDM unit.
3.3 X-Y TILT SENSOR

3.3.1 REPLACEMENT
(1) Remove the TR cover and JX board () section 3.2.1).
(2) Remove the 2 hexagonal fixing screws with washers and remove the X-Y tilt sensor
from the instrument.
flexible cable FC-5

connecting Tilt board
X-Y with JX board
tilt sensor
JX board
TR cover
Fig. 3-12
(3) When installing the new unit, put the tilt sensor positioning tool between the standard
base reference surface and bottom part of the tilt sensor frame. While pushing the tilt
sensor downwards against the tool, tighten the 2 hexagonal socket head fixing screws
() Fig. 3.13).
3-15
" The same type of the X-Y tilt angle sensor is used in all types of the instruments.
X-Y tilt sensor
tilt sensor
securing
screw
tilt sensor positioning tool
Fig. 3-13
(4) Reinstall the JX board and TR cover in the instrument. When reinstalling the cover first
tighten the 2 lower screws, next the 2 upper screws and finally the 2 center screws ()
Fig. 3-70).
CN41 on tilt board

to CN41 on
tilt board
strengthening
plate place the extra part of
(bend FC-5 cables behind JX board
properly)
to CN11
to CN17 on
JX board CN14
CN17 to CN12
CN12 CN11
to CN14
Fig. 3-14
3-16
3.3.2 PREPARATION FOR ADJUSTMENT

(1) Place the CX on the instrument stand of the collimator system in this manner that one of
the levelling screws is pointing towards collimator A and bring the instrument to the
collimator height.
collimator A position of levelling screws collimator B
Fig. 3-15
(2) Install the battery BDC70 in the battery compartment.

(3) Level the instrument within 10” for any position.
3.3.3 ADJUSTMENT
(1) Turn the power ON to enter Service mode () section Initialize
9.1). Select service function “Tilt offset” in Default & Clear
V offset,ES,EL
“Encoder, Tilt” mode. Tilt offset
ID
(2) Adjust the tilt offset as described in section 9.2.1 step ROM View
(3)).
…
(3) Make sure that the measured X and Y tilt offset is Tilt offset
within ±2400 counts (i.e. within ±40’). Press {ENT} X = 1278
to memorize the new offset data. Y = 979
" If any problem occurs during the setting procedure,

Confirm data (ENT)
press {ESC} to exit without memorizing the offset
data and repeat the offset setting again.
(4) After adjustment of the X-Y tilt sensor position carry out the inspection using
collimators: check the index error of the X-Y tilt sensor () section 2.2.11), accuracy of
the tilt angle sensor () section 2.2.12), range of compensation () section 2.2.13) and
vertical 0 point error () section 2.2.21).
3-17
3.4 DISPLAY UNITS

The CX-101/CX-102/CX-103/CX-105 are supplied with the 2 display units, which are fully
compatible (the only difference is the double sided adhesive tape attached to the flexible cable and
the key-LCD unit in face left (F1). The tape prevents the cable from damages, which may be
caused by contact with the horizontal fine motion unit. The display complete used in the Low
Temperature Models is different comparing with the Standard Models. The CX-107 is provided
with 1 display only.
3.4.1 REPLACEMENT
(1) DISPLAY REMOVAL
(a) Detach the IF cover from the standard base () section 3.1.1). Disconnect the flexible
cable(s) from the CN4 connector (used by the key-LCD board in face left (F1)) and
(or) CN5 connector (used by the key-LCD board in face right (F2), not used in the CX-
107) on the DCPU board. At first release the connectors: pull the connector lock plates
upward and remove the flexible cables () Fig. 3-16 and Fig. 3-17).
(b) Remove the 4 fixing screws and lift the display unit straight up, taking care of the
flexible cable.
1 2
CN4 connector
fixing
screw
DCPU board
display complete (F1)

strengthening
FC-8 flexible cable passes FC-8 flexible cable
plate
through ferrite core and
hole in standard base
Fig. 3-16
3-18
fixing
screw contacts
(terminal side) are
facing upper side of
CN5 connector DCPU board
CN5
connector
FC-9
display complete (F2) flexible cable FC-9 flexible cable passes through
ferrite core and hole in standard base
Fig. 3-17
(c) When installing the display, pass the display flexible cable through the slit in the
ferrite core. Tighten the 4 fixing screws. Finally reconnect the display flexible cable to
the DCPU board and reinstall the IF cover.
" The ferrite cores are attached to the standard base by double sided adhesive tape as
shown in Fig. 3-18 and Fig. 3-19. Before attaching the ferrite cores, clean up the standard
base using the mixture of alcohol and ether. Make sure that the ferrite cores do not
protrude above the surface “Z” and edge “Y” of the standard base.
“Y”
“Z” surface edge
ferrite
ferrite core
core w/tape
w/tape
Fig. 3-18 Fig. 3-19
.
" After replacement of the display unit(s) input of QR value, which is specified for each
individual display is necessary () section 3.4.2).
3-19
(2) DISPLAY PARTS REPLACEMENT

(a) Remove the flexible cable from the
CN1 connector on the key-LCD fixing CN1 connector
board. screw
(b) Remove the shield sticker from the

key-LCD
key-LCD board.
board
(c) Unscrew the 10 fixing screws and
remove the key-LCD board (with the
LCD) from the display frame. Remove key top
the key top from the display frame.
(d) After replacement of the display
frame apply the liquid gasket Three display
Bond 1121 to the top of the rib all frame
around the key top guide holes in the
display frame in order to secure the
waterproof resistance. clean up
Fig. 3-20
fixing h
i g
liquid gasket Three Bond 1121 screw
l f
j k c
Fig. 3-21 e
key-LCD
board d
(e) Relocate the key top in the display
frame and install the key-LCD board
using the 10 fixing screws. Tighten key top
the screws in order from c to l.
display
frame
clean up
Fig. 3-22
3-20
(f) Attach the sealing to the display frame. First

insert the sealing at 4 corners of the display sealing
frame and next carefully install it into the
guide groove all around the display frame.
Make sure that the sealing is properly
aligned around the display frame (i.e.
without excessive stretch, twist and tension).
Fig. 3-23
(g) Adhere the shield sticker to the key-LCD board. Make sure that the CN1 connector is
not wrapped by the shield sticker.
QR code sticker
shield sticker
CN1 connector
Fig. 3-25
Fig. 3-24
(h) Install the flexible cable in the CN1 connector on the key-LCD board. In the display
complete used in face left (F1) adhere the flexible cable to the shield sticker using the
double sided adhesive tape as shown in Fig. 3-26.
" The flexible cable connected to the key-LCD board of face right (F2) display does not
apply the double sided adhesive tape. The flexible cables for both display units are
common, however their alignment is different.
" Adhere the QR code sticker originally supplied with the key-LCD unit in the corner area
of the shield sticker. The QR code keeps information about contrast constant specified
individually for each display.
3-21
F1 (face left) display F2 (face right) display

double sided strengthening FC9
40mm adhesive tape plate flexible
cable
strengthening
plate
CN1
connector
terminal (contacts) cable bending
side
FC-8 flexible
cable
strengthening
plate shield sticker
double sided
adhesive tape
(adhered to
flexible cable
and shield
sticker)
shield sticker
cable bending Fig. 3-27
Fig. 3-26
3-22
(3) If necessary, remove and replace the display rear frame. Both display rear frames
installed in face left (F1) and face right (F2) are common parts.
" If necessary, replace the sealing of the display rear frame. First insert the sealing at 4
corners of the display rear fame and next carefully install it into the guide groove all
around the display rear frame. Make sure that the sealing is properly aligned around the
display rear frame (i.e. without excessive stretch, twist and tension).
fixing screw
sealing
display
rear frame
display rear frame

Fig. 3-28
" If necessary, after removing the display in face right (F2) and DCPU board, replace the
FC-3 flexible cable, which connects the DCPU board with the JX board. Insert the cable
into the cable guide from the V encoder side taking care of the direction of the cable.
V encoder
this line is at upper side
strengthening plate strengthening plate
cable strengthening plate

guide
(installed in face
right (F2)
FC-3 flexible cable
Fig. 3-29
3-23
(4) Reinstall both display units () Fig. 3-16 and 3-17).

" In the instruments with single display (CX-107 type) install the standard base cover in face
right (F2). Attach the sealing to the standard base cover. First insert the sealing at the 4
corners of the standard base cover and next carefully install it into the guide groove all
around the standard base cover. Make sure that the sealing is properly aligned around the
display frame (i.e. without excessive stretch, twist and tension).
fixing screw
sealing
standard base
cover
standard base cover

Fig. 3-30
3.4.2 CHECK
(1) Turn the instrument ON to enter Service mode () Test
section 9.1). Running test
Display check
Key check
(2) Select service function “Display check” in “Test” Battery check
mode and set to “Constant” () section 9.2.4, step Media check
(2)). Set the constants for both display units (in face
left (F1) and face right (F2)) to the relevant values by
Constant
changing “Count” number and input these values Face :1
to the instrument internal memory as “QR” by [SET] Level :7
key. The “QR” values – individual for each display, Count :32
QR: :32
can be confirmed in advance by reading the QR code _FACE _LEV. _INIT _SET
printed on the sticker attached to the shield sticker on
the back side of the display unit or reading the Input separately for
information provided with a brand new spare part. face left (F1) and face
" If the key-LCD unit remains unchanged, for example the right (F2) display
key top or the display frame is replaced, it is not necessary
to input “Count” number. The original setting is memorized
on the DCPU board.
(3) Select “Contrast check” in “Display check” main screen mode (“Display check” Æ
“Constant” – ) section 9.2.4 step (2)). Confirm that all dots are getting black and blank
and the display contrast changes in a few steps. Press {ESC} key.
3-24
(4) Select “Temp Sensor” in “Display check” main Temp Sensor

screen. Confirm that the temperatures for each LCD1 = +26.500
individual unit are displayed. Press {ESC} key () LCD2 = +26.500
PCB = +25.517
section 9.2.4 step (2)). Tilt = +26.187
(5) Select service function “Key check” in “Test” mode () section 9.2.4, step (3)). Check
the keyboard operation by pressing the subsequent keys and confirming the correct
display response.
3.5 OPTICAL PLUMMET

3.5.1 REPLACEMENT
(1) Remove the TR cover from the standard base () section 3.2.1).
(2) Loosen (or remove) the 2 optical plummet flange set screws, and pull out the optical
plummet from the instrument.
set
screw
prism
optical plummet
complete
set screw
Fig. 3-31
3.5.2 ADJUSTMENT
(1) Set up the tripod at a height of approx. 1.3m. Place the CX on the tripod head and
tighten the centering screw. Precisely level the instrument.
3-25
(2) Insert the optical plummet into the flange to the end with the prism pointing downwards.
Unscrew the optical plummet eyepiece and cover of the optical plummet adjusting
screws. Set the 4 reticle adjusting screws so that the reticle ring is coaxial with the
optical plummet tube. Relocate the eyepiece by turning the eyepiece focusing knob.
(3) Looking into the eyepiece of the optical plummet, turn the plummet until the field of
view is maximum. Slightly tighten the 2 set screws.
(4) Look into the eyepiece of the optical plummet. Rotating the standard base, check the
deviation from the optical plummet target.
Turn the optical plummet so that the deviation is minimum and tighten the 2 set screws.
(5) Adjust the 4 adjusting screws to remove the rest of the deviation () section 2.2.9) and
relocate the cover of the optical plummet adjusting screws.
3.6 LASER PLUMMET (OPTION)
3.6.1 REPLACEMENT
(1) Remove the TR cover and JX board from the standard base () section 3.2.1).
(2) Remove the LP-LD unit cable connector (CN1) from the CN32 connector on the laser
board.
(3) Loosen (or remove) the 2 laser plummet flange set screws, and pull out the laser
plummet from the instrument taking care of the LD-LP unit cable.
laser plummet
complete
LD-LP unit cable
set screws
Fig. 3-32
3-26
(4) While installing the new laser plummet, pass the

laser plummet cable through the hole in the
standard base. Insert the laser plummet into the screw points
flange to the limit position. Remove the laser downward
plummet cap and adjust the laser plummet position
referring to the front face of the LP-LD unit. Turn
the laser plummet until the U-shape groove
provided for the cable of the LP-LD unit is set at an
angle of approx. 45° referring to the horizontal
plane () Fig. 3-33). Slightly tighten the 2 set
screws. In this position the laser beam reflected by
the mirror installed at the end of the plummet will set “U-shape groove” at an
point downwards. angle of approx. 45° referring
to horizontal plane
Fig. 3-33
(5) Connect the LP-LD unit cable to the CN32 connector on the laser board.
" If necessary, the laser board can be replaced after the JX board removal.
(6) Reinstall the JX board and reconnect all cables to the respective connectors on the JX
board. For connection between the laser board and JX board use LP-HNS cable –
connect it to the CN31 connector on the laser board and CN18 connector on the JX
board.
CN1 connector of LP-LD cable

CN32 connector
laser plummet cap
laser board
screw 2.0 x 4.0mm
JX board
CN18 connector
CN31 connector LP-HNS cable
Fig. 3-34
3-27
" When the optional laser plummet is installed instead of the optical plummet, it is necessary
to order the following parts:
(1) laser plummet complete () section 11.4 Fig. 11-4, illust. 4-17)
(2) laser board () section 11.8 Fig. 11-8, illust. 8-15)
(3) screws 2.0 x 4.0mm () section 11.8 Fig. 11-8, illust. 8-17)
(4) LP-HNS cable () section 11.8 Fig. 11-8, illust. 8-16)
(5) warning label () section 11.5 Fig. 11-5, illust. 5-18)
3.6.2 ADJUSTMENT
Prepare the following tools to complete the adjustment:
• Regulated DC power supply (7.5∼8.0V DC, 2.5A)
• Ext. power supply & communication cable tool (ST-CX-01)
• Adjustment target
• Tripod
(1) Set up the tripod at a height of approx. 1.3m. Place

the CX on the tripod head and tighten the centering
screw. Precisely level the instrument.
(2) Connect the regulated DC power supply to the
combined communications and power source
connector of the CX via tool cable.
(3) Turn the instrument ON to enter Service mode and
select service function “Inst. flg.” in “Initialize”
submenu. Set the “L-plummet” option to “Yes” ()
section 9.2.1 step (6)). 1.3m
Inst. flg
Contrast : Norm
L-plummet : Yes
Fig. 3-35
o OKo
(4) Select service function “Laser plummet” of “Test” mode () section 9.2.4 step (6)).
(5) Press [INIT] key to set the laser plummet power
levels to the factory default. Level1 14
Level2 33
Level3 47
Level4 57
Factory default: Level5 61
Level1 14 oO N o C A L C I N I T SETo
Level2 33
Level3 47
Level4 57
Level5 61
3-28
(6) Press [ON] key to turn the laser diode ON and highlight Level1 14
“Level1” setting. Level2 33
Level3 47
Level4 57
Level5 61
oO F F o C A L C I N I T SETo
(7) Rotate the standard base and place a target between the tripod
legs in this manner that the target cross-lines are aligned with
the center of the circle created by the rotating laser plummet
beam.
" You can prepare the adjustment target using the graph paper
with the 1mm grid pattern.
" If the power of the observed laser spot is too low, press { T } Fig. 3-36
key to highlight “Level2” setting.
(8) Rotating the standard base, check the deviation from the
laser plummet target.
Turn the laser plummet so that the deviation is minimum
and tighten the 2 set screws.
Caution! When loosening and tightening the set screws, make sure
that the hexagonal wrench does not touch the electric
components on the JX board. target
(9) Adjust the 4 adjusting screws () Fig. 2-10) to remove
the rest of the deviation and confirm the laser beam spot
size () section 2.2.9A). Relocate the laser plummet cap
() Fig. 2-5).
Fig. 3-37
(10) Carry out the laser beam power adjustment () section
9.2.4 step (6).
3-29
3.7 IF COVER
3.7.1 DISASSEMBLING
IF board
cover
BT
label antenna cap
PCB
BT board
antenna
FC-4
complete
sealing
IF board
base
shield sheet
Fig. 3-38
(1) Unscrew the 4 screws fixing the IF board cover and remove the IF board cover.
(2) Unscrew the 2 screws fixing the PCB of the FC-4 complete.
(3) In the instruments equipped with the Bluetooth functionality disconnect the antenna
coaxial cable connector from the BT board, unscrew the 3 screws fixing the BT board
and remove the BT board.
(4) Remove the 2 screws fixing the IF board of the FC-4 complete.
(5) Remove the shield sheets (3 pieces) at the bottom part of the IF cover.
(6) Unstick the FC-4 complete from the 3 square pieces of the double sided adhesive tape
attached to the IF cover. Unlock the 4 clips of the battery terminal and remove the FC-4
complete along with the battery terminal from the IF cover.
(7) Unscrew the 2 screws fixing the IF board base and remove the IF board base.
3-30
(8) If necessary remove the cap (in the instruments without Bluetooth functionality) from
the IF cover.
" The antenna is fixed in the cover using the glue Cemedine Super X (clear) and it is
considered as not exchangeable.
(9) To replace the battery cover open the cover and using some force detach it from the IF
cover (the hinges of the battery cover are installed in the guide grooves of the IF cover at
an angle of approx. 45°).
Caution! During removal of the battery cover the 2 hinges might be broken. If this is a case,
replace with the new ones.
battery cover hinge

guide
groove
45°
IF cover
Fig. 3-39
(10) To remove the battery cover hooks pull out

in the direction shown in Fig. 3-40. battery cover hooks
Fig. 3-40
3-31
(11) To replace the USB cover open the cover at an angle of about 45° and using some force
detach it from the IF cover in “A” direction (the hinges of the USB cover are installed in
the guide grooves of the IF cover).
USB cover
“A”
direction
45°
hinge
IF cover
guide
groove
Fig. 3-41
Caution! During removal of the USB cover the 2 hinges might be broken. If this is a case, replace
with the new ones.
(12) To replace the USB cover hook push the spring at the inner side of the USB cover
downwards (e.g. using the tweezers) and pull the hook to the outside to detach the hook
acceptors from the axis in the USB cover. Then lift the hook up.
USB cover hook
c
washer
e
d
USB cover spring
Fig. 3-42
3-32
3.7.2 ASSEMBLING
(1) Attach the 3 square pieces of double sided IF board base
adhesive tape and tape A to the inner side
of the IF cover.
(2) Install the IF board base in the IF cover.
tape A
3 square pieces
of double sided
adhesive tape
Fig. 3-43
1mm
2mm
IF board base
fixing screws
5mm 5mm
2mm
tape A
3 square pieces
of double sided
adhesive tape
IF board base
3mm
Fig. 3-44
3-33
(3) If the instrument is equipped with Bluetooth functionality install the BT board in the IF
cover (i.e. IF cover complete w/BT) using the 3 fixing screws.
IF cover with Bluetooth IF cover without Bluetooth

screws 2 x 6mm
screw screws 2 x 4mm
2 x 4mm FC-4 complete
PCB of FC-4 FC-4 complete

complete
BT board
(attach BT
battery
label on top
terminal
of BT board)
IF cover
IF cover
Fig. 3-45
(4) Install the battery terminal of the FC-4 complete in the IF cover. First insert the battery
terminal in the opening of the IF cover and then push from the battery compartment side
to firmly secure the unit by the 4 clips.
(5) Fit the USB connectors in the respective holes in the IF cover and fix the IF board of the
FC-4 complete with the 2 screws.
(6) Fix the PCB of the FC-4 complete to the IF cover with the 2 screws.
(a) If the instrument is equipped with Bluetooth functionality (IF cover complete w/BT is
used), connect board to board connectors of the PCB of FC-4 complete and BT board
complete and use the 2 x 6mm fixing screws (2 pcs).
(b) If the instrument is not equipped with Bluetooth functionality (IF cover complete w/o
BT is used), use the 2 x 4mm screws (2 pcs) to attach the PCB of the FC-4 complete to
the IF cover.
" While the FC-4 flexible cable is installed in the IF cover, it will be bent at 6 positions ()
Fig. 3-45).
3-34
(7) Remove the paper separator from the 3 square pieces of the double sided adhesive tape.
Stick the FC-4 flexible cable to the adhesive tape adjusting the cable setting at 3
positions.
fixing screws for IF board

adjustment positions of cable
Fig. 3-46
(8) Install the antenna or antenna cap respectively.

(a) IF cover w/BT (for the instruments with Bluetooth functionality)
– Apply the glue Cemedine Super X (clear) to the hollow in the IF cover. Make the 2mm
layer of glue from the bottom section all around the hole.
– Pass the antenna coaxial cable through the hole and install the antenna in the IF cover. Be
careful while assembling, prevent antenna from damages.
Cemedine Super X (clear)
IF cover
antenna
Fig. 3-47
3-35
– Connect the antenna cable to the

connector “A” () Fig. 3-48). Lead the
antenna cable along the guides “B”, “C”
and “D”. B
A
C
Fig. 3-48
– Attach the IF board cover to the IF

cover using the 4 fixing screws. Do IF board
not snap the antenna cable. cover
Fig. 3-49
3-36
(b) IF cover w/o BT (for the instruments

without Bluetooth functionality)
– Install the antenna cap in the IF cover.
Fix it firmly to secure waterproof
resistance.
antenna cap
Fig. 3-50
– Attach the IF board cover to the IF

cover using the 4 fixing screws.
IF board
cover
Fig. 3-51
(9) Stick the blind tape SW and tape U

sealing C
inside the USB compartment. Insert tape SW
USB cover
the battery spring in the slot in the IF sealing C
cover. Attach sealing B and C BAT cover
around the USB compartment and
battery compartment. tape U
" Sealing B can be distinguished from
sealing C by slightly smaller size and
larger thickness.
battery
spring
sealing B, sealing B,
BAT cover USB cover
Fig. 3-52
3-37
(10) USB cover assembling

(a) Attach the spring and washer to the axis at the lower side of the USB cover.
(b) While pushing the spring downwards (e.g. using the tweezers), install the USB cover
hook in the USB cover. Fit the acceptors of the hook onto the axis in the USB cover.
USB cover hook
washer
USB cover spring
Fig. 3-53
" It is possible to remove the USB cover

USB cover
hook reversing procedure shown above.
(c) Insert the 2 hinges in the square holes of

the USB cover as shown in Fig. 3-54.
hinge hinge (green)

(gray)
Fig. 3-54
(d) Attach the USB cover to the IF cover at an angle of about 45°. Insert in “A” direction -
) Fig. 3-55). Push the USB cover until the spring catches of the hinges rest in the
square holes in the IF cover properly. Snapping sound will be heard and subsequently
the hinge spring force will assist in setting the USB cover to open position.
" Confirm that the USB cover opens to an angle of about 30° by the force of hook spring
when the USB cover hook is unlocked.
3-38
USB cover
“A”
direction
45°
hinge
IF cover
guide
groove
Fig. 3-55
(11) Battery cover assembling.

battery hook
(a) Attach the springs to the battery hooks.
(b) Install the battery cover hooks in the battery cover by spring
fitting the acceptors of the battery hooks on the axes in Fig. 3-56
the battery cover. Confirm smooth operation of the
battery hooks.
battery
cover hook
hinge
(gray)
battery cover
hinge (green)
Fig. 3-57
3-39
(c) Insert the 2 hinges in the square holes of the battery cover as shown in Fig. 3-57.
(d) Attach the battery cover to the IF cover at an angle of about 45° referring to the
position of the spring catches of the hinges and the guide grooves in the IF cover
(insert in “B” direction - ) Fig. 3-58). Push the battery cover at the gray hinge side
until the spring catch of the hinge rests in the square hole in the IF cover properly.
Next force the green color hinge to the inside of the hole in the battery cover and push
the cover to fix it in the IF cover. Snapping sound will be heard.
hinge
battery cover
guide
“B” groove
45°
IF cover
Fig. 3-58
(12) If the brand name plate is not installed, attach it

onto the USB cover. Set to position, in which double sided
the Sokkia logo is horizontal. adhesive
tape
brand
name
plate
Fig. 3-59
3-40
(13) Attach the 3 shield sheets to the bottom part of the IF cover. Install the sealing in the
groove all around the IF cover.
shield sheets
(3 pieces)
sealing
Fig. 3-60
(14) When attaching the IF cover to the

standard base tighten the 6 fixing screws
in order from c to h.
f
e
h g
d c
Fig. 3-61
3-41
3.8 TR COVER
3.8.1 DISASSEMBLING
There are 3 types of the TR cover:
• TR cover (without TSshield functionality)
• TR cover complete A (with TSshield 2G
functionality)
• TR cover complete B (with TSshield 3G TRGK
functionality) board waterproof
sheet
buzzer
trigger
key
TRGK_HNS
adhesive
tape
TR cover
Fig. 3-62
TR cover (without TSshield functionality)
Fig. 3-63
All parts installed in the cover can be replaced with the new ones. If the shield sheet A is
replaced, push it to the upper side of the cover before tightening the fixing screws.
3-42
TR cover with TSshield 2G functionality:
COAX_TB
shield sheet A shield sheet B
Fig. 3-64
Caution! Do not disassemble the TSshield unit – do not remove the COAX_TB board, flexible and
coaxial cables along with other parts of TSshield unit installed in the TR cover. To
maintain the original assembling conditions do not remove the shield sheet A and shield
sheet B. If the parts are disassembled, the unit may not work properly.
The TRGK unit parts can be replaced.
TR cover with TSshield 3G functionality:
3G_COAX_HNS
shield sheet A shield sheet B

Fig. 3-65
Caution! Do not disassemble the TSshield unit – do not remove the 3G_COAX_HNS, flexible and
coaxial cables along with other parts of TSshield unit installed in the TR cover. To
maintain the original assembling conditions do not remove the shield sheet A and shield
sheet B. If the parts are disassembled, the unit may not work properly.
The TRGK unit parts can be replaced.
3-43
Removal of parts:
" The shield sheet A and shield sheet B are used in all types of the instruments.
(1) Disconnect the cables from the TRGK board (buzzer cable from the CN44 connector
and TRGK_HNS from the CN43 connector). Unscrew the 4 fixing screws and remove
the TRGK board from the TR cover.
(2) If necessary, remove the trigger key and buzzer. Buzzer is attached to the TR cover
using the double sided adhesive tape.
Caution! Do not touch the conductive terminal of the trigger key. If necessary, clean it with a dry
and soft cloth.
3.8.2 ASSEMBLING
(1) TRGK board, buzzer and trigger key assembling.
(a) Using the isopropyl alcohol (IPA) clean up the TR cover surface in the area where the
buzzer will be installed.
(b) Stick the waterproof sheet to the TR cover.
(c) Attach the buzzer to the TR cover using the double sided adhesive tape. Attach the
buzzer in the position shown in Fig. 3-66, so that the buzzer cable passes through the
slit in the collar in the TR cover.
buzzer cable
position
of buzzer cable
double sided
adhesive tape
waterproof
sheet
slit
isopropyl alcohol
(IPA)
Fig. 3-66
3-44
(d) Install the trigger key in the TR cover in the proper position. Next attach the TRGK
board to the TR cover using the 5 fixing screws. Connect the buzzer cable to the CN44
connector on the TRGK board.
TRGK board fixing screw
CN44 connector
TRGK
board
trigger key
connect buzzer cable

to CN44 connector on
TRGK board
Fig. 3-67
(e) Connect the TRG_HNS to the

CN43 connector on the TRGK
board. TRGK_HNS
TRGK board
CN43 connector
Fig. 3-68
3-45
(2) Attach the sealing to the TR cover. First

insert the sealing at 4 corners of the TR cover
and next carefully install it into the guide sealing
groove all around the cover. Make sure that
the sealing is properly aligned around the
display rear frame (i.e. without excessive
stretch, twist and tension).
Fig. 3-69
(3) While attaching the TR cover to the standard base

tighten the 6 fixing screws in order from c to h.
f e
h g
d c
Fig. 3-70
3-46
" In the instruments equipped with the TSshield functionality the handle complete with
antenna () section 11.4 Fig. 11-4, illust. 4-5) must be used and additional part CN-
COAX-HNS must be installed in the standard base. Tighten the CN-COAX-HNS unit
with the specified torque using the torque driver and bit tool. Connect the coaxial cable of
the CN-COAX-HNS to the respective connector on the COAX-TB board (for TSshield
2G functionality) or 3G_COAX_HNS board (for TSshield 3G functionality) attached to
the TR cover.
align coaxial cable as
within 12mm
CN-COAX-HNS shown in diagram
unit
apply locking agent

Three Bond 1401C
from this side
Fig. 3-71
" In the instruments, which do not apply the TSshield functionality use the handle
complete without antenna () section 11.4 Fig. 11-4, illust. 4-6) and attach the waterproof
plate to the standard base.
waterproof plate
fixing clean up with mixture

screw of alcohol and ether
Fig. 3-72
3-47
3.9 EXT-CN1 UNIT

The serial connector – EXT-CN1 unit is installed in the standard base of the CX-103/CX-105/CX-
107 instruments.
3.9.1 ASSEMBLING
(1) Pass the cable of the EXT-CN1
unit through the hole in the red black
connector base and tighten the
connector fixing nut.
" Install the connector in the proper
position against the connector base connector
referring to the colors of the cable
jackets.
connector
base
nut
Fig. 3-73
(2) Install the connector cap and

sealing in the connector base.
connector cap
sealing
connector
base
Fig. 3-74
(3) While the display complete in face right (F2) is removed install the EXT-CN1 unit in the
standard base. Confirm that the sealing is properly attached to the connector base and fix
the connector base to the standard base with the 3 screws. Place the cable of the EXT-
CN1 unit in front of the cable guide. Connect the 2 connectors of the cable to the JX
board as shown in Fig. 3-14.
3-48
fixing screw for connector base
connector base
Fig. 3-75
" In the CX-101/CX-102/Low Temperature Models the combined communications and

power source connector – (EXT-CN2 unit) is installed in the axis flange. Install the blind
cover with sealing in the standard base instead of the EXT-CN1 unit.
Æ
sealing
fixing screw
for blind cover
blind cover
Fig. 3-76
3-49
3.10 TRIBRACH TR-102
3.10.1 PARTS REPLACEMENT

(1) Turn the tribrach clamp counterclockwise and lift the instrument out of the tribrach.
(2) Rotate the levelling screws clockwise to the limit
position to uncover the holes at the lower part of hole in
the levelling screw sleeves () Fig. 3-77). levelling
screw
sleeve
Fig. 3-77
(3) If necessary, remove the 3 levelling screw caps by pulling them out from the levelling
head.
" The levelling screw caps are the plastic parts inserted into the relevant holes of the
levelling head.
" For the further procedures of the levelling screws removal it is not necessary to remove the
levelling screw caps from the levelling head. If the caps are removed, apply the 2 spots of
glue Cemedine Super X No. 8008 (clear) at the opposite sides of the caps before installing
the caps in the levelling head.
(4) Using the hexagonal wrench 1.27mm loosen the 3 pairs of the screws fixing the 3
levelling screw sleeves in the levelling head.
Cemedine Super X
No. 8008 (clear) levelling screw
sleeve
levelling
fixing screws
screw cap
levelling screw
sleeve
fixing screws levelling head
levelling screw
sleeve
fixing screws
Fig. 3-78
3-50
(5) Using the spanner inserted in the holes at the lower part of the levelling screw sleeve
(spanner tool, part No. ST-TK-20 can be used - ) Fig. 12-9, illust. No. 10) rotate the
levelling screw clockwise to remove the levelling screw complete (with the sleeve) from
the levelling head. Repeat the same procedure for the 2 other levelling screws. If the
rotation of one of the levelling screw sleeves is limited by the excessive tilt of the
levelling head, stop rotation of this screw and turn the 2 other levelling screw sleeves to
reduce the tension.
levelling
head
levelling levelling
screw complete screw sleeve
grease SH-33M
Fig. 3-79
(6) After detaching the levelling head from the base unit turn the tribrach clamp knob to the
lock position () Fig. 3-80) to relieve the tension of the plate springs. Remove the clamp
retaining ring by rotating it counterclockwise.
(7) Remove the clamp plate complete from the levelling head.
(8) If necessary remove the screw fixing the plate springs and replace the plate springs for
the new ones (3 pcs). Assemble the plate springs in the proper configuration as shown in
Fig. 3-80.
" The plate springs are used to keep stable position of the instrument in the tribrach unit. If
the plate springs are worn out resulting in the weakened tension on the instrument clamp
leg, the plate springs should be changed for the new ones.
" The plate springs can be exchanged without removing the clamp plate complete.
3-51
clamp retaining ring
levelling clamp plate complete

head screw, plate spring
plate springs
(3 pcs)
set tribrach clamp

knob to lock position
plate springs (2pcs)
plate spring B
Fig. 3-80
plate spring plate spring B
Fig. 3-81
3-52
(9) While installing the clamp plate complete apply grease G53 and locking agent Three
Bond 1401C according to Fig. 3-82 and 3-83.
Three Bond
1401C
grease 3 kgfcm (0.3 Nm)

G53
Fig. 3-82
grease clamp plate complete

G53
grease
G53
Three Bond spring is tightened in factory by the screw to
1401C adjust the specified torque for the clamp
when the tribrach is attached to the
instrument and clamp knob is being turned to
lock position
Fig. 3-83
" If necessary replace the circular level complete.

Remove the 3 circular level adjusting screws to
base plate
remove the circular level from the levelling
head. Take care of the steel ball placed between circular
the base surface in levelling head and circular level
level.
steel ball
grease No.7
adjusting screw
Fig. 3-84
3-53
(10) Remove the 3 screws securing the levelling screw retainer.

" When reassembling apply the locking agent Three Bond 1401 to the threads of the
screws and tighten the screws with torque of 6 kgfcm (0.6 Nm).
securing screw for

levelling screw retainer
Three Bond base plate
1401
Fig. 3-85
(11) Loosen the ring nut set screw using the hexagonal wrench 1.27mm and remove the ring
nut by rotating it counterclockwise. Lift the levelling screw retainer upward and separate
the levelling screw units from the levelling screw retainer.
ring nut
levelling screw retainer
ring nut
inclined surface of the set screw levelling screw
levelling screw retainer is
complete
pointing downwards to fit
the bottom end of the
levelling screw
grease No.7-2
grease No.7-2
Fig. 3-86
3-54
" If necessary replace the levelling screw holder(s). While installing the new holder(s) apply
the 3M EC-1368 adhesive to the relevant front and back contact surfaces in the base plate.
base plate 3M EC-1368 adhesive

levelling
screw holders
Fig. 3-87
Caution! At the current stage of manufacturing (as of January 2012) it is

not recommended to dismantle the levelling screw complete.
There is a risk that the thread at the upper part of the levelling
screw will be accidentally scratched when the stopper E-ring is
being removed from the levelling screw. In this case it would be
difficult to detach the levelling screw sleeve from the levelling
screw and reassemble the unit preserving smooth rotation of the
levelling screw. If necessary, replace the levelling screw as a
complete unit including levelling screw sleeve. Fig. 3-88
(12) Reassemble the tribrach units reversing procedures described above. Finally adjust the
smooth rotation of all 3 levelling screws by turning the ring nut () Fig. 3-89). After
adjustment of the ring nut tighten the ring nut set screw using the hexagonal wrench
1,27mm. Make sure that there is no backlash on the levelling screw units (i.e. the
position of the levelling head is firm against the base plate) and the torque for rotation of
all 3 levelling screws is approximately the same.
ring nut set screw
ring nut
Fig. 3-89
4-1
4. HORIZONTAL ENCODER (VERTICAL AXIS) UNIT

damages to electrical parts.
4.1 DISASSEMBLING
4.1.1 STANDARD BASE FROM BASE UNIT

(1) Remove the IF cover and DCPU board () section 3.1.1). Pass the flexible cable of the
horizontal encoder through the slit in the ferrite core to the lower section of the instrument.
(2) Remove the TR cover and JX board () section 3.2.1).
vertical cap
IF cover axis screw
DCPU
board display complete
(face left (F2))
TR cover
set screw
of waterproof plate
display rear
frame
JX
board
standard base clamp

display complete and fine motion screw
(face left (F1)) base unit
coil spring
Note: Base unit with combined

communications and
power source connector
is shown in this diagram
Fig. 4-1
4-2
(3) Remove the display units in face left (F1) and face right (F2) () section 3.4.1). Remove
the display rear frame in face left (F1).
(4) Loosen or remove the set screw and remove the standard base clamp & fine motion
screw.
(5) Remove the hook of the coil spring from the screw installed in the standard base. To
detach the spring loosen (or remove) the screw. The locking agent Three Bond 1401C is
applied to the screw thread to hold the screw in place. If much glue remains on the screw
thread, clean the thread of the screw with alcohol (or acetone) to dissolve the remaining
glue. Later during assembling procedures apply the Three Bond 1401C to the thread of
the screw before installing the screw in the standard base.
(6) Remove the 4 screws with spring washers securing the waterproof plate () Fig. 4-1).
(7) Remove the 3 caps and unscrew the vertical axis screws (3 hexagonal socket head
screws). Carefully remove the standard base from the base unit in an upward motion (if
necessary push the waterproof plate downwards).
4.1.2 CMOS FRAME COMPLETE H

There are 2 types of the CMOS frame complete H depending on the instrument type:
CX-101/CX-102/CX-103/Low Temperature Models: double detector unit
CX-105/CX-107: single detector unit
(1) Unscrew the 4 screws (double detector) or 2
screws (single detector) securing the CMOS fixing screw
frame complete H. Then remove the CMOS
frame(s) together with the flexible cable.
" The fixing screws for CMOS frame(s) are CMOS frame
secured by the locking agent. Before with CMOS
disassembling apply alcohol to remove glue. and LED
" Clean the CMOS (remove dust) with a soft
brush or soft cloth. It can be used also soft
lens tissue lightly moistened with a mixture
of alcohol and ether.
Fig. 4-2
4-3
(2) Remove the cable retainer A from the

CMOS frame
vertical axis (CX-101/CX-102/Low fixing base
Temperature Models). screws
cable
(3) Unscrew the 3 fixing screws and remove retainer A
the CMOS frame base from the vertical
axis.
disk
Fig. 4-3
4.1.3 H SLIP-RING UNIT (CX-101/CX-102/LOW TEMPERATURE

MODELS)
cable retainer A
H-slipring
cable
axis flange CN60 and CN61

connectors
connector
base
EXT-CN2 unit
Fig. 4-4
(1) Turn the tribrach clamp counterclockwise and lift the axis flange out of the tribrach.
4-4
(2) Unscrew the 2 fixing screws and remove the connector base with the EXT-CN2 unit
from the axis flange. Then disconnect the 2 connectors of the EXT-CN2 unit from the
relevant connectors of the H-slipring brush cables.
(3) If necessary remove the nut fixing the red and black
connector of the EXT-CN2 unit from wires next to
the connector base. Replace the each other connector
defective parts with the new ones. base
EXT-CN2
(4) Pass the cable of the EXT-CN2 unit unit
through the hole in the connector base
and tighten the connector fixing nut.
" Install the connector in the proper
position.
connector
(5) Install the connector cap and sealing in sealing nut
cap
the connector base.
Fig. 4-5
(6) Turn the axis flange upside down, remove the axis axis flange cover
flange cover with axis flange sealing (3 fixing
screws). Remove the tube retaining the H-slipring
cables (the tube has the 2 pairs of holes, which are
useful to remove the tube from the axis).
tube,
H cable
Fig. 4-6
(7) Pull out the H-slipring cable together with the 2 connectors through the hole in the axis
to set the cables above the H-slipring board.
(8) Remove the 2 screws fixing the H-slipring brush.
(9) Remove solder from the 3 pins fixing the H-slipring board.
(10) Remove the H-slipring board and H-slipring brush () Fig. 4-7).
4-5
soldering pin
H-slipring brush H-slipring
fixing screw cables with
2 connectors
soldering soldering pin
pin H-slipring board
H-slipring brush
spacer
H-slipring cable
with 2 connectors
Fig. 4-7
(11) Unscrew the 3 screws fixing the spacer and remove the spacer from the vertical axis.
black
z red
white
hole
z z
yellow
H-slipring board
z H-slipring board soldering points
Fig. 4-8
4-6
4.1.4 VERTICAL AXIS

Before disassembling of the vertical axis, the H-slipring must be removed () section 4.1.3 – CX-
101/CX-102/Low Temperature Models).
(1) Unscrew the 3 hexagonal socket head
screws and remove the vertical axis vertical axis
complete from the axis flange. with disk
(2) Separate the waterproof plate from the O ring

axis flange.
(3) If necessary remove the O ring from the
waterproof plate. waterproof
plate
(4) Remove the V ring E from the base of
axis flange.
" When assembling insert the V ring E onto V ring E
the base of the axis flange and push it
downward until its bottom flat surface
firmly rests on the axis flange base.
axis flange
complete
(5) If necessary separate axis flange from the
axis flange base.
seal washer C
" There are 2 types of the axis flange: axis
(only CX-103/
flange B with base A (for the CX-101/CX- CX-105/CX-107)
102/Low Temperature Models equipped
with the H-slipring) and axis flange A with vertical axis
base B for the CX-103/CX-105/ CX-107 fixing screw
instruments, which are not equipped with Fig. 4-9
the H-slipring).
spring washer fixing screw
washer
axis flange A
for CX-103/
CX-105/
CX-107
axis flange B for
CX-101/CX-102/
Low Temperature
Models
axis flange base A axis flange base B

Fig. 4-10
4-7
4.2 BASE UNIT ASSEMBLING
4.2.1 ASSEMBLING FLOW CHART

Refer to the flow chart below to perform the base unit assembling .
START
Vertical axis assembling
CMOS frame base centered

Installation of CMOS frame base using setting tool
Installation of CMOS frame complete H
END
4.2.2 VERTICAL AXIS ASSEMBLING

Tools:
• CMOS frame base setting tool
(1) Assemble the vertical axis, flange and tribrach reversing procedures described in section
4.1.3∼4.1.4.
Caution! Attach the vertical axis to the axis flange in the correct position referring to the index lines
on the disk () Fig. 4-11). After alignment of the vertical axis tube (referring to the disk,
which is adhered to the tube), tighten the standard base clamp and turn the base unit upside
down; be careful not to move the axis flange against the vertical axis tube. Detach the
tribrach from the axis flange and holding the clamp (or disk) in place, slightly rotate the
axis flange left and right to align the 3 holes in the axis flange base with the 3 holes in the
vertical axis tube.
4-8
number printed
on disk
disk
c
index
mark
c hold in place vertical axis tube (disk) by

index locked clamp and slightly rotate the axis
approx.90° mark flange left and right to align the 3 holes
tribrach clamp of axis flange base and vertical axis
tube
index mark on disk is set at an angle of
approx. 90° referring to the line passing
through the center of the vertical axis and
tribrach clamp and number printed on disk is
located at a reverse side of tribrach clamp. d
d affix the vertical axis tube to axis flange

using the 3 screws
Fig. 4-11
CX-101/CX-102/Low Temperature Models

(a) After installing the vertical axis in the axis flange, attach the spacer to the vertical axis
nut. Take care of the correct positioning of the spacer. The slit “A” must be
approximately aligned with the hole on the upper side of the vertical axis, which is
provided for the screw fixing the cable retainer A.
(b) When installing the H-slipring, pass the H-slipring cable through the hole in the
vertical axis from the bottom to the top and pass the cables of the H-slipring brush
through the hole in the axis flange base, which is used for installation of the EXT-CN2
unit. Install the H-slipring board and H-slipring brush. Attach the H-slipring to the
spacer in the position shown in Fig. 4-12 and solder the board to the pins of the spacer.
Secure the H-slipring brush in the axis flange base by the 2 fixing screws.
4-9
H-slipring brush
H-slipring board
install spacer in position, in which
slit “A” is approx. aligned with the
hole in vertical axis
H-slipring
cable with
2 connectors
slit “A”
in spacer
Fig. 4-12
black
z red
white
hole
z z
yellow slit „A” in spacer
H-slipring board
z H-slipring board soldering points
Fig. 4-13
4-10
(c) Align the H-slipring cable in the hole of the

axis flange cover
vertical axis to make the wires straight and
parallel to each other and hold the wires in place
by the tube. Install the tube, so that the wires face
the ditch in the tube.
(d) Attach the axis flange cover (with sealing) to the
axis flange base using the 3 fixing screws. tube,
H cable
H-slipring cable
Fig. 4-14
(e) Hold the H-slipring cable in place using the cable retainer A.
cable retainer A
Fig. 4-15
4-11
(f) When installing the EXT-CN2 unit connector base connect the CN60 and CN61
connectors to the relevant connectors of the H-slipring brush cable. Keep the same gap
between the connector base and axis flange at the left and right side.
keep the same gaps on both sides
Fig. 4-16
4.2.3 INSTALLING THE H CMOS UNIT

(1) Put the CMOS frame base onto the vertical axis.
Make sure that the “Date” mark is facing up (in CMOS frame base
the position as shown in Fig. 4-17). The CMOS setting tool (2 pcs)
frame base is centered on the vertical axis by
means of the CMOS frame base setting tool.
CMOS
frame
base
“Date”
mark
C“C C C C”C C C C
Fig. 4-17
4-12
(a) First fix the CMOS frame base to the vertical axis using the 2 pieces of the setting tool
at the 2 holes of the CMOS frame base.
(b) Install and tighten 1 screw fixing the CMOS frame base.
(c) Remove one of the setting tools from the CMOS frame base. Install and tighten another
fixing screw.
(d) Remove the setting tool remaining in the CMOS frame base. Install and tighten the 3rd
fixing screw.
(a), (b) (c) (d)
Æ Æ
Fig. 4-18 Fig. 4-19 Fig. 4-20
(2) Reinstall the CMOS frame complete H (double type detector for CX-101/CX-102/CX-
103/Low Temperature Models and single type detector for CX-105/CX-107).
Caution! Attach the shield sticker to the CMOS frame as shown in Fig. 4-21 (only double type
detector of the CMOS frame complete).
Caution! Take care of the CMOS frame positioning referring to the CMOS frame base and
standard base clamp () Fig. 4-21).
" The CMOS frame complete H as a service spare part is supplied with the protective seal
attached to both CMOS sensors. Remove the seal in advance before installation of the
CMOS frame complete H.
4-13
Pull both H1 and H2 CMOS frames (double detector type) or H1 CMOS frame (single
detector type) outward (in “A”-“A” directions as shown in Fig.4-21) before tightening
the fixing screw.
CX-101/CX-102/CX-103/Low Temperature Models
bend shield sticker

here attach shield sticker
”A” so that there is no gap here
H1 ”A”
H2
“Date” H-slipring cable
mark (CX-101/CX-102/
Low Temperature
Models)
attach shield sticker so
its surface is not ridged
horizontal clamp Fig. 4-21
If necessary, carefully clean the CMOS

CX-105/CX-107 sensor(s) in advance using mixture of
ether and alcohol.
”A”
H1
“Date”
mark
standard
base clamp
Fig. 4-22
4-14
(3) After careful cleaning of the disk install the standard base on the top of the vertical axis
(proceed to section 4.4.1 directly) or perform optional inspection according to section
4.3.
4.3 ENCODER SIGNAL INSPECTION AND ADJUSTMENT

(OPTION)
The procedures stated in this section can be performed, if the service workshop is equipped with the
optional tool: Absolute Encoder Test Box. If this tool is not available, make sure that the cleaning of
the encoder CMOS sensor(s) and disk is carefully done in advance and reassemble the instrument
straight away. Clean the disk and CMOS sensor(s) using mixture of alcohol and ether.
4.3.1 INSPECTION AND ADJUSTMENT FLOW CHART

Refer to the flow chart below to perform the encoder inspection and adjustment.
START
LED check
Detector check
use
Absolute Encoder
Test Box
H encoder constant data input
H encoder slit pattern check – “Slit check” function
END
4-15
4.3.2 PREPARATION
Prepare the following tools and equipment to complete the inspection:
• Absolute encoder Test Box with ext. power supply & communication cable tool
• Regulated DC power supply DC 7.2V ∼ 8.0V (1.5A)
• Rotary table
(1) Connect the Test Box tool to the horizontal encoder flexible cable () Fig. 4-23 below).
(2) Connect the Test Box tool to the regulated power supply (DC 7.2 ∼ 8.0V) using the
external power supply cable.
(3) Turn the external power supply and Test Box ON. Carry out the encoder inspection
using the respective service functions.
" Service functions described in this section are available when firmware ver. 1.00 is
installed in the Test Box (as of February 2012).
H1 to regulated DC power supply

(H2) DC 7.2V ∼ 8.0V
rotary table
Absolute Encoder Test Box
Fig. 4-23
4-16
To carry out the inspection and adjustment, first of all select detector type: single or double by
pressing [ST=1] or [ST=2] key of the Test Box. The following service functions are available
through the key board operation.
LED (S)
Press {ON} to turn the power ON {F1}
Position : 0
to enter Service mode Level : 339
Step : 1
⇓ POS STEP ON_
TEST BOX 1.00

Detector : Single Detector (S)
Type : LED pos. :0
ES,OS,PS {F2}
CX,FX,SX
ST=1 ST=2 _OKo
(1) LED ALL CHK_
[OK] ⇓ ⇑ {ESC}
}
TEST BOX (S) Constant (S)
F1: LED {ESC} {F3}
F2: Detector
F3: Constant ST = 1
F4: Slit check OK_
Slit check (S)

{F4}
0˚00’00”
START
(1)
Press [ST=1] key for single detector of the CX-105/CX-107 (“Detector: Single”) or [ST=2]
key for double detector of the CX-101/CX-102/CX-103 (“Detector: Dual”)
Although the double detector is installed in the CX-105/CX-107 Low Temperature Models,
this detector is recognized by the instrument as a single detector, therefore in this case press
[ST=1] key for inspection of the encoder.
4-17
4.3.3 LED CHECK

The flashing LED(s) can be observed visually to confirm the LED(s) operation.
screen for double encoder
Main menu
TEST BOX (D) LED ( D )
F1: LED
F2: Detector
{F1} Position : 0
Level : 339
F3: Constant Step : 1
F4: Slit check POS_ STEP ON_
(1) Press {F1} key of the tool keyboard to select LED check function.
(2) Press [ON] key and observe visually the encoder LEDs. Confirm that the red visible
light of LED is emitted. Check each of the 3 LEDs: H1 and H2 side for the double
detector of the CX-101/CX-102/CX-103 or H1 side only for the single detector of the
CX-105/CX-107. To switch between LEDs press [POS] key. “Position: 0” stands for the
center LED, “Position: “1” – right side LED, “Position “2” – left side LED.
" If the LED(s) is not lit, confirm the connections between the tool and encoder and, if
necessary replace the defective CMOS frame complete (with LEDs and flexible cable).
[POS] press to select the LED (center, left or right

LED ( D )
side)
[Step] while changing the LED intensity Position : 0
Level : 339
determined by “Level”, the minimum Step : 1
changeable value (one step) can be switched POS_ STEP ON_
between 1* / 10 /100
[ON] press to turn the LED ON
[OFF] press to turn the LED OFF
Level LED brightness level setting within range of 0~2047 (339*). To increase the
LED brightness press { S } key, to decrease the LED brightness press { T }
key. The minimum “Level” count change is determined by “Step” setting.
* default setting
(3) Press {ESC} key to exit to the main menu screen.
4-18
4.3.4 DETECTOR CHECK

The light adjustment function of the detector unit: LED / CMOS sensor can be confirmed.
Main menu {F2} Press {ALL}, after a few seconds test is completed
TEST BOX (D) Detector (D) Detector (D)

F1: LED LED pos. :0 LED pos. :0
F2: Detector POS . : 0 = OK
POS . : 1 = OK
F3: Constant POS . : 2 = OK
F4: Slit check POS ALL CHK_ POS ALL CHK_
" If necessary, during inspection use any box (e.g. cardboard box) or darkening curtain to
prevent any light coming from outside into the encoder unit.
(1) Press {F2} to select Detector check function.
(2) Press [ALL] key. The proper self-adjustment of the signal level(s) of CMOS sensor(s)
and LED intensity (PWM) will be confirmed. Make sure that “OK” messages are
displayed for all 3 inspected positions.
press {ALL} key:
“Detector” confirmation screen POS: 0, 1, 2 sig. adj. screens Result of test
Detector (D) Detector (D) Detector (D)

LED pos. :0 LED pos. :0 LED pos. :0
⇒ POS.:0 POS . : 0 = OK
Checking all pos. PWM:0298,0315 ⇒ POS . : 1 = OK
DAC :0320,0294 POS . : 2 = OK
POS ALL CHK_ POS ALL CHK_ POS ALL CHK_
If the LED/CMOS sensor emitted/detected light adjustment is abnormal, “NG” message

is displayed at the erroneous position.
Example of faulty result: Detector (D)
abnormally low or high duty cycle (PWM) LED POS. :1
POS.:0
and (or) DAC (digital to analogue PWM:0000,2047
converter) signal level data DAC :0500,1023
POS ALL CHK
Signal not received (check connections
Detector (D)
between the test box tool and encoder LED pos. :0
cable) POS . : 0 = Timeout
POS . : 1 = Timeout
POS . : 2 = Timeout
POS ALL CHK_
" The encoder test can be performed at individual
Detector (D)
positions as well. Press [POS] key to select the LED pos. :1
respective “POS” and [CHK] key to carry out the test. NG_
PWM:0000,2047
DAC :0500,1023
POS ALL CHK_
4-19
Detector (D) Detector (S)

LED pos. :0 LED pos. :0
POS.:0 POS.:0 single
PWM:0298,0315 double PWM:0298
DAC :0320,0294 detector DAC :0320 detector
POS ALL CHK_ POS ALL CHK_
H1 data H2 data H1 data
If “NG” message is displayed check as follows:

(a) Confirm that light from outside does not penetrate the encoder unit.
(b) Confirm the connection between tool and encoder.
If (a) and (b) are OK, reconfirm light emission of LED () section 4.3.3), readjust
position of the CMOS frame and if necessary, change the CMOS frame complete (with
LEDs and flexible cable).
(3) Press {ESC} to exit to the main menu screen.
4.3.5 H ENCODER CONSTANT INPUT

The initially unsettled or updated constant data of the horizontal encoder is mathematically
calculated and input to the internal memory of the tool CPU board.
" This function should be always performed after adjustment (readjustment) of the encoder
unit.
Main menu
TEST BOX (D) Constant (D)
F1: LED
F2: Detector {F3}
F3: Constant
F4: Slit check ST = 2
OK_
" During inspection use any box (e.g. cardboard box) or darkening curtain to prevent any
light coming from outside into the encoder unit.
(1) Press {F3} key to select “Constant” function.
Constant (D)
(2) Press [OK] to memorize the initial encoder data.
Step :1/4
The short beep sounds and the horizontal angle display 162°00’00”
is automatically reset (the displayed angle becomes >>> <<<
0°00’00”). The unit is ready for the 2nd position data oINIT oO K o
reading.
⇓
" Any position of the axis can be selected as the starting
Constant (D)
point.
Step :2/4
0°00’00”
oINIT oO K o
4-20
" If any light is coming from outside and influencing the

Constant (D)
CMOS sensor output signal, the error code or “ERR:
CCD Adjust.” message is displayed. Put the cover onto Step :2/4
ERR: CCD Adjust.
the encoder and press [INIT] key to instantly restore
the normal conditions for the encoder operation. oINIT oO K o
If [INIT] key is not pressed, it will take a several
seconds to recover normal operation of the encoder.
(3) Turn the vertical axis 90° ± 8° referring to the displayed Constant (D)
angle.
Step :2/4
" The correct angular setting (within 90° ± 8°) is indicated 90°00’00”
by “>>> <<<” mark shown at the lower part of the >>> <<<
oI N I T oO K o
display.
" To complete all procedures encoder can be rotated either ⇓
clockwise or counterclockwise. Constant (D)
Step :3/4
90°00’00”
oI N I T oO K o
(4) Press [OK] to memorize the encoder data.

The short beep sounds and the unit is ready for the 3rd Constant (D)
position data reading. Step :3/4
180°00’00”
(5) Turn the axis 90° (within 180 ± 8° from the initial >>> <<<
setting) referring to the displayed angle. oI N I T oO K o
" The correct angle setting is indicated by “>>> <<<” ⇓

mark shown at the lower part of the display. Constant (D)
(6) Press [OK] to memorize the encoder data. Step :4/4

180°00’00”
The short beep sounds and the unit is ready for the 4th
position data reading. oI N I T oO K o
(7) Turn the axis 90° (within 270 ± 8° from the initial
Constant (D)
setting) referring to the displayed angle.
" The correct angle setting is indicated by “>>> <<<” Step :4/4
270°00’00”
mark shown at the lower part of the display. >>> <<<
oI N I T oO K o
(8) Press [OK] key and confirm that “OK !!” message is
displayed after calculating the data. The encoder ⇓
constant data will be input to the internal memory of Constant (D)
the tool.
Step :4/4
270°00’00”
Calculating...
oI N I T oO K o
4-21
(9) Press [OK] to return to main menu.

Constant (D)
Step :4/4
OK ! !
oI N I T oO K o
" If the screen as shown at right is displayed during the Constant (D)
axis rotation, the encoder unit faulty reading is
Step :3/4
described by the respective error code(s). 115°00’00”
E:623(623) 623(623)
Sample error code display: INIT _OK_
E:623(623) 623(623)
error codes used for evaluation by R&D Dept.
E:623(623) 623(623)
error code corresponding to the reading of H2 – right side detector
error code corresponding to the reading of H1 – left side detector
" When the reading is incorrect only at one side of the encoder, the other side reading is
represented by “000” error code displayed.
E:623(623) 623(623)
in instruments with single detector the same error code is displayed twice
" While performing “Constant” setting function, press {ESC} key at any stage to exit to the
main menu screen without calculation and input of the new constant data.
" If the correct constant data cannot be calculated,
Constant (D)
long beep sounds and the error code is displayed.
Step :4/4
E:616(616) 616(616)
INIT _OK_
4-22
4.3.6 DUST CONFIRMATION

The encoder slit pattern is checked for any misreading (for example caused by dust) in
reference to the internally memorized original encoder slit configuration.
" After adjustment of the encoder unit perform “Constant” function () section 4.3.5) in
advance (i.e. before proceeding to the “Slit check” function). If the encoder constant data
is not input to the memory, the error code may be displayed in “Slit check” screen.
Main menu
TEST BOX (D) Slit check (D)
F1: LED
F2: Detector
{F4}
F3: Constant 1 2 °34’56”
F4: Slit check
START
(1) Press {F4} key to select “Slit check” function.
(2) Press [START] key to start the test. Slit check (D)
(3) Slowly turn the vertical axis until “END !!” message is
shown in the lower part of the display. Press {ESC} 1 2 °34 ’56 ”
key to return to main menu screen.
START
" To complete all procedures the vertical axis can be
rotated either clockwise or counterclockwise. Any ⇓
position of the axis can be selected as the test starting Slit check (D)
point.
. 1 2 °34 ’56 ”
Start ! !
Slit check (D)

Warning : 000-000
1 2 °43 ’21 ”
Go ! !

CMOS sensor output signal, the test cannot be started Slit check (D)
Warning : 000-000
(or continued). Error message “Stop !!” is displayed.
Put the cover onto the encoder. If the error message is 1 2 °43’21”
Stop ! !
cleared, continue the test. If not, press {ESC} key
twice to exit to the main menu screen. Perform the test
from the beginning.
4-23
total number of misread slits total number of misread slits

of H1 detector at all positions, of H2 detector at all positions,
which have been checked which have been checked
until the current stage of test until the current stage of test Slit check (D)
(in CX-101/102/103 with (in CX-101/102/103 with Warning : 000-000
double detector) double detector) 1 2 °43’21”
Go ! !
Warning: 000 - 000

⇓
Slit check (D)
Warning: 000 Warning : 000-000
12°46’38”
total number of misread slits of H1 detector at all Check ! !
positions, which have been checked until the current
stage of test (in CX-105/107)
Slit pattern is checked at the specified encoder

positions, instant beep sounds and “Check” ⇓
message is temporary displayed
Slit check (D)

Warning : 000-000
1 2 °44 ’38”
Go ! !
…
If the errors have not been found (i.e. the error Slit check (D)
codes are not displayed), “END !!” message is Warning : 005-008
displayed when the test is complete 1 2 °44 ’33”
END !!
START
Slit check (D) " If during the test display shows message “Back !!” instead of
Warning : 000-000 “Go !!” and beep sounds continuously, turn the vertical axis
199°06’42” backwards (reverse to the originally selected direction), until
183°03’35”Back both displayed angles become close to each other. The short
beep sounds and display instantly shows “Check !!” and then
“Go !!” messages. Subsequently continue the test, turning the
vertical axis forward (in the originally selected direction).
4-24
Slit check (D)

" If the “Warning” counts are different than “000-000” (or
Warning : 005-008 “000”), but the error code(s) is not displayed at the bottom of
the screen, any measures (i.e. cleaning or adjustment of the
12°44’33”
Go ! ! encoder) are not necessary.
" If the “Warning” display is counted up successively when
the vertical axis is rotated, the dust is located on the CMOS
sensor, if the “Warning” display different than “000-000” (or
“000”) is shown at individual positions, the disk at the
specific locations is affected by dust.
Slit check (H:I,V:I) " If during the test display shows message “Stop !!”
Warning:001-002 (brightness level error) instead of “Go !!” and beep sounds
ZA E191 continuously, the CMOS sensor signal processing is in
Stop !! progress. Check the operating conditions. If any light is
H i V i coming from outside and influencing the CMOS sensor output
signal, put the cover onto the encoder and wait until “Stop !!”
message is cleared. Turn the vertical axis, until short beep
sounds and display shows “Check !!” or “Go !!” message.
Subsequently continue the test turning the axis. Confirm that
“Stop !!” message is not displayed at the same position of
encoder. If “Stop !!” message is displayed always in the
same location, clean the relevant disk area and confirm the
disk for any local glass defects.
Slit check (D)
" If the screen as shown at left is displayed, the problems of
Warning : 003-002 the encoder unit are determined by the respective error
code(s).
xxx°xx’xx”
ST1:000 ST2:626 ST1:xxx station 1 (H1 detector) reading error code
START ST2:xxx station 2 (H2 detector) reading error code
When the reading is incorrect only at one side of the encoder,
the other side reading is represented by “000” error code
displayed. In instruments with single detector the same error
code is displayed twice.
Depending on the error code displayed, clean the encoder
unit, adjust it or replace the respective parts () section 10.2).
(4) The test is considered to be completed successfully, if Slit check (D)

the “END !!” message is displayed after rotation of the Warning : 005-008
vertical axis all around. If the “Warning” counts are
1 2 °44’33”
different than 0 (i.e. some dust particles are detected), END !!
it is not necessary to take any measures. Only on the START
conditions that the error code(s) is displayed, the
further treatment (i.e. cleaning the encoder,
checking the connections, adjustment of the CMOS frame complete) is required.
" While performing the “Slit check” function, press {ESC} key at any stage to exit to initial
screen of “Slit check” function.
4-25
(5) Turn the Test Box OFF (press { } key and hold about 1 second to turn the Test Box
OFF) and disconnect the horizontal encoder flexible cable from the connector of the tool
cable.
4.4 STANDARD BASE TO BASE UNIT ASSEMBLING AND

INSPECTION
4.4.1 ASSEMBLING
(1) Carefully place the standard base on the base unit in a downward motion () Fig. 4-25
on the following page). Take care to align the respective holes of the standard base,
vertical axis and waterproof plate respectively.
(2) Fix the standard base to the base unit with the 3 vertical axis screws. Do not tighten the
screws.
(3) Fix the waterproof plate to the standard base using the 4 set screws with washers.
Tighten the screws, then slightly loosen them by 1/4 (quarter) of full rotation.
(4) Tighten the vertical axis screws.
(5) Attach the spring to the upper clamp () Fig. 4-24).
Apply the locking agent Three Bond 1401C to the
thread of the screw fixing the spring. Attach the
spring to the screw and tighten the screw to firmly fix
the hook of the spring to the standard base.
set the hooks of coil spring

as shown above
Fig. 4-24
4-26
(6) Relocate the standard base clamp and fine motion screw.
vertical cap
IF cover axis screw
DCPU
board display complete
(face left (F2))
(7) Install the display rear frame in face left (F1) and display units in face left and right.
Tighten the fixing screws with torque of 2 kgfcm (0.2 Nm). Apply the Three Bond
1401C to the heads of the display rear frame securing screws. TR cover
(8) Install the DCPU board and JX board.
(9) set side
Install the screwcovers: IF cover and cover A.
of waterproof plate
display rear
frame
JX
board
standard base clamp

display complete and fine motion screw
(face left (F1)) base unit
coil spring
Note: Base unit with combined

communications and
power source connector
is shown in this diagram
Fig. 4-25
4-27
" While installing the side covers tighten the fixing screws in order from c to h as shown
in Fig. 4-26.
IF cover
f TR cover
e
f e
h g
h g
d c d c
Fig. 4-26
" If the clamp knob of the standard base clamp & fine motion screw is adjusted, make a gap
of 120µm (1-speed fine motion screw of CX-103/CX-105/CX-107/Low Temperature
Models) and 250µm (2-speed fine motion screw of CX-101/CX-102) between the knob
and fine motion screw. Plate washers of old types of the Sokkia’s instruments (e.g.
SETB/C, SET5) can be used to adjust the proper gap.
fine motion screw 120µm (250µm) gap
standard base
clamp knob
unlock position of telescope clamp (set screw for

clamp knob is set at the lower side of clamp knob)
Fig, 4-27
4-28

Perform the following inspection and adjustment:
(1) Temperature aging () section 8.2) – this test is required only for the CX-101/CX-102, if
the disk adjustment has been carried out in advance.
(2) External appearance check and inspection with collimators () chapter 2).
(3) Input of horizontal angle parameters () section 3.1.2, step (23)) – all CXs except CX-103.
(4) Horizontal angle accuracy inspection () section 2.2.23) – this inspection is required
only for the CX-101/CX-102.
(5) EDM unit adjustment confirmation and inspection () chapter 8 and chapter 6).
5-1
5. VERTICAL ENCODER (HORIZONTAL AXIS) UNIT

5.1 DISASSEMBLING
5.1.1 HORIZONTAL AXIS AND TELESCOPE FROM STANDARD

BASE
(1) Unscrew the handle screws and detach the handle from the standard base.
Caution! To remove the handle, hold both sides of the handle and lift it straight above. If you
hold the handle by one hand or incline it, the terminal attached on the handle equipped
with antenna may be damaged.
telescope
upper cover
telescope
lower cover
Fig. 5-1
Fig. 5-2
(2) Unscrew the 4 screws fixing the telescope upper cover and 4 screws fixing the guide
light cover and remove both covers (together with sealing).
5-2
(3) Remove the ECPU board () section 7.1.1).

(4) Using hexagonal wrench 0.89mm loosen the CAL fiber head fixing screw in the PX base
and remove the CAL fiber head from the PX base. Remove the 2 fixing screws with
washers and remove the PX base together with the PX board from the telescope frame
() section 7.2.1).
ECPU board
CAL fiber head
PX base
Fig. 5-3
(5) Remove the 2 screws fixing the guide light base and remove the base along with guide
light () section 7.4.1).
guide light
with base
Fig. 5-4
5-3
(6) Unscrew the 2 screws fixing the TX board and remove the TX board () section 7.5.1).
(7) Unscrew the 2 screws fixing the solenoid complete and remove the solenoid unit ()
section 7.6.1).
TX board
solenoid complete
Fig. 5-5
(8) Unscrew the 2 screws securing the dichroic prism and remove the dichroic prism ()
section 7.3.1).
dichroic
prism
Fig. 5-6
(9) Remove the IF cover () section 3.1.1) and TR cover () section 3.2.1).
5-4
(10) Remove the cable of the vertical contact ring

brush from the CN13 connector on the JX
board. CN13
(11) Unscrew the 2 screws and remove the brush

of the vertical contact ring unit.
(12) Unscrew the 3 screws fixing the vertical
contact ring board and remove the vertical JX board V contact ring
contact ring board together with the FC4 brush cable
flexible cable.
Fig. 5-7
(13) Loosen or remove the set screw and remove
the telescope clamp and fine motion screw.
clamp
retaining plate telescope
clamp
V contact ring board
with FC4 flexible
cable
coil spring
set screw telescope
telescope clamp and
clamp retainer
fine motion screw
brush of V contact ring unit
Fig. 5-8
5-5
(14) Remove the hook of the coil spring from the screw installed in the standard base. To
detach the spring loosen (or remove) the screw. The locking agent Three Bond 1401C is
applied to the screw thread to hold the screw in place. If much glue remains on the screw
thread, clean the thread of the original screw with alcohol (or acetone) to dissolve the
glue applied previously. Later during assembling procedures apply the locking agent
Three Bond 1401C to the thread of the screw before installing the screw in the standard
base.
(15) Remove the 3 fixing screws and remove the telescope clamp retainer with the telescope
clamp and clamp retaining plate.
(16) Disconnect the FC-1 flexible cable of the vertical encoder from the CN1 connector on
the DCPU.
(17) Rotate the telescope until the hexagonal socket
head screws (3 pcs) can be seen through the horizontal axis fixing screws
holes in the disk base V and unscrew these
inner fixing screws taking care of the washers
() Fig. 5-9).
" Do not unscrew the 3 cross-recessed screws,
which fix the CMOS frame base V inside the
encoder unit.
Fig. 5-9
(18) Remove the 4 hexagonal socket head screws securing the telescope frame to the
horizontal axis () Fig. 5-10 and 5-11 c).
(19) Holding the telescope, pull out the horizontal axis along with the vertical encoder after
pressing the horizontal axis on the opposite side () Fig. 5-10 and 5-11 d).
5-6
horizontal axis / telescope frame securing screw

c
CX-101/CX-102/CX-103/
Low Temperature Models
Fig. 5-10

c
CX-105/CX-107
Fig. 5-11
5-7
" When the standard base is replaced, clean up the pillars of the standard base in the areas
shown in Fig. 5-12 using mixture of alcohol and ether. After that attach firmly the V ring
sticker A and sticker B to the standard base.
V ring sticker B
sticker A
standard
base
clean up with standard
alcohol and ether clean up with base
alcohol and ether
Fig. 5-12
5.1.2 CMOS FRAME COMPLETE V

There are 2 types of the CMOS frame complete V depending on the instrument type:
CX-101/CX-102/CX-103/Low Temperature Models: double detector unit
CX-105/CX-107: single detector unit
(1) Unscrew the 4 screws (double detector unit) or 2 screws (single detector unit) securing
the CMOS frame complete V. Then remove the CMOS frame complete (together with
the flexible cable).
" The fixing screws for the CMOS frame(s) are secured by the locking agent. Before
disassembling apply alcohol to remove glue.
" Clean the CMOS (remove dust) with a soft brush or soft cloth. It can be used also soft
lens tissue lightly moistened with a mixture of alcohol and ether.
5-8
CX-101/CX-102/CX-103/
CMOS frame
complete V CX-105/CX-107
CMOS frame
complete V
Fig. 5-13
" There are 2 types of the horizontal axis depending on the instrument type.
5.2 HORIZONTAL AXIS UNIT ASSEMBLING
5.2.1 ASSEMBLING FLOW CHART

Refer to the flow chart below to perform the horizontal axis unit assembling.
START
Installation of CMOS frame complete V
END
5-9
5.2.2 INSTALLING THE CMOS FRAME COMPLETE V

(1) Reinstall the CMOS frame complete V.
Caution! Assemble the unit as shown in Fig. 5-14 taking care of position of the V1/V2 detectors
referring to the CMOS frame base V and metal L.
CX-101/CX-102/CX-103/Low Temperature Models

V1 CX-105/CX-107
CMOS frame
complete V
V2
V2
cable terminal
cable terminal
CMOS frame
1 of holes for complete V
screws fixing
metal L to line connecting 2 holes
standard base for screws fixing metal L
is facing to standard base is
V1 frame parallel to V2 frame
CMOS frame
metal L metal L base V
Fig. 5-14
" The CMOS frame complete V as a service spare part is supplied with the protective seal
attached to CMOS sensor(s). Remove the seal in advance before installation of the
CMOS frame.
(2) Pull both V1 and V2 CMOS frames (double detector unit) or V2 frame (single detector
unit) outward (in A-A directions as shown in Fig. 5-15) and tighten the 2 pairs of the
fixing screws (double detector) or a pair of fixing screws (single detector).
5-10
CX-105/CX-107
CX-101/CX-102/
CX-103/Low
Temperature
Models
Fig. 5-15
(3) After careful cleaning of the disk install the horizontal axis in the standard base (proceed
to section 5.4.1 directly) or perform optional inspection according to section 5.3.
" Optionally for installation of the CMOS frame the following tools can be used:
• DT5 vertical disk centering tool
• Series 30R vertical disk centering tool adapter (this adapter is not necessary, if the
DT5 vertical disk centering tool is modified as shown in Appendix X.3)
• SET500 vertical disk centering tool adapter
Refer to Fig. 5-16 and 5-17 for details of installation of the CMOS frame.
CX-101/CX-102/CX-103/ V1
CMOS frame
complete V
V2
Fig. 5-16
5-11
V2
CMOS frame
complete V
CX-105/CX-107
Fig. 5-17
5.3 ENCODER SIGNAL INSPECTION AND ADJUSTMENT

(OPTION)
The procedures stated in this section can be performed, if the service workshop is equipped with the
optional tool: Absolute Encoder Test Box. If this tool is not available, make sure that the cleaning of
the encoder CMOS sensor(s) and disk is carefully done in advance and reassemble the instrument
straight away. Clean the disk and CMOS sensor(s) using mixture of alcohol and ether.
5.3.1 INSPECTION AND ADJUSTMENT FLOW CHART

Refer to the flow chart below to perform the encoder inspection and adjustment.
START
LED check
Detector check
use
Absolute Encoder
Test Box
V encoder constant data input
V encoder slit pattern check – “Slit check” function
END
5-12
5.3.2 PREPARATION
Prepare the following tools and equipment to complete the inspection:
• Absolute encoder Test Box with ext. power supply & communication cable tool
• Regulated DC power supply DC 7.2V ∼ 8.0V (1.5A)
• Base for horizontal axis
(1) Place the horizontal axis on the tool base.

(2) Connect the Test Box tool to the vertical encoder flexible
cable () Fig. 5-19 below).
(3) Connect the Test Box tool to the regulated power supply
(DC 7.2V ∼ 8.0V) using the external power supply cable.
(4) Turn the external power supply and Test Box ON. Carry base for horizontal axis
out the encoder inspection using the respective service
functions. Fig. 5-18
" Service functions described in this section are available when firmware ver. 1.00 is
installed in the Test Box (as of February 2012).
to regulated DC power supply

DC 7.2V ~ 8.0V
V2
(V1)
base for
horizontal axis
Absolute Encoder Test Box
Fig. 5-19
" Optionally the following tools can be used as a holder for the horizontal axis:
• DT5 vertical disk centering tool
• Series 30R vertical disk centering tool adapter (this adapter is not necessary, if the
DT5 vertical disk centering tool is modified as shown in Appendix X.3)
• SET500 vertical disk centering tool adapter
5-13
CX-101/CX-102/CX-103/Low Temperature Models CX-105/CX-107
V1
CMOS frame
complete V
CMOS frame
complete V V2 V2
connect to connect to
absolute encoder absolute encoder
Test Box Test Box
Fig. 5-20
To carry out the inspection and adjustment, first of all select detector type: single or double by
pressing [ST=1] or [ST=2] key of the Test Box. The following service functions are available
through the keyboard operation.
LED (S)
Press {ON} to turn the power ON {F1}
Position : 0
to enter Service mode Level : 339
Step : 1
⇓ POS STEP ON_
TEST BOX 1.00
Detector : Single Detector (S)
Type : LED pos. :0
ES,OS,PS {F2}
CX,FX,SX
ST=1 ST=2 _OKo
LED ALL CHK_
(1)
[OK] ⇓ ⇑ {ESC}
}
TEST BOX (S) Constant (S)
F1: LED {ESC} {F3}
F2: Detector
F3: Constant ST = 1
F4: Slit check OK_
Slit check (S)

(1)
Press [ST=1] key for single detector of {F4}
0˚00’00”
CX-105/CX-107 (“Detector: Single”)
or [ST=2] key for double detector of START
CX-101/CX-102/CX-103 (“Detector:
Dual”)
Although the double detector is installed in the CX-105/CX-107 Low Temperature Models,
this detector is recognized by the instrument as a single detector, therefore in this case press
[ST=1] key for inspection of the encoder.
5-14
5.3.3 LED CHECK

The flashing LED(s) can be observed visually to confirm the LED(s) operation.
screen for double encoder
Main menu
TEST BOX (D) LED ( D )
F1: LED
F2: Detector
{F1} Position : 0
Level : 339
F3: Constant Step : 1
F4: Slit check
POS_ STEP ON_
(1) Press {F1} key of the tool keyboard to select LED check function.
(2) Press [ON] key and observe visually the encoder LEDs. Confirm that the red visible
light of LED is emitted. Check each of the 3 LEDs: V1 and V2 side for the double
detector of the CX-101/CX-102/CX-103 or V1 side only for the single detector of the
CX-105/CX-107. To switch between LEDs press [POS] key. “Position: 0” stands for the
center LED, “Position: “1” – right side LED, “Position “2” – left side LED.
" If the LED(s) is not lit, confirm the connections between the tool and encoder and, if
necessary replace the defective CMOS frame complete (with LEDs and flexible cable).
[POS] press to select the LED (center, left or right

LED ( D )
side)
[Step] while changing the LED intensity Position : 0
Level : 339
determined by “Level”, the minimum Step : 1
changeable value (one step) can be switched POS_ STEP ON_
between 1* / 10 /100
[ON] press to turn the LED ON
[OFF] press to turn the LED OFF
Level LED brightness level setting within range of 0~2047 (339*). To increase the
LED brightness press { S } key, to decrease the LED brightness press { T }
key. The minimum “Level” count change is determined by “Step” setting.
* default setting
(3) Press {ESC} key to exit to the main menu screen.
5-15
5.3.4 DETECTOR CHECK

The light adjustment function of the detector unit: LED / CMOS sensor can be confirmed.
Main menu {F2} Press {ALL}, after a few seconds test is completed
TEST BOX (D) Detector (D) Detector (D)

F1: LED LED pos. :0 LED pos. :0
F2: Detector POS . : 0 = OK
POS . : 1 = OK
F3: Constant POS . : 2 = OK
F4: Slit check POS ALL CHK_ POS ALL CHK
" If necessary, during inspection use any box (e.g. cardboard box) or darkening curtain to
prevent any light coming from outside into the encoder unit.
(1) Press {F2} to select Detector check function.
(2) Press [ALL] key. The proper automatic adjustment of the signal level(s) of CMOS
sensor(s) and LED intensity (PWM) will be confirmed. Make sure that “OK” messages
are displayed for all 3 inspected positions.
press {ALL} key:
“Detector” confirmation screen POS: 0, 1, 2 sig. adj. screens Result of test
Detector (D) Detector (D) Detector (D)

LED pos. :0 LED pos. :0 LED pos. :0
⇒ POS.:0 POS . : 0 = OK
Checking all pos. PWM:0298,0315 ⇒ POS . : 1 = OK
DAC :0320,0294 POS . : 2 = OK
POS ALL CHK_ POS ALL CHK_ POS ALL CHK_
If the LED/CMOS sensor emitted/detected light adjustment is abnormal, “NG” message

is displayed at the erroneous position.
Example of faulty result: Detector (D)
abnormally low or high duty cycle (PWM) LED POS. :1
POS.:0
and (or) DAC (digital to analogue PWM:0000,2047
converter) CMOS signal level data DAC :0500,1023
POS ALL CHK_
Signal not received (check connections
Detector (D)
between the test box tool and encoder LED pos. :0
０
cable) POS . : 0 = Timeout
POS . : 1 = Timeout
POS . : 2 = Timeout
POS ALL CHK_
" The encoder test can be performed at individual
Detector (D)
positions as well. Press [POS] key to select the LED pos. :1
respective “POS” and [CHK] key to carry out the test. NG_
PWM:0000,2047
DAC :0500,1023
POS ALL CHK_
5-16
Detector (D) Detector (S)

LED pos. :0 LED pos. :0
POS.:0 POS.:0
PWM:0298,0315 double PWM:0298 single
DAC :0320,0294 detector DAC :0320 detector
POS ALL CHK_ POS ALL CHK_
V1 data V2 data V2 data
If “NG” message is displayed check as follows:

(a) Confirm that light from outside does not penetrate the encoder unit.
(b) Confirm the connection between tool and encoder.
If (a) and (b) are OK, reconfirm light emission of LED () section 5.3.3), readjust
position of the CMOS frame and if necessary, change the CMOS frame complete (with
LEDs and flexible cable).
(3) Press {ESC} to exit to the main menu screen.
5.3.5 V ENCODER CONSTANT INPUT

The initially unsettled or updated constant data of the vertical encoder is mathematically
calculated and input to the internal memory of the tool CPU board.
unit.
Main menu
TEST BOX (D) Constant (D)
F1: LED
F2: Detector {F3}
F3: Constant
F4: Slit check ST = 2
OK_
(1) Press {F3} key to select “Constant” function.
Constant (D)
(2) Press [OK] to memorize the initial encoder data.
Step :1/4
The short beep sounds and the vertical angle display is 162°00’00”
automatically reset (the displayed angle becomes >>> <<<
0°00’00”). The unit is ready for the 2nd position data oINIT oOKo
reading.
⇓
" Any position of the axis can be selected as the starting
Constant (D)
point.
Step :2/4
0°00’00”
oINIT oOKo
5-17

Constant (D)
CMOS sensor output signal, the error code or “ERR:
CCD Adjust.” message is displayed. Put the cover onto Step :2/4
ERR: CCD Adjust.
the encoder and press [INIT] key to instantly restore
the normal conditions for the encoder operation. oINIT oOKo
If [INIT] key is not pressed, it will take a several
seconds to recover normal operation of the encoder.
(3) Turn the horizontal axis 90° ± 8° referring to the Constant (D)
displayed angle.
Step :2/4
" The correct angular setting (within 90° ± 8°) is indicated 90°00’00”
by “>>> <<<” mark shown at the lower part of the >>> <<<
oI N I T oO K o
display.
" To complete all procedures encoder can be rotated either ⇓
clockwise or counterclockwise. Constant (D)
Step :3/4
90°00’00”
oI N I T oO K o
(4) Press [OK] to memorize the encoder data.

The short beep sounds and the unit is ready for the 3rd Constant (D)
position data reading. Step :3/4
180°00’00”
(5) Turn the axis 90° (within 180 ± 8° from the initial >>> <<<
setting) referring to the displayed angle. oI N I T oO K o
" The correct angle setting is indicated by “>>> <<<” ⇓

mark shown at the lower part of the display. Constant (D)
(6) Press [OK] to memorize the encoder data. Step :4/4

180°00’00”
The short beep sounds and the unit is ready for the 4th
position data reading. oI N I T oO K o
(7) Turn the axis 90° (within 270 ± 8° from the initial
Constant (D)
setting) referring to the displayed angle.
" The correct angle setting is indicated by “>>> <<<” Step :4/4
270°00’00”
mark shown at the lower part of the display. >>> <<<
oI N I T oO K o
(8) Press [OK] key and confirm that “OK !!” message is
displayed after calculating the data. The encoder ⇓
constant data will be input to the internal memory of Constant (D)
the tool.
Step :4/4
270°00’00”
Calculating...
oI N I T oO K o
5-18
(9) Press [OK] to return to main menu.

Constant (D)
Step :4/4
OK ! !
oI N I T oO K o
" If the screen as shown at right is displayed during the Constant (D)
axis rotation, the encoder unit faulty reading is
Step :3/4
described by the respective error code(s). 115°00’00”
E:623(623) 623(623)
Sample error code display: INIT _OK_
E:623(623) 623(623)
E:623(623) 623(623)
error code corresponding to the reading of V2 – right side detector
error code corresponding to the reading of V1 – left side detector
E:623(623) 623(623)
" While performing “Constant” setting function, press {ESC} key at any stage to exit to the
main menu screen without calculation and input of the new constant data.
" If the correct constant data cannot be calculated,
Constant (D)
long beep sounds and the error code is displayed.
Step :4/4
E:616(616) 616(616)
INIT _O K _
5-19
5.3.6 DUST CONFIRMATION

" After adjustment of the encoder unit perform “Constant” function () section 5.3.5) in
advance (i.e. before proceeding to the “Slit check” function). If the encoder constant data
is not input to the memory, the error code may be displayed in “Slit check” screen.
Main menu
TEST BOX (D) Slit check (D)
F1: LED
F2: Detector
{F4}
F3: Constant 1 2 °34’56 ”
F4: Slit check
START
(1) Press {F4} key to select “Slit check” function.
(2) Press [START] key to start the test. Slit check (D)
(3) Slowly turn the horizontal axis until “END !!”
message is shown in the lower part of the display. 1 2 °34’56”
Press {ESC} to return to main menu screen.
START
" To complete all procedures the horizontal axis can be
rotated either clockwise or counterclockwise. Any ⇓
position of the axis can be selected as the test starting Slit check (D)
point.
. 1 2 °34’56”
Start ! !
Slit check (D)

Warning : 000-000
1 2 °43’21”
Go ! !

CMOS sensor output signal, the test cannot be started Slit check (D)
Warning : 000-000
(or continued). Error message “Stop !!” is displayed.
Put the cover onto the encoder. If the error message is 1 2 °43’21”
Stop ! !
cleared, continue the test. If not, press {ESC} key
twice to exit to the main menu screen. Perform the test
from the beginning.
5-20

of V1 detector at all positions, of V2 detector at all positions,
which have been checked which have been checked
until the current stage of test until the current stage of test Slit check (D)
(in CX-101/102/103 with (in CX-101/102/103 with Warning : 000-000
double detector) double detector) 1 2 °43 ’21 ”
Go ! !
Warning: 000 - 000

⇓
Slit check (D)
Warning: 000 Warning : 000-000
12°46’38”
total number of misread slits of V1 detector at all Check ! !
positions, which have been checked until the current
stage of test (in CX-105/107)

Slit check (D)

Warning : 000-000
1 2 °44’38”
Go ! ! …
If the errors have not been found (i.e. the error Slit check (D)
codes are not displayed), “END !!” message is Warning : 005-008
displayed when the test is complete 1 2 °44’33”
END !!
START
Slit check (D) " If during the test display shows message “Back !!” instead of
Warning : 000-000 “Go !!” and beep sounds continuously, turn the horizontal
199°06’42” axis backwards (reverse to the originally selected direction),
183°03’35”Back until both displayed angles become close to each other. The
short beep sounds and display instantly shows “Check !!”
and then “Go !!” messages. Subsequently continue the test,
turning the horizontal axis forward (in the originally selected
direction).
5-21
Slit check (D)

Warning : 005-008 “000”), but the error code(s) is not displayed at the bottom of
the screen, any measures (i.e. cleaning or adjustment of the
12°44’33”
Go ! ! encoder) are not necessary.
" If the “Warning” display is counted up successively when
the horizontal axis is rotated, the dust is located on the
CMOS sensor, if the “Warning” display different than “000-
000” (or “000”) is shown at individual positions, the disk at
the specific locations is affected by dust.
ZA E191 continuously, the CMOS sensor signal processing is in
Stop !! progress. Check the operating conditions. If any light is
H i V i coming from outside and influencing the CMOS sensor output
signal, put the cover onto the encoder and wait until “Stop !!”
message is cleared. Turn the horizontal axis, until short beep
sounds and display shows “Check !!” or “Go !!” message.
Subsequently continue the test turning the axis. Confirm that
“Stop !!” message is not displayed at the same position of
encoder. If “Stop !!” message is displayed always in the
same location, clean the relevant disk area and confirm the
disk for any local glass defects.
Slit check (D)
" If the screen as shown at left is displayed, the problems of
Warning : 003-002 the encoder unit are determined by the respective error
code(s).
127°45’22”
ST1:000 ST2:626 ST1:xxx station 1 (V1 detector) reading error code
START ST2:xxx station 2 (V2 detector) reading error code
When the reading is incorrect only at one side of the encoder,
the other side reading is represented by “000” error code
displayed. In the instruments with single detector the same
error code is displayed twice.
Depending on the error code displayed, clean the encoder
unit, adjust it or replace the respective parts () section 10.2).
(4) The test is considered to be completed successfully, if Slit check (D)

the “END !!” message is displayed after rotation of the Warning : 005-008
horizontal axis all around. If the “Warning” counts are
1 2 °44’33 ”
different than 0 (i.e. some dust particles are detected), END !!
it is not necessary to take any measures. Only on the START
conditions that the error code(s) is displayed, the
further treatment (i.e. cleaning the encoder,
checking the connections, adjustment of the CMOS frame complete) is required.
" While performing the “Slit check” function, press {ESC} key at any stage to exit to initial
5-22
(5) Turn the Test Box OFF (press { } key and hold about 1 second to turn the Test Box
OFF) and disconnect the vertical encoder flexible cable from the connector of the tool
cable.
5.4 HORIZONTAL AXIS TO STANDARD BASE ASSEMBLING

AND INSPECTION
5.4.1 ASSEMBLING
(1) Holding the telescope install the horizontal axis in the standard base. While pressing the
telescope towards the encoder side, align the respective holes of the axis and telescope
frame and firmly fix the telescope frame to the axis using 4 fixing screws (hexagonal
socket head screws).

d
CX-101/CX-102/CX-103/
Fig. 5-21
5-23

d
CX-105/CX-107
Fig. 5-22
" When installing the axis press the telescope in the direction of the encoder unit and slightly
turn the telescope, so that the fixing screws are placed in the center of the holes in the
telescope frame in front to back direction. Then tighten the screws.
telescope frame
horizontal clearance between fixing

axis screw and hole in telescope
frame is the same in front to
back direction
Fig. 5-23
5-24
(2) Secure the horizontal axis unit in the standard

base using the 3 horizontal axis fixing screws horizontal axis fixing screws
(hexagonal socket head screws with washers).
Fig. 5-24
" If the encoder unit has not been checked in advance by the optional absolute encoder test
box, it is recommended to perform the initial inspection using Service mode () section
2.2.8) before performing the further assembly procedures () steps (3)∼(10) below). If
necessary, preadjust the horizontal axis bushing R for smooth rotation of the horizontal
axis.
(3) Reinstall the dichroic prism in the telescope frame. Push the prism against the contact
surface in the telescope frame without any tilt (in the direction of the objective lens) and
tighten the 2 fixing screws.
fixing
install the dichroic prism pushing it dichroic prism screws
against the reference surface in the
telescope frame in the direction of
objective lens
Fig. 5-25
(4) Reinstall the telescope clamp retaining plate, telescope clamp, clamp retainer and
vertical contact ring.
5-25
(5) Install the coil spring. While one of the spring hooks is attached to the telescope clamp,
rotate the other hook by approx. 90° in the proper direction, so that the tension of the
spring becomes stronger comparing to the original setting with both hooks in the same
plane. Attach the hook of the spring to the standard base using the fixing screw. Before
installing the screw in the standard base apply the locking agent Three Bond 1401C to
the thread of the screw. Do not apply too much glue; it may flow outside to the tube of
the telescope fine motion screw. Tighten the screw to firmly fix the spring to the standard
base.
Fig. 5-26
(6) Relocate the telescope clamp and fine motion screw.
clamp
retaining plate telescope
clamp
V contact ring board
with FC4 flexible
cable
coil spring
set screw telescope
telescope clamp and
clamp retainer
fine motion screw
brush of V contact ring unit
Fig. 5-27
(7) Reinstall the PX unit () section 7.2.1) and ECPU board () section 7.1.1).
(8) Reinstall the solenoid complete () section 7.6.1) and TX board () section 7.5.1)
5-26
(9) Reinstall all cables and confirm that all connectors are properly locked.
(10) Adjust the horizontality of horizontal axis () section 2.2.18).
" While installing the side covers tighten the fixing screws in order from c to h as shown
in Fig. 5-28.
IF cover
f TR cover
e
f e
h g
h g
d c d c
Fig. 5-28
" If the clamp knob of the telescope clamp & fine motion screw is adjusted, make a gap of
120µm (1-speed fine motion screw of CX-103/CX-105/CX-107/Low Temperature Models)
and 250µm (2-speed fine motion screw of CX-101/CX-102) between the knob and fine
motion screw. Plate washers of old types of the Sokkia’s instruments (e.g. SETB/C, SET5)
can be used to adjust the proper gap.
fine motion screw 120µm (250µm) gap
telescope
clamp knob
unlock position of telescope clamp (set screw for

clamp knob is set at the lower side of clamp knob)
Fig, 5-29
5-27

Proceed with the following inspection and adjustment:
(1) Temperature aging (() section 8.2) – this test is required only if the standard base or
telescope frame is replaced).
(2) Input of vertical angle parameters by IACS function () section 9.2.3 step (6)) (except
CX-103).
(3) External appearance check and inspection with collimators () chapter 2).
(4) EDM adjustment () chapter 8) and inspection of the baseline data () chapter 6).
5-28
6-1
6. INSPECTION OF DISTANCE DATA WITH BASELINE

Check the EDM part of the CX instrument using baseline to confirm its proper adjustment or for
troubleshooting.
6.1 SUMMARY OF INSPECTION WITH BASELINE
INSPECTIONS SPECIFICATIONS PROCEDURE

1. Return signal Return signal within limiter Sight a prism and check the return signal
check range using instrument “Aiming” mode display
2. Minimum focus Target sharply focused at Sight any target at 1.3m distance and
check minimum distance of 1.3m check the focus
3. Coincidence test When the displayed counts Sight a prism and then reflectorless
different than 0 or 1, target. Perform the coincidence test
coincidence error
4. Mispointing error ±4mm at 10m dist. and 4’ Sight the prism center at 10m distance and
check out of the prism center 4’ out of prism center in 4 directions, and
(upward, downward, left and compare the averages of 5 measurements.
right)
(±1mm at 50m dist. and 1’ Sight the prism center at 50m distance
out of the prism center and 1’ out of prism center in 4 directions,
(upward, downward, left and and compare the averages of 5
right)* measurements (*)
±1.4mm at 50m dist. and 1’ Sight the prism center at 50m distance
out of the prism center and 1’ out of prism center in 4 directions,
(upper-left, upper-right, and compare the averages of 5
lower-left and lower-right)* measurements (*)
5. Cyclic error check ≤ 3mm (p-p) Sight a prism at 10.5 and then 11.5m
distance. Compare the error for averages
of 10 measurements
6. Mechanical ±(2 + 2ppm x D)mm – fine Carry out the series of baseline
constant setting measurement using prism measurements for short, middle and long
and total check ±(3 + 2ppm x D)mm – fine range
measurement using
reflective sheet target
±(3 + 2ppm x D)mm – fine
measurement using white
side of gray card
( * ) Specification for the instruments manufactured for Chinese market

6-2
6.2 INSPECTION WITH BASELINE - PROCEDURES
6.2.1 RETURN SIGNAL CHECK

While measuring the distance, it is useful to check the return signal, whether it is adequate for
measurement.
(1) Allocate the [S-LEV] soft key to OBS mode screen. Aiming
(2) Sight prism at a distance of approx. 10m.
(3) Press [S-LEV].
The intensity of the light of the returned signal is MEAS BEEP
displayed by a gauge.
The more displayed, the greater the quantity
of the reflected light. If “*” is displayed, the return signal is within the limiter range and
the distance measurement is possible.
When “*” is not displayed, accurately resight the target. If “*” is still not displayed,
confirm optical alignment and adjustment of EDM unit () chapter 8).
6.2.2 MINIMUM FOCUS CONFIRMATION

Sight any target at 1.3m. Turn the focusing ring to check if the target is sharply focused.
6.2.3 COINCIDENCE TEST

The coincidence counts based on the distance measured by the EDM signals modulated with
several different frequencies and offset calculated by the internally memorized coincidence
constant CC: CC21, CC31, CC12, CC22 and CC32 can be checked to confirm the correct
coincidence constant setting and correct distance data calculation.
(1) Turn the instrument ON to enter Service mode.
(2) Sight the prism at a distance of approximately 10m.
(3) In Main menu of Service mode, select “EDM”, then Counter *
“Counter” and “Matching PF” service function.
Matching PF
( ––––– )
ENT to start CHG
(4) Press {ENT} key to start measurement. Confirm that

Counter *
all coincidence counts are 0 or 1.
Matching PF
( 00000 )
ENT to start CHG

6-3
(5) Press {ENT} key to stop measurements. Sight any white surface (Kodak gray card can
be used) and press {CHG} key to select reflectorless fine (NF) mode for inspection.
(6) Press {ENT} key to start measurement. Confirm that
all coincidence counts are 0 or 1. Counter *
Matching NF
(7) Press {CHG} key to select reflectorless tracking (NT) ( 010 )
mode for inspection. Make sure that all coincidence
counts are 0 or 1. ENT to start CHG
Counter *
(8) Press {ESC} key to return to “EDM” mode submenu.
Matching NT
" The coincidence constant : CC21, CC31, CC12, CC22 ( 010 )
and CC32 can be automatically calculated and input to ENT to start CHG
the internal memory, while using EDM adjustment
program “1131edm-adj_E.xls” () section 8.16
“Coincidence Constant Setting”) or by Service mode: “EDM” Æ “Constant” (to measure
and update the CC constant press [MEAS] button in the “Constant” screen showing the
CC constant () section 9.2.2 step (1)).
6.2.4 MISPOINTING ERROR CHECK

(1) Select service function “Fine” in “Counter” submenu of “EDM” service mode.
(2) Sight the center of the prism at 10m ± 0.5m (*50m ± 0.5m).
(3) Press {ENT} and take the average of 5 measurements. Counter *
(4) Stop measurement and sight 4’ (*1’) out of the prism Fine P
center to the right side. ( 10.1234m)
" If necessary, use service function “Running test” in

“Test” mode to observe the “HA-R” angle display and
change the horizontal angle by 4’ (*1’).
(5) Using EDM service function “Fine”, take the average of 5 measurements. Repeat the
same procedure sighting out of the prism center 4’ (*1’) to the left side, upward and
downward. The difference between data taken in steps (3) and (5) should be within
±4mm (40 counts) (*±1mm (10 counts)).
" If necessary, use service function “Running test” in “Test” mode to observe the “HA-
R” and “ZA” display and change the horizontal angle and next vertical angle by 4’ (*1’).
" Using EDM service function “Fine”, take the average of 5 measurements. Repeat the same
procedure sighting out of the prism center *1’ in the upper-right direction (i.e. 1’ to the
right side and 1’ upward, lower-right, upper-left and lower-left). The difference between
data taken in step (3) and this step should be within * ±1.4mm (14 counts).
Sight out of the prism center *2’ upward, downward and in left and right direction. Using
EDM service function “Fine” confirm that the instrument is able to measure the distance.
(*) - specification for Chinese market.
6-4
6.2.5 CYCLIC ERROR CHECK

(1) Sight the prism at a distance of 10.5m and then at 11.5m. Using service function “Fine”
of “EDM” service mode, take the average of 10 measurements.
(2) Calculate the data according to the formula given below and confirm, whether the error
is within tolerance of 3mm(p-p).
∆X(mm) = [(10.5 - Am ) - (11.5 - Bm )] x 103
∆X(mm) - cyclic error (in millimeters)
Am - distance data at 10.5 (in meters)
Bm - distance data at 11.5m (in meters)
6.2.6 MECHANICAL CONSTANT SETTING AND TOTAL CHECK

Accuracy of the instrument can be confirmed using baseline. The inspection results should be
within specifications.
" The standards stated in the table below are specified for fine measurement mode:
REFLECTOR TYPE ACCURACY
prism ±(2 + 2ppm x D)mm
reflective sheet target ±(3 + 2ppm x D)mm
reflectorless ±(3 +2ppm x D)mm (0.3∼200m)
(Kodak gray card ±(5 + 10ppm x D)mm (over 200∼350m)
white side) ±(10 + 10ppm x D)mm (over 350∼500m)
D: measured distance (mm)
(1) Turn the CX ON to enter User mode and level the OBS PC -30
instrument. ppm 0
SD
(2) Carry out the series of baseline measurements. Sight ZA 91°22’33” ⊥+
the prism AP01AR. HA-R 123°11’05” P1
" The inspection must be carried out under the following
conditions: OBS PC -30
ppm 0
(a) Check the distance data with at least 5 targets SD 10.123m
(prism) set up within distance range 1.3m∼100m. ZA 91°22’33” ⊥+
HA-R 123°11’05”
(b) Set the target type, atmospheric correction and prism S TO P
constant properly ( mark will be displayed for the
prism mode).
(c) Sight the center of the prism.
(d) The prism(s) especially at short distances up to 10m must be set up without inclination
(i.e. there must be right angle between the prism face and CX laser beam).
6-5
(e) Take the average of 10 measurements at each distance (hint: instead of calculating
average data of 10 measurements in “Fine Repeat” mode, distance measurement mode
“FineAVG” and selection of 9 measurements can be applied).
(f) The baseline data must be reliable.
(3) Compare the average of 10 measurements with the nominal distances.
(4) If the distance data is out of the tolerance, try to correct it by altering the mechanical
constant MC0. Input the new MC0 to the internal memory using Service mode: service
function “Constant” in “EDM” service mode () section 9.2.2 step (1)).
D = Dw/out corr. –MC0 D: displayed distance data

Dw/out corr: distance without MC0 correction
" Add 4∼5mm to the original value of the mechanical constant MC0 in case the result
appears as line 1 .
In case of line 2 , no further correction is required.
In case of line 3 , the distance error cannot be removed by changing the mechanical
constant. It is necessary to check the EDM unit adjustment (optical alignment, electrical
adjustment and confirmation of EDM unit parts).
1
2mm
Difference
2
3 Distance
-2mm
(5) Carry out the series of baseline measurements while the reflective sheet RS10N-K is
used as a target (RS50N-K or RS90N-K can be used as well).
" The inspection must proceed under the following conditions:
(a) Check the distance data with at least 5 targets set up within distance range
1.3m∼100m.
(b) Set the target type, atmospheric correction and prism constant properly ( mark will
be displayed for the reflective sheet mode).
(c) Sight the center of the target.
(d) Take the average of 10 measurements at each distance (hint: instead of calculating
“FineAVG” and selection of 9 measurements can be applied).
6-6
(e) The baseline data must be reliable.

" If possible, confirm the maximum range of distance measurement. Sight the reflective
sheet target RS90N-K at a distance of approx. 500m and check that the instrument is
able to measure the distance.
(8) Carry out the series of baseline measurements, while the Kodak gray card (white side) is
used as a target.
" The inspection must proceed under the following conditions:
(a) Check the distance data with at least 5 targets set up within distance range 1m∼100m.
(b) Set the target type and atmospheric correction properly ( mark will be displayed for
the reflectorless mode).
(c) Sight the center of the target.
(d) Take the average of 10 measurements at each distance (hint: instead of calculating
“Fine AVG” and selection of 9 measurements can be applied).
(e) The baseline data must be reliable.
" If possible, confirm the maximum range of distance measurement. Sight the Kodak gray
card – white side at a distance of approx. 500m and check that the instrument is able to
measure the distance.
6-7
6.3 GUIDE LIGHT UNIT INSPECTION AND ADJUSTMENT
6.3.1 INSPECTION
(1) Turn the instrument ON to enter User mode.
(2) Level the instrument observing the Tilt screen and OBS PC 0
enter OBS mode. Press {FUNC} key to go to 2nd ppm 0
page of OBS mode. SD
ZA 90°00’10” ⊥+
HA-R 93°14’31” P1
(3) Press [EDM] and set to “Illum.hold”. Using { X } or
{ W } key select “Guide”. Then press {ENT} key and OBS PC 0
ppm 0
{ESC} key. SD
⊥+
" The guide light brightness level setting range is 1∼3 ZA
HAR
90°00’12”
93°14’31” P2
(factory setting: 3). MENU TIL T H-SET E D M
EDM
Mode : Fine”r”
Reflector : Prism
PC : 0
Illum.hold : Guide
Guide light :3
(4) Sight the prism in face right (F2) at a distance of 20m approximately. The prism should
be setup approximately in the horizontal direction from the CX.
" If the reflective sheet target as described in section 6.3.2 is available, the inspection can be
performed directly using procedures of section 6.3.2.
(5) Hold down { } key for more than 2 seconds until the guide light is turned ON.
(6) Set the horizontal angle to 0° by pressing [0SET] key twice in the 1st page of the OBS
mode.
(7) Look through the telescope to verify that the guide lights are being reflected in the prism.
If both colors (red and green) are visible, proceed to step (8). If only the red or the green
are visible, proceed to section 6.3.2.
(8) Turn the horizontal fine motion knob to turn the standard base slightly. While looking
through the telescope, measure the horizontal angle of the position that changes only to
green from both colors (red and green) of the guide light colors that are reflected in the
prism.
(9) Turn the standard base of the instrument slightly. While looking through the telescope,
measure the horizontal angle of the position that changes only to red from both colors
(red and green) of the guide light colors that are reflected in the prism.
6-8
(10) Calculate the difference of the angle of the horizontal angle to search for the offset
direction of the dividing line of the guide lights from the measurement values of
procedures (8) and (9).
Example:
Step (8): The horizontal angle 0°04’30” to the right from the reticle line (i.e. 0° set
position) of the position that changes to green only from both colors (red and green) of
the colors of the guide lights that are reflected in the prism.
Step (9): The horizontal angle 359°57’00” to the left from the reticle line (i.e. 0° set
position) of the position that changes to red only from both colors (red and green) of the
colors of the guide lights that are reflected in the prism.
The angle difference for steps (8) and (9) is 1’30”. With this the dividing line for the
green and the red shifts to the right side (the green side).
The illustration depicts how the left and right colors of the guide light are reflected in a
prism and seen viewed through the telescope.
When the angle difference is more than 1’, proceed to the adjustments for procedure of
section 6.3.2.
When the angle difference is less than 1’, adjustments are unnecessary.
0°0’00” range for both colors

359°57’00”
0°4’30”
red only green only
range range
3’00” 4’30”
Fig. 6-1
6-9
6.3.2 ADJUSTMENT
For precise adjustment of the guide light prepare the reference target and place it in front of the
instrument at a distance within range of 5m∼20m.
• Use for example the A4-size sheet of paper.
• Draw the 3 parallel vertical lines on the paper, so that the distance between the center line and
both left and right side lines corresponds to ±3’ angle, as seen from the instrument side.
Example: distance between vertical lines: ±4.4mm / 5m
±8.7mm / 10m
±13.1mm / 15m
±17.4mm / 20m (if necessary, carry out the
calculation for any other particular distances
within range of 5m∼20m)
• Attach the reflective sheet targets at the center part of the paper sheet. Place one reflective sheet
target next to another to form a 200mm ± 100mm long row. The height of the row should be
20mm ± 10mm. Use the RS20N-K or RS30N-K reflective sheet targets to cover the inspection
area, or cut respectively, if the bigger size target is applied.
Reflective sheet targets

±3’ Size Height: 20 ± 10mm
Length: 200 ± 100mm
Example of the reference target:

" the center vertical area is colored red and green as a reference
for the guide light beams, however the color fill is not necessary
Fig. 6-2
(1) Remove the guide light cover () section 5.1.1).
(2) Turn the CX ON to enter User mode and level the instrument.
6-10
(3) Align the vertical hair-line of the reticle in face right (F2) of the telescope with the center
vertical line of the reference target.
(4) Hold down { } key for more than 2 seconds until the guide light is turned ON.
Looking through the telescope observe the dividing line for the red and green lights of
the guide light that are reflected by the reflective sheet targets. Adjust this dividing line,
so that it coincides with the vertical hair-line of the reticle (i.e. it is aligned with the
center vertical line of the reference target). Loosen the guide light unit fixing screws and
slightly rotate the guide light against the telescope sighting axis. When adjustment is
completed tighten the guide light unit fixing screws, reinstall the guide light cover and
reconfirm the guide light dividing line observing the reference target with the reflective
sheet targets.
The tolerance for adjustment is ±3’. This standard can be converted to the linear value
based on the distance between the instrument and reference target and the limit positions
can be indicated by the vertical lines drawn on the reference target at the left and right
sides of the center vertical line.
guide light
guide light fixing screws
Fig. 6-3
6-11
vertical hair-line of reticle

aligned with center vertical
line of reference target
reflective sheet targets

Size Height: 20 ± 10mm
Length: 200 ± 100mm
Red LED light Green LED light
tolerance for guide light adjustment:

±3’
(example: ±11.6m/10m)
" There is no adjustment in vertical direction.

" The guide light can be inspected using either the prism () section 6.3.1) or the reference
target () section 6.3.2). Although the adjustment is performed according to the factory
standard within ±3’, the user specified accuracy is ±4’.
(5) Install the telescope cover(s). Check the adjustment of the ±14mm/5m
sighting collimator () section 2.2.7).
Fig. 6-4
6-12
7-1
7. TELESCOPE UNITS AND EDM PCB SYSTEM

Please notice that the “Adjustment” sections of this chapter indicate only unconditionally
necessary checks and adjustments related to the replacement parts. However, if your workshop is
equipped with all necessary service facilities, it is recommended to carry out full and detail
inspection with collimators () chapter 2) and full adjustment and inspection of EDM unit ()
chapter 8 and 6).
7.1 ECPU BOARD
7.1.1 REPLACEMENT
Before replacement of the ECPU board record the mechanical constant MC0, MC1, MC2 ()
section 9.2.2, step (1)).
(1) Unscrew the 4 screws fixing the telescope upper cover and remove the upper cover.
CN202
ECPU
board
CN201
CN203
CN200
Fig. 7-1
(2) Remove the cables from respective connectors on the ECPU board:
– FC4 flexible cable (cable connecting the vertical contact ring with ECPU board) from
the CN200 connector.
– FC2 flexible cable (cable connecting the PX board with ECPU board) from the
CN201 connector.
Caution! The contacts (terminal side) of the cable at the ECPU board side are facing up.
7-2
– FC1 flexible cable (cable connecting the TX board with ECPU board) from the
CN202 connector.
– FC-RX flexible cable (cable connecting the ALC motor /ALC sensor with ECPU
board) from the CN203 connector.
– W1 cable connector (orange wire connecting the CX board with ECPU board) from
– HNS-PHSCX coaxial cable (cable connecting the CX board with ECPU board) from
the CN206 connector on the reverse side of the ECPU board).
– W2 coaxial cable (cable connecting the PX board with ECPU board) from the CN205
connector on the reverse side of the ECPU board.
" To release the CN201, CN202 and CN203 connectors pull the connector lock plates
upward and remove the flexible cables.
To release the CN200 connector draw it forward. Make sure to pull straight and both
sides out. Finally pull the slider slightly upward and remove the flexible cable.
When disconnecting the coaxial cables from the CN204 and CN205 connectors do
not jiggle the micro-coaxial connectors side to side. Using the tweezers, hook the
“ear” of the connector and pull straight forward.
(3) Unscrew the 4 fixing screws and remove the ECPU board from the telescope unit.
EDM-CPU board
CN200 connector
CN201 connector CN202, CN203 connectors
Fig. 7-2
7-3
(4) Install the new ECPU board reversing procedures described above.
" Make sure that the shield sticker is adhered to
the ECPU board in the area surrounded by the shield sticker
thick printed line next to the CN202 connector.
EDM-CPU board
Fig. 7-3
7.1.2 ADJUSTMENT
Adjust the EDM unit in the following order:
(1) EDM electrical unit inspection and adjustment................................. () sections 8.3∼8.23)
(2) Inspection of distance data with baseline – mechanical constant MC setting....() section 6-2)
7-4
7.2 PX BOARD AND PX BASE WITH ALC COMPLETE
7.2.1 REPLACEMENT
PX board fixing screws

PX board
complete FC2
CAL fiber flexible cable
head
CN250
connector
PX base
fixing screws
CN250 connector
PX base
with ALC motor
and ALC sensor
Fig. 7-4
(1) Remove the telescope upper cover and ECPU board () section 7.1.1).
(2) Remove the flexible cable FC2 from the CN250 connector on the PX board. To release
the connector pull the connector lock plate upward.
(3) Unscrew the 3 screws fixing the PX board and separate the PX board from the PX base.
(4) Using the hexagonal wrench 0.89mm loosen the screw fixing the CAL fiber head and
remove the CAL fiber head from the PX base.
(5) Remove the 2 screws and washers fixing the PX base (with ALC complete) and remove
the PX base from the telescope frame.
(6) Install the new PX board and (or) PX base with ALC complete reversing procedures
described above.
" The CAL fiber head must be completely inserted in the assembling hole of the PX base
(make sure that after assembling the collar of the fiber head is in contact with the PX
base).
7-5
7.2.2 ADJUSTMENT
After replacement of the PX board and (or) PX base with ALC complete, adjust the EDM unit in
the following order:
(1) Receiving diode (APD) position adjustment ............................................ () section 8.1.7)

(2) EDM electrical unit inspection and adjustment..................................() sections 8.4∼8.23,
(LD power adjustment – section 8.10 can be omitted)
(3) Inspection of distance data with baseline – mechanical constant MC setting ...() section 6-2)
7.3 DICHROIC PRISM
7.3.1 REPLACEMENT
(2) Remove the PX base with ALC complete along with the PX board () section 7.2.1).
(3) Unscrew the 2 fixing screws and remove the dichroic prism complete from the telescope
frame () Fig. 7-5).
(4) Install the replacement dichroic prism complete reversing procedures described above.
Dichroic prism is assembled in the telescope frame without any special adjustment. It is
simply pushed against the contact surface in the telescope frame without any tilt (in the
direction of the objective lens) - ) Fig. 7-5).
fixing
install the dichroic prism pushing it dichroic prism screws
against the reference surface in the
telescope frame in the direction of
objective lens
Fig. 7-5
7-6
7.3.2 ADJUSTMENT
After replacement of the dichroic prism, carry out the inspection using collimators () chapter 2
“Inspection with collimators”) and then adjust the EDM unit:
(1) Inspection with collimators ............................................................................ () chapter 2)

(2) Laser emitting beam and receiving diode (APD) position adjustment........() section 8.1)
(3) EDM electrical unit inspection and adjustment ................................. () sections 8.4∼8.23)
(4) Inspection of distance data with baseline – mechanical constant MC setting....() section 6.2)
7.4 GUIDE LIGHT COMPLETE
7.4.1 REPLACEMENT
(2) Disconnect the guide light flexible cable FC-GL from the CN223 connector on the TX
board. Pull the connector lock plate upward and remove the flexible cable.
CN223 connector
guide light
complete guide light
fixing screws
guide light
base
Locked Unlocked
CN223
connector
TX board
Fig. 7-6
7-7
(3) Remove the 2 fixing screws and washers and detach the guide light from the guide light
base. If necessary, remove the 2 screws fixing the guide light base and remove the guide
light base from the telescope frame.
(4) Install the new guide light unit reversing procedures described above.
7.4.2 ADJUSTMENT
After replacement of the guide light unit, carry out adjustment of the guide light () section 6.3.2).
7.5 TX BOARD
7.5.1 REPLACEMENT
(1) Remove the guide light cover and guide light unit () section 7.4.1).
(2) Remove the cables from respective connectors on the TX board:
– FC1 flexible cable (cable connecting the ECPU board with TX board) from the
CN221 connector.
– FC-RTCL flexible cable (cable connecting the RTCLPI board with TX board) from
Caution! The contacts (terminal side) of the cable at the TX board side are facing up.
– TX-ATT cable connector (cable connecting the solenoid with TX board) from the
CN224 connector.
– TX-SHUT cable connector (cable connecting the shutter motor with TX board) from
CN222
CN222 connector
CN225
CN224
CN221 TX
board
Fig. 7-7
7-8
" To release the CN221 and CN222 connectors pull the connector lock plates upward and
remove the flexible cables.
(3) Unscrew the 2 screws fixing the TX board and detach the TX board from the solenoid
base.
TX board
Fig. 7-8
(4) Install the new TX board reversing procedures described above.
7.5.2 ADJUSTMENT
After replacement of the TX board, carry out the following inspections and adjustments:
(1) Position adjustment of slit mask of solenoid complete.............................() section 8.1.6)
(2) Reticle illumination check............................................................................ () section 8.4)
(3) Guide light check...........................................................................................() section 8.5)
(4) Shutter operation check................................................................................. ()section 8.6)
(5) ND (solenoid) operation check .....................................................................() section 8.9)
(6) Coincidence constant setting and confirmation ......................... () sections 8.16 and 8.17)
(7) Checking the distance measurement in tracking mode...............................() section 8.21)
(8) Device check ...............................................................................................() section 8.22)
(9) Saving the parameters .................................................................................() section 8.23)
(10) Inspection of distance data with baseline – mechanical constant MC
confirmation................................................................................................. () section 6.2)
(11) Guide light unit adjustment .......................................................................() section 6.3.2)
7-9
7.6 SOLENOID COMPLETE
7.6.1 REPLACEMENT
(1) Remove the guide light cover and guide light unit () section 7.4.1).
(2) Remove the TX board () section 7.5.1).
(3) Unscrew the 2 screws fixing the solenoid base and remove the solenoid unit from the
telescope frame.
fixing screws
solenoid complete
Fig. 7-9
(4) Install the new solenoid complete reversing procedures described above. Be careful to
align the connection cable underneath the solenoid base and underneath the TX board.
Finally after installing the TX board connect the solenoid motor cable to the CN224
connector on the TX board. Before tightening the 2 screws fixing the solenoid unit adjust
the position of the solenoid base in this manner that the front edge of the base is
approximately parallel to the collar surface in the telescope frame () Fig. 7-10).
7-10
telescope frame – Top View
solenoid
complete
solenoid
complete
parallel
setting
parallel
setting
Fig. 7-10
7.6.2 ADJUSTMENT
After replacement adjust position of the slit as described in
section 8.1.6 “Position Adjustment of Slit Mask of Solenoid solenoid frame
Complete”. fixing screws
Fig. 7-11
(1) Position adjustment of slit mask of solenoid complete.............................() section 8.1.6)

(2) Guide light check.......................................................................................... () section 8.5)
(3) ND (solenoid) operation check .................................................................. () section 8.35)
(4) Coincidence constant setting...................................................................... () section 8.16)
(5) Inspection of distance data with baseline – mechanical constant MC
confirmation................................................................................................. () section 6.2)
(6) Guide light unit adjustment ....................................................................... () section 6.3.2)
7-11
7.7 CX/LD WITH FRAME AND SHUTTER UNIT
7.7.1 CX/LD WITH FRAME REPLACEMENT
HNS-PHSCX
CAL fiber head set screw
(coaxial cable)
CAL fiber head
W1 cable
CN225
connector
CN222
connector
CX/LD
with frame
fixing screws with washers
Fig. 7-12
CAL fiber head

set screw W1 cable
CX/LD
HNS-PHSCX
with frame
(coaxial cable)
TX-SHUT
CX/LD frame cable
fixing screws
FC-RTCLPI
flexible
CAL fiber head
cable
Fig. 7-13
7-12
(1) Remove the telescope upper cover and guide light cover () section 5.1.1).
(2) Remove the W1 cable connector and coaxial cable HNS-PHSCX from the CN204 and
CN206 connectors on the ECPU board respectively () section 7.1.1). Pass both cables
from the upper side to the lower side of the telescope frame.
(3) Remove the TX-SHUT (shutter motor) cable and FC_RTCLPI flexible cable from the
CN225 and CN222 connectors on the TX board () section 7.5.1).
(4) Loosen (or remove) the CAL fiber head set screw using hexagonal wrench 0.89mm and
remove the CAL fiber head from the shutter frame.
(5) Remove the 2 hexagonal socket head screws fixing the CX/LD frame to the telescope
frame and remove the CX/LD frame complete along with the shutter unit.
(6) Detach the shutter base complete from the CX/LD
frame () section 7.7.2). set screw
spring washer washer
(7) If necessary, unscrew the LD lens frame set screw
and remove the LD lens frame from the CX/LD
frame.
Caution! Be careful, the different lens frame is used in standard
models and Low Temperature Models. LD lens
frame
(8) Reassemble the unit reversing procedures described
above. Fig. 7-14
7.7.2 SHUTTER UNIT PARTS REPLACEMENT

(1) Remove the CX/LD frame complete along with the shutter unit from the telescope frame
() section 7.7.1).
(2) Unscrew the 2 screws fixing the shutter frame to the CX/LD frame and detach the
shutter unit from the CX/LD frame.
(3) Remove the 2 screws fixing the FC-RTCLPI board and detach the FC-RTCLPI board
from the shutter frame.
(4) Remove the 2 screws fixing the shutter motor to the shutter frame and detach the shutter
motor complete and laser beam mask 2 from the shutter frame.
(5) Unscrew the hexagonal socket head screw fixing the CAL filters and remove the CAL
filters: ND filter (uniform density filter), diffusion filter and CAL filter (variable density
filter) from the shutter frame.
7-13
shutter
laser beam
ND filter motor complete
mask 2
(filter of uniform density)
CAL diffusion filter
CAL filter
(filter of variable density)
shutter frame
shutter motor fixing screws
photo interrupters
CX/LD with frame

FC-RTCLPI unit
(with photo interrupters
FC-RTCLPI board and reticle illumination)
fixing screws
Fig. 7-15
(6) Reassemble the unit reversing procedures described above.

(a) Assemble the CAL filters as shown in Fig. 7-15. Tighten the set screw.
(b) While installing the shutter motor on the shutter frame, be careful to set the motor and
shutter in the proper position (refer to the position of the motor cable – ) Fig. 7-15,
turn the shutter to the position, in which the MEAS path is closed, i.e. the shutter is set
in front of the laser beam mask). There is no adjustment of the laser beam mask 2.
(c) Using the 2 fixing screws attach the board of the FC-RTCLPI unit to the shutter frame.
Before tightening the screws adjust position of the board, so that the shutter in both
MEAS and CAL positions is located in the center of the 2 photo interrupters.
7.7.3 ADJUSTMENT
After replacement of the CX/LD with frame and (or) shutter unit, adjust the EDM unit in the
following order:
(1) Laser emitting beam (laser diode) position adjustment................ () sections 8.1.1∼8.1.6)
(2) Temperature aging ........................................................................................ () section 8.2)
(3) EDM electrical unit inspection and adjustment................................. () sections 8-4∼8.23)
(4) Inspection of distance data with baseline – mechanical constant MC setting .... () section 6.2)
(5) Guide light unit adjustment........................................................................() section 6.3.2)
7-14
7.8 MIRROR COMPLETE AND LASER BEAM MASK
7.8.1 REPLACEMENT
(2) Remove the guide light base together with the guide light () section 7.4.1).
(3) Remove the 3 hexagonal socket head screws fixing the laser beam mask to the mirror
unit and remove the laser beam mask.
laser beam
mask fixing screw mirror complete
mirror frame
fixing screw
laser beam
mask
laser beam
mask fixing screw
Fig. 7-16
(4) Remove the 2 hexagonal socket head screws with washers fixing the mirror unit to the
telescope frame and remove the mirror unit.
(5) Reassemble the unit reversing procedures described above. Before tightening the 2
screws fixing the mirror unit push the mirror frame in the direction of the eyepiece (i.e.
to the rear side of the telescope frame).
7-15
7.8.2 ADJUSTMENT
After replacement of the mirror complete and laser beam mask, adjust the EDM unit in the
following order:
(1) Laser emitting beam (laser diode) position adjustment................ () sections 8.1.1∼8.1.6)
(2) Temperature aging ........................................................................................ () section 8.2)
(3) EDM electrical unit inspection and adjustment................................. () sections 8-4∼8.23)
(4) Inspection of distance data with baseline – mechanical constant MC setting .... () section 6.2)
(5) Guide light unit adjustment........................................................................ () section 6.3.2)
7.9 OBJECTIVE LENS
7.9.1 REPLACEMENT
(2) Remove the objective lens retainer by rotating counterclockwise.
(3) Remove the objective lens set screw along with washer and remove the objective lens
from the telescope frame.
O ring B objective lens

set screw
objective lens
retainer
O ring A
objective lens
Fig. 7-17
7-16
(4) Attach the O ring A and O ring B to the objective lens retainer and install the objective
lens in the telescope frame. While the set screw is not fully tightened, slightly turn the
objective lens frame to set the head of the screw in the center of the adjusting range
limited by the lengthened hole in the telescope frame. Tighten the set screw. Then screw
in the objective lens retainer.
O ring B grease G31
objective lens
retainer objective lens
O ring A grease G31
Fig. 7-18
(5) Level the CX and using the collimator A of the Sokkia’s collimator system confirm and
if necessary adjust the inclination of the CX reticle hair-lines () section 2.2.19).
(6) Using the EDM collimation tool, align the hair-lines of the instrument reticle in face left
(F1) with the those of the tool reticle at ∞. Precisely level the instrument in advance.
(7) Focus the tool to the short distance position to observe the sharp image of the beam
splitter prism (trapezoid-shape prism) installed in the objective lens unit.
(8) Slightly loosen the objective lens retainer and loosen the objective lens set screw.
(9) Confirm that the upper and lower edge of the beam
splitter prism is parallel to the horizontal hair-line of lines must be
the tool reticle. If not, turn the objective lens, parallel to
pushing the objective lens set screw to the left of each other
right side accordingly. Tighten the set screw and
next tighten the objective lens retainer. Reconfirm
that the beam splitter prism is parallel to the
horizontal hair-line of the tool reticle.
Fig. 7-19
7-17
properly tightened
improperly tightened
objective lens
retainer
Fig. 7-20
Caution! The objective lens retainer must be completely tightened after adjustment. Confirm that
there is a drop-off at the edge of the telescope frame and the objective lens retainer ()
Fig. 7-20).
7.9.2 ADJUSTMENT
After replacement of the objective lens, carry out the inspection using collimators () chapter 2
“Inspection with collimators”) and then adjust the EDM unit:
(1) Inspection with collimators.............................................................................() chapter 2)
(2) EDM adjustment ...............................................................................() sections 8-1∼8-23)
(TCXO frequency check – section 8.3 can be omitted)
(4) Guide light unit position confirmation.......................................................... () section 6.3)
7-18
7.10 EYEPIECE
7.10.1 CLEANING
(1) Unscrew the eyepiece complete
by rotating counterclockwise.
eyepiece lens
(2) Remove the eyepiece knob cover. fixing nut
(3) Loosen the 2 eyepiece knob set set screw

screws and remove the eyepiece eyepiece
knob. knob eyepiece
cover lens A
(4) Unscrew the eyepiece lens fixing eyepiece
nut to clean the eyepiece lens A sealing lens B
and (or) eyepiece lens B. O ring
Assemble the eyepiece complete
eyepiece
according to Fig. 7-21. knob
Fig. 7-21
7.10.2 ADJUSTMENT
After assembling of the eyepiece unit, carry out the inspection with collimators () chapter 2
“Inspection with Collimators”).
7-19
7.11 TELESCOPE RETICLE
7.11.1 REPLACEMENT
(1) Unscrew the 2 screws fixing the reticle cover and remove the reticle cover.
(2) Remove the eyepiece complete by rotating counterclockwise.
(3) Remove the reticle cover sealing.
(4) Unscrew the 2 screws fixing the eyepiece ring and remove the eyepiece ring.
(5) Remove the 3 screws fixing the Porro prism frame (hexagonal socket head screws) along
with washers and remove the Porro prism unit with frame.
(6) Remove the reticle frame set screw along with spring. Then remove the 2 hexagonal
socket head screws fixing the reticle frame along spring washers and washers and the
reticle adjusting screw. Next remove the reticle unit from the Porro prism frame.
reticle frame
set screw
spring
reticle adjusting screw
ring,
eyepiece reticle cover sealing
Porro prism
with frame reticle cover
Porro prism
frame screw reticle eyepiece
unit
reticle frame fixing screw
Fig. 7-22
7-20
7.11.2 ADJUSTMENT
After replacement of the reticle, carry out the inspection with collimators () chapter 2) and
next adjust the EDM unit:
(1) Inspection with collimators ............................................................................ () chapter 2)
(2) EDM unit adjustment ....................................................................... () sections 8-1∼8-23)
(Temperature aging – section 8.2 can be omitted)
(3) Inspection of distance data with baseline – mechanical constant MC setting... () section 6-2)
(4) Guide light unit position confirmation..........................................................() section 6.3)
7.12 FOCUSING UNIT
7.12.1 REPLACEMENT
(1) Remove the telescope upper cover () section 7.1.1).
(2) Unscrew the 2 screws fixing the reticle cover and remove the reticle cover.
(3) Remove the 3 hexagonal socket head screws of the Porro prism frame and remove the
Porro prism frame complete along with the eyepiece () Fig. 7-24).
" While assembling take care of the correct positioning of the Porro prism inside the
focusing tube.
(4) Turn the focusing ring until one of the stop screws (hexagonal socket head screws) is
seen in the open section of the telescope frame (A view) or outside the telescope frame
(B view) – ) Fig. 7-23. Remove one of the stop screws (take care of the washer) and
then remove the focusing ring by rotating counterclockwise. If necessary, exchange the
V rings attached to the focusing ring.
A view B view
focusing focusing
ring ring
stop screw
with washer
stop screw with washer
Fig. 7-23
7-21
(5) Remove the focusing tube screw and pull out the focusing tube complete.
" While reassembling the unit apply glue Loctite 222 to the thread of the focusing tube
screw.
focusing tube screw
focusing tube
focusing ring
with focusing ring cover
V ring
V ring
fixing screw for
Porro prism frame
stop screw
eyepiece and
Porro prism unit
reticle
cover
Fig. 7-24
(6) Reassemble the focusing unit reversing procedures described above.
7.12.2 ADJUSTMENT
After replacement of the focusing unit, carry out the inspection with collimators () chapter 2) and
adjust the EDM unit:
(1) Inspection with collimators.............................................................................() chapter 2)

(2) EDM unit adjustment........................................................................() sections 8-1∼8-23)
(Temperature aging – section 8.2 can be omitted)
7-22
7.13 CABLE LAYOUT IN TELESCOPE UNIT
telescope lower side
HNS-PHSX (CX board /

EDM-CPU board (CN206)
FC1 (TX board (CN221) /

W1 (CX board / EDM-CPU

board (CN204)
FC-GL (guide light / TX

board (CN223)
TX-ATT (solenoid / TX
board (CN204)
TX-SHUT (shutter motor /
TX board (CN225)
FC-RTCLPI (reticle illum.,

photo interrupters / TX
board (CN222)
Fig. 7-25
7-23
telescope upper side
W2 (PX board/
EDM-CPU
W1 (CX board/ board (CN205)
EDM-CPU
board (CN204)
HNS-PHSX FC2 (PX board (CN250) /

(CX board/ EDM-CPU board (CN201)
EDM-CPU board
(CN206)
FC1 (TX board (CN221) / FC4 (V-slip ring / EDM-

EDM-CPU board (CN202) CPU board (CN200)
FC-RX (ALC motor) /

Fig. 7-26
Caution! When installing the telescope covers, confirm in advance that the 8 inductive clips are
attached to each telescope upper cover and guide light cover.
7-24
8-1
8. EDM ADJUSTMENT
" The positions of the laser diode (LD) and receiving diode (APD) are adjusted in reference to
the reticle, therefore the instrument must be collimated in advance. When the EDM is to be
adjusted, use Service mode and EDM adjustment program installed on the computer
according to the procedures described in this chapter.
Caution! Use of controls, adjustments or performance of procedures other than those
specified herein may result in hazardous radiation exposure. Never look directly
into the laser beam. When observing the beam use the CCD camera and monitor.
8.1 LASER EMITTING BEAM AND RECEIVING DIODE

ADJUSTMENT
" If the ECPU board is removed from the instrument and the ATT filter is set in advance in the
proper position for the receiving diode position adjustment (i.e. the transparent zone of the ATT
filter is placed in front of the receiving diode as described in details in section 8.1.7 step (3)),
the receiving diode position (PX board position) can be adjusted first (section 8.1.7), before
adjustment of the laser diode (LD) collimation (section 8.1.3∼8.1.6).
8.1.1 EDM COLLIMATION TOOL
put the tool spacer

in the levelling base
Fig. 8-1
8-2
SH UTTER GA IN CONTROL
POWER
POWER
GND 12V
v
Fig. 8-2
The EDM unit of the CX can be adjusted while using the specialized EDM Collimation Tool.
Topcon Corp. has prepared so far the 3 types of the tool. Either one provides full range of
facilities to carry out the EDM collimation procedures - adjustment of the specified position of
the laser diode (LD), receiving diode (APD) and laser beam mask.
EDM collimation tool – (described in this manual as : “CM400 type tool”), part No. S774-002
or
EDM collimation tool (compact type) – part No. S863-001
or
EDM collimation tool (compact type) – part No. 2290048600
" If the EDM collimation tool (compact type) is used, all settings mentioned in this chapter are
based on the assumption that the tool is set up as follows:
z Magnification of CCD camera adapter: within low range magnification.
Low range magnification: Turn the zoom ring to move the CCD camera head until the
camera cable nut is approx. aligned with the rear face of the CCD camera adapter. This
setting can be used as the rough reference. The precise magnification is not required. The
setting described hereinafter should be considered as the general recommendation only. It
can be verified during practical use of the tool.
Caution! After turning the zoom ring of the CCD camera adapter, precisely focus on the
reference theodolite reticle by turning the focusing ring of the tool CCD camera
adapter. When the focus is not adjusted correctly, the instrument laser diode and
receiving diode focus adjustment will be affected.
8-3
camera cable
nut CCD camera
adapter
rear face of CCD

camera adapter focusing ring
nut zoom ring
Fig. 8-3
z It is assumed that CCD control box switches during the collimation adjustment are set as
follows: SHUTTER: “Low/F.L.”, GAIN CONTROL: “STD”
The tool filter setting mentioned in this manual is not strictly required. Any other
configuration ensuring better conditions of observation and adjustment can be used as well.
Be aware that the illumination conditions will be different, if the tool magnification (zoom
ring setting) is changed.
z Using the reference theodolite make mark in
advance on the telescope frame and focusing ring theodolite focused to ∞
for the ∞ focus position (for this purpose sight
the ∞ reticle of a collimator).
" Always turn the focusing ring of the theodolite
in the same direction when approaching the ∞
focus setting.
Fig. 8-4
8-4
8.1.2 ADJUSTMENT FLOW CHART

Refer to the flow chart below to perform the collimation adjustment of laser diode (LD) and receiving
diode (refer also to section 8.1.8 “Summary of Adjustment Using EDM Collimation Tool”).
START
1. CX (F2) and collimator (theodolite) optical
alignment
Alignment of CX and collimator (theodolite) reticles at ∞
Alignment of CX beam splitter prism and

collimator (theodolite) reticle at short distance
2. Laser diode (LD)

adjustment LD focus adjustment at ∞
LD centering at short distance
LD centering at ∞
3. Mask adjustment Adjustment of laser beam mask position at short distance
4. ND filter (slit mask) Adjustment of ND filter (slit mask) position at short distance
adjustment
5. CX (F1) and
collimator (thedolite) Alignment of CX and collimator (theodolite) reticles at ∞
optical alignment
6. Receiving diode
adjustment Receiving diode focus adjustment at ∞
Receiving diode centering at ∞
During adjustment of LD and receiving

diode reconfirm (1), (5) – instrument and
collimator (theodolite) optical alignment END
8-5
8.1.3 PREPARATION FOR ADJUSTMENT

Before adjustment of the CX, the EDM collimation tool should be setup and preadjusted according
to the “EDM Collimation Tool Assembling and Adjustment Manual”.
Prepare the following tools:
• EDM collimation tool with CCD camera () Fig. 8-1 or Fig. 8-2)
• Ext. power supply & communication cable tool (ST-CX-01)
(1) Remove the telescope upper cover and guide light cover () section 5.1.1) and then
remove the guide light together with base () section 7.4.1).
(2) Place the CX on the instrument base of the EDM collimation tool in this manner that the
telescope is pointing towards the mirror of the tool in face right (F2). Connect the
regulated power supply to the instrument via ext. power supply & communication cable
tool. While holding {F1}, {F4} and {FUNC} keys press { } key to enter Service mode.
Level the instrument observing the “Tilt” screen in “Encoder, Tilt” mode () section
9.2.3 step (4)).
(3) Align the CX with the collimator (theodolite).
(a) Switch ON the monitor. Turn ON the power for the CCD camera unit and instrument
reticle illuminator.
(b) CM400 type tool: Turn the ND filter selector to “None” setting (no ND filter will be
applied).
Compact type tool: no filters applied.
ND filter
selector
collimator
Compact type tool:

OPEN position of filters
CM400 type tool

Fig. 8-5
8-6
(c) CM400 type tool: Move the focusing arm to focus collimator to ∞ (align the indicator
mark with 0 graduation of the scale) - ) Fig. 8-6.
Compact type tool: turn the focusing ring of the theodolite to ∞ focus position.
EDM collimation tool (CM400 type): EDM collimation tool (compact type):
theodolite
focused to ∞
Fig. 8-6
(d) Turn the CX telescope and standard base to see on the monitor the image of the
telescope optics illuminated by the reticle illuminator. Then turn the focusing ring of
the instrument to observe the sharp image of the CX reticle.
(e) Turn the CX’s telescope and standard base fine motion screws to correct alignment of
the hair-lines of the CX and collimator (theodolite) reticles.
monitor
1. Focus - ∞
2. Both reticles of collimator
(theodolite) and CX aligned
Fig. 8-7
8-7
(f) CM400 type tool: Move the collimator focusing arm to focus on the beam splitter
prism.
Compact type tool: Rotate the focusing ring of the thedolite clockwise to focus on the
beam splitter prism.
If TM10E is used,
the theodolite
focusing ring should
be rotated more than
1 revolution from ∞
focus position
Fig. 8-8
(g) Turn the horizontal and vertical fine motion screws of the tool mirror until the beam
splitter prism is centered within the collimator (theodolite) reticle () Fig. 8-9).
tool mirror
vertical fine
motion screw
horizontal fine
motion screw
beam splitter prism centered

within collimator reticle
Fig. 8-9
8-8
(h) CM400 type tool: Move the focusing arm to focus collimator to ∞ (align the indicator
mark with 0 graduation of the scale). Align the hair-lines of the CX and collimator
reticles using the CX’s telescope and standard base fine motion screws.
Compact type tool: rotate the focusing ring of the thedolite to ∞ focus position. Align the
hair-lines of the CX and theodolite reticles using the CX’s telescope and standard base
fine motion screws.
theodolite
focused to ∞
Fig. 8-10
(i) Repeat steps (e)∼(h) until the optical path is in alignment.
collimator (theodolite) collimator (theodolite)

focused to ∞ to align refocused to align with
with CX reticle CX beam splitter prism
Fig. 8-11
8-9
8.1.4 LASER DIODE FOCUS AND POSITION ADJUSTMENT

(1) Confirm that the regulated DC power supply is connected to the instrument via external
power supply & communication cable tool.
Before starting the adjustment of the LD beam collimation, proceed as follows:
Caution! If the CX/LD unit is replaced with the new one, turn the variable
resistor (VR) on the CX board fully counterclockwise to avoid damages
to the laser diode (LD). This will drive the minimum power to the laser
diode.
" For the laser diode position adjustment at the short distance remove in advance the laser
beam mask () Fig. 8-14).
(2) CM400 type tool: Turn the ND filter

selector to “High” setting (select ND filter
of the high optical density). ND filter
selector
Compact type tool: Use the following filters
of the tool:
“RED” collimator
+
“GREEN”
+
“GREEN”
Fig. 8-12
8-10
(3) CM400 type tool: Confirm and if necessary, move the focusing arm to focus collimator
to ∞ – align the indicator mark with 0 graduation (0mm) of the scale.
Compact type tool: turn the focusing ring of the thedolite to ∞ focus position.
theodolite
focused to ∞
Fig. 8-13
(4) Confirm that the instrument is set to Service mode.

(5) In main menu of Service mode select “EDM”, then “Counter” mode and next “LD
Adjust.” service function.
(6) Press {ENT} key and observe the laser diode (LD) spot via CCD camera on the monitor.
1
laser beam mask
2
3
CX/LD with
frame complete
mirror mirror unit frame

mount
LD spot
4
Fig. 8-14
8-11
(7) Laser diode (LD) focus adjustment.

" On the conditions that the laser beam is significantly maladjusted and cannot be easily
located on the monitor screen, use the following hints for coarse preadjustment:
– Temporary do not apply any filter (OPEN position) of the collimation tool.
– Slightly loosen the 2 hexagonal socket head
screws d and move the mirror unit frame to
the limit position in the direction of eyepiece.
Next tighten the mirror unit frame fixing
screws.
– Slightly loosen the 2 hexagonal socket head
screws f and move the CX/LD frame to
adjust the LD image position to the center of LD beam
the mirror frame () Fig. 8-15). Next tighten Fig. 8-15
the CX/LD frame fixing screws.
– Slightly loosen the mirror mount fixing screw
c and mirror unit frame securing screws (2
hexagonal socket head screws) d. Adjust the
laser beam position approximately to the
center of the tool mirror () Fig. 8-16) by
turning the CX mirror mount (using the
adjusting pin) and mirror unit frame as shown
in Fig. 8-14. When the monitor screen
becomes brightly illuminated all around by the
LD beam, apply the collimation tool filters as
specified in step (2).
" If the LD beam cannot be seen on the mirror,
try to readjust at the same time LD focus
LD beam
(loosen the LD lens frame fixing screw e and
move the lens frame back and forth). Fig. 8-16
(a) Confirm that the mirror mount fixing screw
c and mirror unit frame fixing screws (2
hexagonal socket head screws) d are not fully
tightened. Adjust the laser beam position
approximately to the center as shown in Fig. 8-17
by turning the mirror mount (using the adjusting
pin) and mirror frame. Tighten the fixing screws.
(b) Loosen the laser diode (LD) lens frame fixing
screw e and move the lens frame back and forth to LD focus
adjust the sharpest image of the laser diode (LD) adjustment
spot as observed on the monitor. Fig. 8-17
(c) Tighten the fixing screw and reconfirm the
adjustment.
8-12
(8) Laser diode (LD) position adjustment.

(a) Press {ESC} key to exit to EDM mode submenu (or put a piece of black paper in the
laser beam path). Reconfirm alignment of the CX and collimator (theodolite) ()
section 8.1.3, step (3)-(i)).
(b) CM400 type tool: Move the collimator focusing arm to focus on the beam splitter
prism.
Compact type tool: rotate the focusing ring of the thedolite clockwise to focus on the
beam splitter prism.
If TM10E is used,
the theodolite
focus position
Fig. 8-18
(c) CM400 type tool: Turn the ND filter

selector to “High” setting (select ND ND filter
filter of the high optical density). selector
Compact type tool: Use the following
filters of the tool:
+
“GREEN”
" If during adjustment the LD beam

intensity as observed on the monitor is
low, temporary set SHUTTER switch of
the CCD control box to “HIGH/OFF” Fig. 8-19
setting.
8-13
(d) In “EDM” mode submenu select “Counter” mode and then “LD Adjust.” service
function.
(e) Press {ENT} key and observe the LD spot via CCD camera on the monitor.
(f) Slightly loosen the 2 hexagonal socket head screws f and move the CX/LD frame
complete () Fig. 8-14) to align the laser diode (LD) image with the center of the
reticle. Next tighten the CX/LD frame fixing screws.
.
LD image as seen on
the monitor at short
distance focus position
Fig. 8-20
(g) CM400 type tool: Turn the ND filter

selector to “High” setting (select filter of
ND filter
the high optical density).
selector
Compact type tool: Use the following
+
“GREEN”
+
“GREEN”
Fig. 8-21
8-14
(h) CM400 type tool: Move the focusing arm to focus collimator to ∞ (align the indicator
Compact type tool: rotate the focusing ring of the thedolite to ∞ focus position.
theodolite
focused to ∞
Fig. 8-22
(i) Align the laser beam with the center of the reticle by
turning the mirror unit frame and mirror mount (using
the adjusting pin) as shown in Fig. 8-14. To change LD spot
the LD position horizontally, slightly loosen the
mirror unit frame fixing screws (2 hexagonal socket
head screws) d and adjust the mirror unit frame.
When adjusting the LD position diagonally (by the
same amount in horizontal and vertical direction),
slightly loosen the mirror mount fixing screw and
rotate the mirror mount.
The tolerance for the laser diode (LD) position Fig. 8-23
adjustment is 5”. Finally when all adjustments and
temperature aging () section 8.2, temperature aging is
necessary after replacement of the specified parts) are
completed, confirm that the center of the LD spot remains within tolerances as shown in
Fig. 8-23.
8-15
LD spot adjustment tolerances:

EDM collimation tool:
(CM400 type) (compact type)
40”
±15”
±8”
±15”
±8”
90”
40” – distance between

double hair lines of CX
Fig. 8-24 (same for thedolite)
(j) Tighten the mirror unit frame fixing screws d () Fig. 8-14) with torque of 2.5 kgfcm
(0.25 Nm). Tighten the mirror mount fixing screw c with torque of 0.5 kgfcm (0.05
Nm)) and reconfirm the adjustment. If the LD spot moves out of the reticle center
within very small range, readjust the mirror mount and the mirror unit frame without
loosening the fixing screws.
(k) Recheck the adjustment of the laser diode (LD) at the short distance focus position ()
steps (b) ∼ (f)) and again at ∞ focus position () steps (g) ∼ (j)).
8.1.5 LASER BEAM MASK POSITION ADJUSTMENT

(1) Install the laser beam mask. Do not tighten
the fixing screws.
fixing screws for

laser beam mask
Fig. 8-25
8-16

selector to “Med.-High” setting. ND filter
Compact type tool: Use the following selector
“RED”
+ collimator
“GREEN”
While using either tool, select “LD

adjust” service function of CX “EDM”
“Counter” service mode.
Fig. 8-26
(3) CM400 type tool: Move the collimator focusing arm to focus on the laser beam mask.
Compact type tool: rotate the focusing ring of the theodolite clockwise to focus on the
laser beam mask.
If TM10E is used,
the theodolite
focus position
While using either tool, select “LD adjust” service function of CX EDM “Counter”
service mode.
Fig. 8-27
8-17
(4) Adjust the laser beam mask to the center position

referring to the tool reticle (before installing the
laser beam mask, the short distance setting must
be adjusted, so that the beam splitter prism is
centered within the collimator (theodolite) reticle.
Shift the mask in right to left direction to adjust
its position in horizontal direction. Turn the upper
fixing screw to move the mask in the vertical
direction. If there is not enough adjusting range
in the vertical direction, slightly bend the upper align laser beam mask
edge of the mask plate. Finally tighten the 2 position to the center
fixing screws at the front side of the laser beam of the reticle
mask () Fig. 8-25). Fig. 8-28
" If the laser beam mask cannot be centered within the adjusting range, check and if
necessary readjust the beam splitter prism position by turning the objective lens ()
section 7.9.1).
8.1.6 POSITION ADJUSTMENT OF SLIT MASK OF SOLENOID

COMPLETE
(1) Select “LD adjust” service function of CX Service mode “EDM” Æ “Counter”. Press
{ENT} key twice to set the slit mask with ND filter to CLOSED position.
selector to “Med.-High” setting.
ND filter
Compact type tool: Use the following selector
“GREEN”
+ collimator
“GREEN”
+
“BLUE”
Fig. 8-29
8-18
(3) If necessary, slightly refocus the collimator (theodolite) from the short distance setting as
stated in section 8.1.5 step (3) to observe the sharp image of the slit mask on the monitor.
If necessary, press {ENT} key to toggle between OPEN and CLOSED position of the
slit mask with ND filter.
(4) Carry out the position adjustment of the slit mask
(a) Loosen the 2 cross-recessed screws of the solenoid motor frame and move the frame to
adjust the slit position in horizontal and vertical direction to the center referring to the
reticle of the collimator (theodolite) () Fig. 8-30 and Fig. 8-31).
fixing screws for

solenoid frame
Fig. 8-31
Fig. 8-30
(b) After adjustment tighten the 2 fixing screws.

(c) Confirm the slit mask centering in face left (F1). If the mask slit is not aligned with the
collimator (theodolite) reticle, readjust as shown in Fig. 8-30. Finally recheck the mask
slit alignment in face right (F2). If the mask slit cannot be aligned in both faces (F1 and
F2), replace the solenoid complete.
8-19
8.1.7 RECEIVING DIODE (APD) POSITION ADJUSTMENT

Prepare the following tools to complete the adjustment:
• EDM collimation tool with CCD camera () Fig. 8-1 or Fig. 8-2)
• APD illuminator tool
Optionally: cold light illumination tool (e.g. “Megalight 100”) with guide light and
attachment
• Ext. power supply & communication cable tool
(1) Confirm that both telescope upper cover and guide light cover are removed.
(2) Connect the external power supply, enter Service mode and level the instrument
observing the “Tilt” screen in “Encoder, Tilt” mode. Press {ESC} key twice to exit to
main menu of Service mode.
(3) Select “EDM” mode and then “ATT” service Close<-->Open *
function. Press { S } key and confirm “ATT. Motion” ATT.motion FIXT
setting FIX. If necessary select FIX by { X } or { W } Full motion <-->
Coarse motion <-->
key. Select (highlight) “Full motion” function and Fine motion <-->
press { X } key to turn the ATT filter (placed in front F U L B STAT LVEL S I G
of the receiving diode) to the fully OPEN position.
Next using “Coarse motion” function press { W } key Close<-->Open *
8 or 9 times. Wait a moment and turn the power OFF. Full motion <-->
The transparent zone of the ATT filter will be placed Coarse motion <-->
in front of the receiving diode (i.e. in not fully open Fine motion <-->
F U L B STAT LVEL S I G
position).
" Setting of the ATT filter can be confirmed by pressing Close<-->Open
[STAT] key. The “STEP” count should be approx.
PI :1021
1385 when “Coarse motion” { W } key has been STEP :1385
pressed 8 times or approx. 1360 when { W } key has STATUS :MISPOINT
been pressed 9 times. BACK
(4) Disconnect the external power supply and remove the ECPU board () section 7.1.1).
8-20
(5) Turn the telescope and standard base so that the objective lens is pointing towards the
mirror of the EDM collimation tool in face left (F1). Align the CX with the collimator
(theodolite) as it is described in section 8.1.3, step (3).
" It is essential to align both instrument and collimator reticles, when focus is set to ∞.
" CM400 type tool: Turn the ND filter selector to “None” setting (no ND filter will be
applied).
" Compact type tool: no filters applied
ND filter
selector
collimator
Compact type tool:

OPEN position of filters
CM400 type tool
Fig. 8-32
(6) CM400 type tool: Move the focusing arm to focus collimator to ∞ (align the indicator
Compact type tool: turn the focusing ring of the thedolite to ∞ focus position.
theodolite
focused to ∞
Fig. 8-33
8-21
(7) Loosen the 3 screws fixing the PX board and set

the PX board to the center of the adjusting range
within the PX board holes provided for the
fixing screws. Then tighten the 3 fixing screws.
(8) Place the APD illuminator into the area
underneath the receiving diode or between the
ATT filter and dichroic prism to see the image
of the receiving diode on the monitor. For
convenience of observation adjust the DC power
supply voltage for the APD illuminator (max.
6V DC).
" If the diode cannot be seen, loosen the 2 PX
base fixing screws () Fig. 8-35) and move the
PX base respectively.
3 screws fixing PX board

Fig. 8-35
8-34
(9) Loosen the 2 hexagonal socket head screws fixing the PX base and move the PX base up
and down. When the sharpest image of the receiving diode is observed, tighten the fixing
screws without losing the adjustment. During this adjustment it is recommended to
switch OFF the reticle illuminator temporary.
" When the focus of the receiving diode is adjusted by moving the PX base up and down,
adjust at the same time the PX base in the right to left direction to align the receiving diode
with the center of the reticle approximately. This is coarse position adjustment. Fine
adjustment will be done later by positioning of the PX board itself.
PX base
fixing screws
Fig. 8-35
8-22
(10) Loosen the 3 screws fixing the PX board and

shift the PX board to align the illuminated
circle of the receiving diode with the center of
the reticle (tolerance for adjustment: 15”).
Then tighten the PX board fixing screws
without losing the adjustment.
" During this adjustment it is recommended to
switch OFF the reticle illuminator temporary.
(11) Reinstall the ECPU board in the instrument.

Reconnect all cables to the board.
receiving diode pellet

(circle) aligned with
center of tool reticle 3 screws fixing PX board
Fig. 8-36
Fig. 8-37
If optional cold light illumination tool (e.g. “Megalight 100”) with guide light is available, it can be
used to illuminate the receiving diode instead of the APD illuminator tool.
(a) Using the hexagonal wrench 0.89mm loosen the
CAL fiber head set screw and remove the CAL fiber shutter
head from the shutter frame. Attach the guide light frame
of the illuminator tool (cold light illuminator: CAL fiber
Megalight) to the CAL fiber head (at the shutter head
side). Take care of the fiber; make sure that the guide
light of the illuminator does not impose tension by
stretching the fiber.
(b) Reconfirm alignment of the CX and collimator
(theodolite) reticles in face left (F1).
CAL fiber head
(c) Adjust the receiving diode focus and position as set screw
described in steps (7)∼(10).
(d) Reinstall the CAL fiber head in the shutter frame.
Fig. 8-38
(e) Reinstall the ECPU board in the instrument.
Reconnect all cables to the board.
8-23
8.1.8 SUMMARY OF ADJUSTMENT WITH EDM COLLIMATION

TOOL
CM400 type tool:
EDM collimation tool setting

Alignment
ND Filter Meaning
unit Focusing arm
(opt. density)
Alignment of instrument (F2) and
∞ None
CX, collimator reticles at ∞
collimator Alignment of instrument beam splitter prism
short distance None
and collimator reticle at short distance
∞ High Adjustment of LD focus at ∞
LD short distance High Position adjustment of LD at short distance
Alignment of LD with collimator reticle at
∞ High
∞
Laser beam short distance, Alignment of laser beam mask with
Medium-High
mask focus: laser beam mask collimator reticle at short distance
short distance,
Slit mask of Alignment of slit mask (F2 and check F1)
focus: slit mask of Medium-High
solenoid unit with collimator reticle at short distance
solenoid unit
CX, Alignment of instrument (F1) and
∞ None
collimator collimator reticles at ∞
∞ None Receiving diode (APD) focus adjustment at ∞
Receiving
diode (APD) Alignment of receiving diode (APD) with
∞ None
collimator reticle at ∞
8-24
Compact type tool:

z Magnification of CCD camera adapter: within low range magnification () section 8.1.1).
Low range magnification: Turn the zoom ring to move the CCD camera head until the
camera cable nut is approx. aligned with the rear face of the CCD camera adapter. This
setting can be applied as a rough reference; the precise magnification is not required. The
setting described hereinafter should be considered as the general recommendation only. It
can be verified during practical use of the tool.
z It is assumed that the switches of the CCD camera control box are set during the collimation
adjustment as follows: SHUTTER: “Low/F.L.”, GAIN CONTROL: “STD”
The setting of the tool filters mentioned in this manual is not strictly required. Any other
configuration ensuring better conditions of observation and adjustment can be applied as
well. Be aware that the illumination conditions will be different, if the magnification of the
CCD camera adapter (zoom ring setting) is changed.
EDM collimation tool setting

Alignment
Theodolite ND Filters Meaning
unit
focusing ring (opt. density)
Alignment of instrument (F2)
∞ None
CX, and theodolite reticles at ∞
collimator Alignment of instrument beam
short distance None splitter prism and theodolite
reticle at short distance
∞ RED,GREEN, GREEN Adjustment of LD focus at ∞
Position adjustment of LD at
LD short distance RED, GREEN*
short distance
Alignment of LD with
∞ RED,GREEN, GREEN
theodolite reticle at ∞
Alignment of laser beam mask
Laser beam short dist.,
RED, GREEN with theodolite reticle at short
mask focus: laser beam mask
distance
short distance, Alignment of slit mask (F2 and
Slit mask of
focus: slit mask of GREEN,GREEN,BLUE check F1) with theodolite reticle
solenoid unit
solenoid unit at short distance
CX, Alignment of instrument (F1)
∞ None
collimator and theodolite reticles at ∞
Receiving diode (APD) focus
∞ None
adjustment at ∞
Receiving
diode (APD) Alignment of receiving diode
∞ None (APD) with theodolite reticle at
∞
* Switch “SHUTTER” of CCD camera control box can be set temporary to “HIGH/OFF” setting.
8-25
8.2 TEMPERATURE AGING

After completion of the optical and mechanical adjustment, the stress relieving procedures should
be conducted within temperature range of -30°C∼+70°C to make sure that no internal, residual
stresses remain in the mechanical structure of the instrument. The temperature chamber with the
sufficient temperature control system is essential to carry out the annealing process as required.
" When performing the temperature aging procedures the side covers and telescope covers
should be attached to the instrument.
" The temperature aging is required only after replacement of the standard base, horizontal
axis, telescope frame, objective lens, LD lens frame, CX/LD with frame and mirror complete.
(1) Put the instrument in the temperature chamber. Start climatization at +50°C. Keep the
temperature for 1h.
(2) Reduce temperature to -30°C. Keep the temperature for 3 hours.
(3) Increase temperature to +70°C and keep this temperature for 3 hours.
(4) Reduce temperature to +25°C (room temperature) and wait at least 1 hour before
commencing the inspection.
temperature
70°C
50°C
25°C
at least 1h
-30°C
* 1h * 3h * 3h *
* time sufficient to avoid condensation of vapor in the instrument

Fig. 8-39
(5) Check the instrument double center (collimation) adjustment () section 2.2.18),
horizontality of horizontal axis (inclination) adjustment () section 2.2.19) and
positioning of the laser diode (LD) and receiving diode () section 8.1). If out of the
tolerance, readjust the instrument and recheck accuracy.
8-26
8.3 TCXO FREQUENCY CHECK

The TCXO frequency is checked in the factory and the measured value is stored in the EEPROM
on the ECPU board. The inspection below is intended only for confirmation of the original FTCXO
frequency input () section 8.3.2).
8.3.1 PREPARATION
Prepare the following tools and equipment to complete the adjustment:
• Ext. power supply & communication cable tool (ST-CX-01) and RS-232C
communication cable (DOC27)
• Computer with “1131edm-adj.xls” and “1131edm-adj.exe” program files
• Frequency counter (necessary only when you intend to measure the frequency and update
the originally memorized input)
" Ensure that the frequency counter is precisely adjusted and the timebase stability is better
than 1 x 10-7 / day. The counter should be equipped with at least 8-digit display.
(1) Connect the regulated DC power supply to the combined communications and power
source connector of the CX using the ext. power supply & communication cable tool.
8.3.2 CONFIRMATION
Example:
(1) Enter Service mode and select “EDM” in main menu. Counter *
Then select “Counter” mode and “Freq. Check”
service function. Press {ENT} key. Make sure that the Freq.Check
(37463470Hz)
FTCXO frequency originally input to the instrument
internal memory is within the tolerance:
37.463483MHz ± 75Hz
" The frequency is precisely checked and input in the
factory.
(2) Press {ESC} key to exit to “EDM” mode screen.
8-27
8.3.3 CHECK AND REGISTRATION

The frequency is precisely checked and registered in the factory and it is not necessary to
perform the procedures described in this section during the EDM unit overall inspection and
adjustment as well as in case of replacement of the ECPU board with a new one. Check the
frequency only for troubleshooting, if the EDM unit is faulty (e.g. baseline data is out of
standard).
(1) Remove the telescope upper cover () section 5.1.1).

(2) Connect the instrument to the computer and regulated DC power supply using the ext.
power supply & communication cable and RS-232C communication cable (DOC27).
(3) Connect the frequency counter to TP8 and GND
(TP1) on the ECPU board.
TP5
TP1
TP1
(GND)
TP8
Fig. 8-40
8-28
(4) Launch the “1131edm-adj.exe” communication program and open “1131edm-adj.xls”

file on the computer.
" Click “Enable macros” when the Excel file is being opened.
" In “SETTING” sheet confirm that the check box next to message “Use application for
adjustment” is selected. The instrument will communicate with the computer through
“1131edm-adj.exe” communication program.
1131edm-adj.exe 1131edm-adj.xls file

program screen for EDM adjustment
(5) Turn the instrument ON to apply Service mode () section 9.1). “1131edm-adj.exe”
communication interface program will show message “Service mode program starting”.
(6) Select “EDM” in main menu. Then set to “EDM <--->
PC” service function and press {ENT} key.
EDM <---> PC
(115200 bps)
8-29
(7) Click ⎡ECPU INIT⎦ tab on the computer screen to enter “ECPU INIT” Excel sheet.
Caution! Do not use ⎡Init. EEPROM⎦ and ⎡Init check⎦ buttons on the program screen.
(8) Click ⎡TCXO freq. meas⎦ button to output the TCXO signal. Record FTCXO frequency
measured by the frequency counter. Make sure that the frequency is within range of
37.463483MHz ± 75Hz (37463408~37463558 Hz).
Caution! Check the frequency in room temperature within range of 25° ± 2°C.
(9) Input manually the 8 digits of frequency noted in step (8) to the edit cell on the computer
screen (minimum input unit is 1 Hz) and press “ ” key of the computer keyboard.
(10) Click ⎡TCXO registration⎦ button. When the dialogue box “Overwrite TCXO
registration value” is displayed, click ⎡OK⎦ button.
(11) Click ⎡TCXO stop⎦ button. The program will return to the initial screen.
" The frequency memorized in the instrument can be confirmed by service function “Freq.
Check” in “Counter” mode of “EDM” service mode submenu () section 8.3.2).
37463483
TCXO freq. meas TCXO check
unit: Hz
È
37463483
TCXO registration TCXO check
unit: Hz
È
37463483
TCXO registration 37463466 TCXO check
unit: Hz
È
37463483
TCXO stop 37463466 TCXO check
unit: Hz
8-30
8.4 RETICLE ILLUMINATION CHECK

8.4.1 PREPARATION
(1) Connect the instrument to the computer and regulated DC power supply using the ext.
power supply & communication cable and RS-232C communication cable (DOC27).
(2) Enter Service mode and select “EDM” in main menu.
Then set to “EDM <---> PC” service function and
press {ENT} key. EDM <---> PC
(115200 bps)
(3) Launch the “1131edm-adj.exe” communication program and open “1131edm-adj.xls”

file on the computer.
" Click “Enable macros” when the Excel file is open.
(4) Click ⎡TCXO_SHUT_LD⎦ tab on the computer screen to enter “ATT_SHUT_LD”

Excel sheet.
8.4.2 CHECK
(1) Click ⎡Reticle LED ON⎦ button on the program screen and confirm visually through
the instrument eyepiece that the reticle illumination is turned ON.
(2) Click ⎡Reticle LED OFF⎦ button on the program screen and confirm visually through
the instrument eyepiece that the reticle illumination is turned OFF.
8-31
8.5 GUIDE LIGHT CHECK
8.5.1 PREPARATION
(1) Make sure that the instrument is connected to the computer and regulated DC power
supply.
(2) Confirm that the CX is set to “EDM <---> PC” service function of “EDM” service
mode.
(3) In “1131edm-adj.xls” Excel file select “ATT_SHUT_LD” sheet.
8.5.2 CHECK
(1) Click ⎡GL_ON⎦ button on the computer screen. Confirm that the green and red LEDs of
the guide light unit start blinking.
(2) Click ⎡GL_OFF⎦ button and confirm that the guide light is turned OFF.
8-32
8.6 SHUTTER OPERATION CHECK
8.6.1 PREPARATION
supply.
(2) Confirm that the CX is set to “EDM <---> PC” function of “EDM” service mode.
8.6.2 CHECK
(1) Click ⎡Shutter check⎦ button on the computer screen. Wait until the test is completed.
Make sure that the message outputted by the instrument is “OK” as shown by the
communication program “1131edm-adj”.
8-33
8.7 ATT OPERATION CHECK
8.7.1 PREPARATION
supply.
(3) Using “1131edm-adj.xls” Excel file select “ATT_SHUT_LD” sheet.
8.7.2 CHECK
(1) Click ⎡ATT check⎦ button on the program screen. Wait until the test is completed. Make
sure that “OK” message is shown by the communication program “1131edm-adj”.
8-34
8.8 CPU AND FPGA CHECK
8.8.1 PREPARATION
supply.
8.8.2 CHECK
(1) Click ⎡CHECKINFO⎦ button on the program screen. Wait until the test is completed.
Make sure that the instrument does not issue the error message: “RAM”, “MCU MODE”,
“FPGA”, “EEPROM PARAMETER” or “STACK OVERFLOW“ etc. as shown by the
communication program “1131edm-adj”. Confirm that finally message “NO ERROR” is
shown and the status is described by code “00,00” or “00,02”.
" If CPU or FPGA malfunction is detected, the further EDM adjustment cannot be carried
out.
8-35
8.9 ND FILTER UNIT (SOLENOID) OPERATION CHECK
8.9.1 PREPARATION
(1) Make sure that the guide light cover is removed () section 5.1.1).
(2) Confirm that the instrument is connected to the computer and regulated DC power
supply.
8.9.2 CHECK
(1) Click ⎡nd_out⎦ button on the computer screen. Check visually that the ND filter with slit
mask (solenoid unit) is set to OPEN position (i.e. the ND filter unit is moved upward and
set in the position above the laser beam MEAS path).
(2) Click ⎡nd_in⎦ button on the computer screen. Confirm that the ND filter with slit mask
(solenoid unit) is set to CLOSED position (i.e. the ND filter unit is placed in the laser
beam MEAS path).
8-36
8.10 LASER DIODE POWER ADJUSTMENT
8.10.1 PREPARATION
• LD power measure tool (S863-003 or S990-029)
• Optical sensor with the power meter
(1) Make sure that the guide light cover is removed () section 5.1.1).
(2) Confirm that the instrument is connected to the computer and regulated DC power
supply.
(5) Set the power meter for the wavelength of 690nm.
(6) Slightly turn the telescope from the horizontal position, so that the objective lens is
pointing upward.
8.10.2 ADJUSTMENT
(1) Install the power measurement tool with the
optical sensor onto the objective lens.
Fig. 8-41
8-37
(2) Click ⎡LD ON (Non-prism⎦ button on the computer screen. Rotate the LD power
measure tool to find the maximum power of the laser beam.
LD OFF Normal phase F11+F21+F31
LD OFF Reverse phase F11+F21+F41
(3) Click the buttons (Normal/Reverse phase buttons and frequency select buttons) in the
sequence shown above to select 6 combinations of the emitting beam and note the
measured laser power in each combination.
8-38
(4) Based on all measurements in step (3) select the

maximum output power and press the Normal/
Reverse phase buttons and frequency select
buttons to set to the combination featured by this
maximum power. Turn the variable resistor VR1
on the CX board (VR inside the shield case of the
CX/LD unit) to adjust the LD beam power to the
specified value:
4.29 ∼ 4.38mW when LD power measure tool
S863-003 (without lens) is
applied
4.15 ∼ 4.24mW when LD power measure tool VR1 on CX board for LD
S990-029 (with lens) is applied power (Non-prism) adjustment
(5) Turn the LD power OFF – click ⎡LD OFF⎦ button Fig. 8-42
on the computer screen.
(6) Remove the power measurement tool with the optical sensor from the objective lens.
8-39
8.11 REVERSE VOLTAGE (RV) ADJUSTMENT

The receiving diode of the CX is the avalanche photodiode (APD) and some cautions are required
for use.
Caution!
The sensitivity of APD can be changed by the applied voltage and temperature. Therefore this
adjustment must be completed under stable room temperatures (with variation of maximum
2°C over 30 minutes).
After replacement of the ECPU board or the PX board, this RV adjustment is required
(without the RV adjustment, APD might be broken).
After entering the “EDM” service mode wait about 2 minutes before performing the reverse
voltage (RV) adjustment.
All procedures of RV voltage adjustment, return signal gain adjustment and CAL signal
adjustment should be completed within 6 minutes after entering the “EDM” service mode.
Prevent any light from coming into the receiving diode, attach the telescope cap to the objective
lens.
8.11.1 PREPARATION
• Digital voltmeter (at least 5-digit, accuracy at least 0.1V at 100V)
(1) Confirm that the telescope upper cover is removed.
supply.
(3) Turn the instrument power OFF.
(4) Connect the digital voltmeter to TP3 on the ECPU board. Use TP1 as a GND terminal.
Range:
Digital voltmeter – 100∼200V DC
(5) Enter Service mode and select “EDM” in main menu. Then set to “EDM <---> PC”
service function and press {ENT} key. Wait about 2 minutes before starting adjustment.
8-40
(6) In “1131edm-adj.xls” Excel file select

“RV_TEMP” sheet.
TP3
TP5
TP1
TP1
(GND)
Fig. 8-43
8.11.2 RV OFFSET REGISTRATION

(1) Click ⎡RV OFFSET input⎦ button. Read the voltage at TP3 (around 50V) and input it
with resolution up to 0.1V in the “Input measurement value” edit box on the computer
screen. Then click ⎡OK⎦ button.
È
8-41
(2) After closing the dialogue box confirm that the voltage level read at TP3 is within
50.0±1.0V and click ⎡OK⎦ button in the displayed message box.
(3) Click ⎡OFFSET check⎦ button and confirm that voltage measured at TP3 is within
50.0±1.0V.
8-42
8.11.3 PX TEMPERATURE MEASUREMENT

(1) Click ⎡PX temp meas.⎦ button. Confirm the temperature measured by the temperature
sensor on the PX board. The temperature is normal if it is around 10°C higher than the
room temperature.
8.11.4 RV VOLTAGE ADJUSTMENT

" The originally memorized setting of the digital potentiometer (VR for NDOUT_F31 signal)
will be cleared in this step and the new value will be determined.
(1) Click ⎡Vbr measurement⎦ button and wait until Vbr voltage is confirmed. During
operation observe the digital voltmeter. More than 100V will be applied to the receiving
diode as measured by the digital voltmeter at TP3 terminal on the ECPU board. The
maximum noise level will be found. The Vbr voltage level, at which the IF noise reaches
the maximum level will be memorized in the EPCU board internal memory. The Vbr
voltage detected by the program will be displayed in the “meas. Result” cell.
" During adjustment observe the digital voltmeter (RV voltage) and the IF noise as output
from the instrument displayed by the communication program “1131edm-adj”. Confirm
Vbr when the IF noise is maximum.
Æ in progress ...
#P,E,m_lval,00,31,!,0000,0C
IF noise level A/D converter data

8-43
(2) When message box “memorize meas. result” is displayed, click ⎡Yes⎦ button and
confirm that the memorized value is displayed.
Vbr = 96.0V
8-44
(3) Click ⎡m_vb read⎦ button and confirm that the memorized value is displayed.
Vbr = 96.0V
(4) Remove the telescope cap from the objective lens.

8-45
8.12 GAIN ADJUSTMENT
8.12.1 PREPARATION
• EDM gain adjustment tool
supply.
(3) In “1131edm-adj.xls” Excel file select “GAIN” sheet.
(4) Install the EDM gain adjustment tool onto the CX telescope.
" The EDM gain adjustment tool must be
installed on the telescope with the side plates EDM gain
clasping the telescope frame and marking spot adjustment
() Fig. 8-44 and 8-45) facing the ECPU board tool
mounting side of the telescope frame.
marking spot marking

spot
side XXXX-
ECPU
plate reference
board
gain level
side plate
reference gain level

specified as XXXX Fig. 8-45
Fig. 8-44
8-46
8.12.2 ADJUSTMENT
(1) In the “1131edm-adj.xls” Excel file input manually the reference gain in the gain edit
box (cell B3 of Excel sheet) by the computer keyboard. The reference gain is specified
by the sticker attached to the EDM gain adjustment tool () Fig. 8-44 and 8-45)). Press
“ “ key of the computer keyboard.
(2) Click ⎡IF auto (non-prism)⎦ button on the computer screen and wait until gain
adjustment is completed. The digital voltmeters for the IF amplifiers for signals of the
specified frequencies in the reflectorless mode will be adjusted. Make sure that all results
of adjustments are determined by “OK” messages shown in the Excel sheet.
Æ in progress ...
Caution! Never click ⎡IF auto (non-prism)⎦ button when your workshop is not equipped with the
gain adjustment tool.
input manually in cell B3
reference gain level specified on
the EDM gain adjustment tool
È
8-47
(3) Click ⎡Check input value⎦ and confirm the memorized settings of the digital
potentiometers.
" The program checks the signal level for each frequency, when the signal is emitted in
normal and reverse phase. Higher value is selected for the setting of each digital
potentiometer and this setting is effective in both emitting modes: normal phase (N) and
reverse phase (R).
settings of digital potentiometers for the specified reflectorless mode IF gain
" If any value of the digital potentiometers exceeds 120, it cannot be input. Recheck the
optical light path adjustment (LD and receiving diode collimation) and reverse voltage
(RV) adjustment.
" The adjustment of the gain is carried out for signals of all frequencies with the following
settings:
• Position of ND filter with slit mask: open (NDOUT), the instrument is set to reflectorless
(non-prism) mode
• ATT filter position: fully open
• shutter position: MEAS
8-48
(4) Click ⎡IF check⎦ and note the signal level values for each frequency (signals will be
emitted in normal (N) phase). Next click ⎡Phase change⎦ button and again ⎡IF check⎦.
Note the signal level values for each frequency (signals will be emitted in reverse (R)
phase). Confirm that at least bigger signal within each pair of (N) and (R) signals is
within ±100 counts referring to the specified gain input (cell B3 of Excel sheet). Check
the signals of all frequencies.
(5) Click ⎡ATT_FO check⎦ and confirm that “OK” message is shown on the computer
screen.
(6) Remove the EDM gain adjustment tool from the CX objective lens.
8-49
8.13 CAL SIGNAL ADJUSTMENT

8.13.1 PREPARATION
supply.
(3) In “1131edm-adj.xls” Excel file select “GAIN” sheet.
8.13.2 ADJUSTMENT
• CAL fiber head position is adjusted to maximize the F111 CAL signal.
• CAL signal level is adjusted to the specified level of 1000 ± 50 by the CAL filter.
• ACAL adjustment is checked.
(1) Using “1131edm-adj.xls” Excel file make sure that “GAIN” sheet is selected.
(2) Click ⎡CAL/lval111⎦ button in the “1131edm-adj.xls” file sheet. Observing the CAL
signal level () the following page), loosen the CAL fiber head set screw (hexagonal
socket screw - ) the picture on the following page) and rotate the CAL fiber head in its
mounting base (the maximum rotation is approx. 120°). The range is limited by strong
force (tension) imposed on the fiber by the excessive fiber head rotation, which is not
acceptable for the EDM operation. Search for the maximum signal value, i.e., maximum
“lval” count in “1131edm-adj” program screen as the instrument output data. Set the
fiber head in the position featured by the maximum value of the signal and tighten the set
screw.
" If the displayed signal level value is more than 2000 or less than 500, rotate the CAL filters
() Fig. 8-46), so that the signal value is set temporary to 500∼600 counts. This operation
will assure enough range to search for the maximum signal by rotating the fiber head.
Æ
8-50
rotate the CAL fiber

to maximize the CAL shutter
signal level (“lval”) value motor
Three Bond
1401C
fixing screw
for CAL fiber head
8-51
Caution! Make sure that level value 1000 counts is input in

the edit box in the Excel sheet.
input: 1000
(3) Click ⎡NP_ACAL registration⎦ button in the “1131edm-adj.xls” file sheet.
(4) Using the hexagonal wrench loosen the

CAL filter fixing screw and turn the
CAL filters to adjust the CAL signal shutter
value (i.e. “lval” count in the motor
“1131edm-adj” program screen as the
instrument output data) to 1000 ± 50.
Three Bond
#P,E,m_lval,00,11,+,0990,xx 1401C
Using the hexagonal wrench tighten the
fixing screw without losing the
adjustment. Click ⎡Input value⎦ button
in the Excel sheet.
fixing screw
for CAL filters
Fig. 8-46
8-52
(5) When the dialogue box “Overwrite ACAL value’ is

displayed, click ⎡Yes⎦ button.
(6) Click ⎡Input value check⎦ button in the “1131edm-adj.xls” file sheet.
Confirm that “acal Coarse” and “acal Fine” average values are the same as “ACAL
memorized LVAL”, which was input in the edit box as shown above.
Answer from the instrument shown on the computer screen:
#P,E,m_acal,th,00,Coarse,1250, 750,A5
È
(1250+750)/2 = 1000
#P,E,m_acal,th,00,Fine,1030,970,CA
È
(1030+970)/2 = 1000
8-53
(7) When the CAL signal adjustment is completed successfully, perform ACAL check
function by pressing ⎡ACAL check⎦ button. Compare the RV voltages applied in
different EDM operation modes as shown by “1131edm-adj” program.
Å ACALOFF RV voltage
Å ACALONCE (NDOUT) RV voltage
Å ACALONCE (NDIN) RV voltage
Make sure that the differences between RV voltages for all ACAL modes: ACALOFF and
ACALONCE (prism and reflectorless mode) are within ±1V.
8-54
8.14 ATT LEVEL SETTING – CONFIRMATION
8.14.1 PREPARATION
• AP01AR prism
supply.
(3) In “1131edm-adj.xls” Excel file select “CONST” sheet.
8.14.2 CONFIRMATION
(1) Click ⎡Auto ATT check⎦ button in the Excel sheet and make sure that the signal level
automatically adjusted by the ALC unit (ATT filter) is within the tolerance of 600 ± 120.
. return signal level A/D converter data

8-55
8.15 ATT FULL BLOCK POSITION SETTING – CONFIRMATION
8.15.1 PREPARATION
• AP01AR prism
supply.
8.15.2 CONFIRMATION
(1) Click ⎡ATT FB check⎦ button in the Excel sheet. The ATT filter will be set to full block
position (opaque zone of the filter will be set in front of the receiving diode) and will
rotate all around. Make sure that no abnormal sound is heard during the ATT filter
rotation and that “OK” message is displayed by “1131edm-adj” program.
.
8-56
8.16 COINCIDENCE CONSTANT SETTING

8.16.1 PREPARATION
• AP01AR prism
supply.
(3) Using “1131edm-adj.xls” Excel file select “CONST” sheet.
8.16.2 SETTING
(1) Click ⎡coincidence set⎦ button in the Excel sheet. Observe the “1131edm-adj” program
screen and make sure that “OK” messages are outputted from the instrument after
coincidence constant setting.
8-57
8.17 COINCIDENCE CONSTANT CONFIRMATION

8.17.1 PREPARATION
• AP01AR prism and reflective sheet RS10N-K
supply.
8.17.2 CONFIRMATION
(1) Click ⎡Coincidence chk (P)⎦ button in the Excel sheet. Make sure that all coincidence
counts displayed continuously in “1131edm-adj” program screen are 0 or 1. Stop the
coincidence test by pressing ⎡;⎦ button.
Coincidence chk (P) Æ
8-58
(2) Sight the reflective sheet target at a distance of approximately 10m. Click ⎡Coincidence
chk (S)⎦ button in the Excel sheet. Make sure that all coincidence counts displayed
continuously in “1131edm-adj” program screen are 0 or 1. Stop the coincidence test by
pressing ⎡;⎦ button.
Æ
8-59
(3) Sight any reflectorless target at a distance of approximately 10m. Click ⎡Coincidence
chk (N)⎦ button in the Excel sheet. Make sure that all coincidence counts displayed
continuously in “1131edm-adj” program screen are 0 or 1. Stop the coincidence test by
pressing ⎡;⎦ button.
Coincidence chk (N) Æ

8-60
8.18 PHASE CHECK

8.18.1 PREPARATION
supply.
8.18.2 CONFIRMATION
(1) Click ⎡Phase meas⎦ button.
(2) Wait until the test is completed. Make sure that the return messages are “OK”.
" The difference between “Normal” and “Reverse” phase for signals modulated with F11 and
F12 should be 140° or more. (The result as output data from the instrument is shown in the
“1131edm-adj” communication program screen).
8-61
8.19 OPTICAL AND ELECTRICAL NOISE CORRECTION

CHECK AND REGISTRATION
8.19.1 PREPARATION
• EDM noise measurement tool
(1) Turn the instrument OFF and install both telescope upper cover and guide light cover
onto the telescope frame.
supply.
(3) Enter Service mode and select “EDM” in main menu. Then set to “EDM <---> PC”
service function and press {ENT} key.
(5) Turn the telescope to zenith position and attach the EDM noise measurement tool to the
objective lens so that the flat part of the tool collar is pointing towards the upper
telescope cover (ECPU board mounting side, telescope fine motion screw side).
" After inspection remove the tool from the objective lens and put the tool in a vinyl bag
or clean box to protect the tool from dust.
EDM noise measurement tool
flat surface of tool collar is pointing

towards the upper telescope cover
Fig. 8-47
8-62
8.19.2 CHECK AND REGISTRATION

" Make sure that the “IR tool offset” input in the edit box is “0” (as of January 2012).
IR tool offset 0 IR_ENOISE meas & write
(1) Warm up the instrument before commencing the test, i.e. wait at least 30 seconds after
entering the Service mode. Then click ⎡IR_ENOISE meas & write⎦ button.
(2) Wait until the measurement is completed and confirm that the return message displayed
by “1131edm-adj” communication program is “OK” (it takes about 4~5 minutes to
complete the measurement). The inspection data will be memorized in the internal
memory of the ECPU board.
" To stop measurement before completing the full operation, click ⎡;⎦ button. If “NG”
message is displayed as a result of the test, the updated noise correction parameters will
not be input to the instrument internal memory.
8-63
8.20 MISPOINTING ERROR CHECK

It is recommended to check the mispointing error during overall check of the EDM unit with
baseline. If the inspection is performed according to section 6.2.4, the procedures described below
can be omitted.
8.20.1 PREPARATION
• AP01AR prism
supply.
(4) Sight the prism at a distance of approximately 10m ± 0.5m (*50m ± 0.5m).
8.20.2 CONFIRMATION
(1) Click ⎡Mispoint Meas. (center)⎦ button in the Excel sheet. The measured distance will
be displayed in “dist.(m)” box.
Mispoint Meas.(center) dist. (m) 10.045 Mispoint (meas) within +/-4
(2) Take the series of 5 measurements sighting 4’ (*1’) out of the prism center to the right
side. Click ⎡Mispoint Meas.⎦ button and ⎡;⎦ button. The distance data will be shown in
the “1131edm-adj” communication program screen.
" If necessary, use service function “Running test” in Test” mode to observe the
horizontal angle “HA-R” display and change the horizontal angle by 4’ (*1’).
(3) Repeat the same procedure sighting out of the prism center 4’ (*1’) to the left side,
upward and downward. The difference between data taken in step (1) used as a reference
and steps (2) and (3) should be within ±4mm (*±1mm ).
8-64
" If necessary, use service function “Running test” in “Test” mode to observe the “HA-
R” and “ZA” display and change the horizontal angle and next vertical angle by 4’ (*1’).
" Using EDM service function “Fine”, take the average of 5 measurements. Repeat the same
procedure sighting out of the prism center *1’ in the upper-right direction (i.e. 1’ to the
right side and 1’ upward, lower-right, upper-left and lower-left). The difference between
data taken in step (3) and this step should be within * ±1.4mm (14 counts).
Sight out of the prism center *2’ upward, downward and in left and right direction.
Confirm that the instrument is able to measure the distance.
(*) - specification for Chinese market.
8.21 CHECKING THE DISTANCE MEASUREMENT IN

TRACKING MODE
8.21.1 PREPARATION
• AP01AR prism
supply.
8.21.2 CONFIRMATION
(2) Click ⎡DST (P) trk⎦ button in the Excel sheet. Take the series of 10 measurements or
more. Observing the “1131edm-adj” communication program screen make sure that the
instrument is able to measure the distance. Click ⎡;⎦ to stop measurement.
Æ
8-65
Sample data:
#P,E,DST,00,10.347647,+,0761,D3
#P,E,DST,00,10.347989,+,0767,E2
#P,E,DST,00,10.347375,+,0757,D6
#P,E,DST,00,10.346862,+,0774,D5
#P,E,DST,00,10.346152,+,0775,CE
#P,E,DST,00,10.347372,+,0780,CF
#P,E,DST,00,10.346497,+,0770,D5
#P,E,DST,00,10.346796,+,0772,D9
#P,E,DST,00,10.346025,+,0767,CE
#P,E,DST,00,10.346875,+,0779,DE
#P,E,;,A,E4
#P,E,;,00,,2F
(3) Sight the reflectorless target at a distance of approximately 10m.

(4) Click ⎡DST (N) trk⎦ button in the Excel sheet. Take the series of 10 measurements or
more. Observing the “1131edm-adj” communication program screen make sure that the
instrument is able to measure the distance. Click ⎡;⎦ to stop measurement.
Sample data:
#P,E,DST,00,10.347647,+,0761,D3
#P,E,DST,00,10.347989,+,0767,E2
#P,E,DST,00,10.347375,+,0757,D6
#P,E,DST,00,10.346862,+,0774,D5
#P,E,DST,00,10.346152,+,0775,CE
#P,E,DST,00,10.347372,+,0780,CF
#P,E,DST,00,10.346497,+,0770,D5
#P,E,DST,00,10.346796,+,0772,D9
#P,E,DST,00,10.346025,+,0767,CE
#P,E,DST,00,10.346875,+,0779,DE
#P,E,;,A,E4
#P,E,;,00,,2F
8-66
8.22 DEVICE CHECK
8.22.1 PREPARATION
supply.
8.22.2 CHECK
(1) Click ⎡ DEVCHECK⎦ button.
(2) Wait until the test is completed. Make sure that “NO ERROR” message is displayed as
the output from the instrument in the “1131edm-adj” communication program screen.
8-67
8.23 SAVING THE PARAMETERS

When all EDM adjustments have been complete, it is recommended to save in your computer the file
with the adjustment/inspection parameters. This information can be stored (text file) for any
reference.
8.23.1 PREPARATION
supply.
8.23.2 SAVING THE PARAMETER FILE

(1) Input the instrument serial No. in the “S/N” edit box and press “ ” key of the
computer keyboard. Click ⎡save parameter⎦ button, wait until ⎡end⎦ button is shown on
the screen. Click ⎡end⎦ to store the text file with information about all adjustment
parameters (e.g. “1131ecpu_rcv_log_20120113.txt). This file will be saved in the folder,
in which the “1131edm-adj.exe” file (communication program) is saved.
" The date is automatically added to the file name. If the EDM adjustment is carried out
several times during the same day, the following adjustment parameters will be added as
a text to the same file and the following data can be recognized by the instrument serial
number and time when the file was updated.
S/N BP0004 save parameter *if parameter store is complete

8-68
Caution! If any problem happens during adjustment procedures, stop the operation by the relevant
button in the Excel spreadsheet or close the Excel file without saving any changes.
Regardless of the inspection results always press ⎡No⎦ button when closing the Excel
file. When you start inspection and adjustment always use the original “1131edm-
adj.xls” file provided by Topcon Corp.
It is recommended to save the “1131edm-adj.xls” file as an additional backup copy.
8.24 EDM OVERALL CHECK

After adjustment of the EDM carry out the “Inspection of Distance Data with Baseline” - ) section
6.2.
9-1
9. SERVICE MODE
Set the CX to Service mode to perform checks and adjustments of the EDT and EDM units.
Submenu
Initialize
Default & Clear
V offset,ES,EL
Tilt offset
{ENT} ID
While holding {F1}, {F4} and ROM View
{FUNC} keys, press { } to Inst. flg
enter Service mode Clear password
Bluetooth
⇓ Date and time
TS_COMM
Service mode ...

EDM
{ENT} Constant
Counter
ATT.
EDM <---> PC
⇓
Main menu
Encoder,Tilt
Service Mode Select class
Initialize
EDM
{ESC} {ENT} Constant
Slit check
Encoder,Tilt Tilt
Test IACS
DT <---> PC
{}
Service Mode <L-Temp>

Initialize
EDM
Encoder,Tilt Test
Test Running test
{ENT} Display check
Key check
Battery check
The display may not be readable Media check
(contrast will be incorrect), if “Service
Mode <L-Temp>” is applied in the Laser plummet
instrument with the display complete
– standard model type
(and vice versa)
* “Bluetooth” function of “Initialize” menu and “Laser plummet” function of “Test” menu are
accessible only when “Bluetooth” and “L-Plummet” functionality of “Inst. flg” menu are set
respectively to “WT” and “Yes”. “IACS” function is not accessible in CX-103. “TS_COMM”
is accessible only in the instruments with TSshield functionality.
9-2
Service Mode Submenu (Service Function)

Default & clear
V offset, ES, EL
Tilt offset
ID
ROM view
Instrument flag
Initialize
Clear password
Bluetooth Initialize Device
View Setting
BT <---> PC
Date and time
TS_COMM: Device Information
TS_COMM<--->PC
Constant
Counter
EDM
ATT.
EDM <---> PC
Select class
Constant
Slit check
Encoder, Tilt
Tilt
IACS
DT <---> PC
Running test
Display check
Key check
Test
Battery check
Media check
Laser plummet (option)
9-3
9.1 SERVICE MODE SETTING

(1) Confirm that the instrument is turned OFF. While holding {F1}, {F4} and {FUNC} keys,
press { } to enter Service mode.
(2) Select the required service function and carry out the respective setting or inspection.
{ T } or { S } - press until the respective service mode in main menu is selected. Details
of the items are explained on pages 9-1 and 9-2
{ENT} - press to display submenu of the selected service mode
{ T } or { S } - press until the respective service function of submenu is highlighted.
Details of the items are explained in table on page 9-2
{ENT} - press to display the selected service function
{ESC} - press to return to the previously selected display
(3) After adjustment and (or) inspection of the instrument, press { } key and hold about 1
second to turn the power OFF.
9-4
9.2 SERVICE FUNCTIONS
9.2.1 INITIALIZE MODE

Initialize submenu
Initialize
Default & Clear
V offset,ES,EL
Tilt offset
ID
ROM View
Inst. flg
Clear Password
Bluetooth
Date and time
TS_COMM
" “Bluetooth” function is accessible only when the Bluetooth unit is installed in the
instrument and the “Bluetooth” option of “Initialize” Æ “Inst. flg” service function is
set to “WT”.
(1) DCPU initialization
Selected parameters and data settings are initialized. After replacement of the DCPU board,
this function must be performed to get the default settings: EDM setting, Config mode setting
(including softkey arrays) and clearing the data ROM (initialization of the user data: data
within all jobs, known point data within memory and code data within memory).
(a) Select service function “Default & Clear”.

Default set
(b)Confirm the display and if necessary press {ENT} to &
start DCPU initialization. Clearing memory...
Caution! If any user data is input to the instrument, it will Press <ENT> start
be erased from the memory when this function is
performed. To exit to the “Initialize” mode submenu È
without default setting and clearing the memory,
press {ESC}. Default set
&
Clearing memory...
End !
9-5
(2) Vertical 0 point offset input
The vertical 0 point offset along with offset for the errors of collimation (double center) - EL
and horizontality of horizontal axis (inclination, height of standard) - ES are measured and
memorized in the internal memory of the instrument.
(a) Select service function “V offset, ES, EL”.

(b) Collimate the collimator C in face left (F1) and press Target C Face1
[OK]. ZA 51°58’45”
HAR 120°53’39”
Fix data by (OK)
0 S E T oO K o
(c) Collimate the collimator D in face left (F1) and press

[OK].
Target D Face1
ZA 121°55’41”
HAR 120°54’05”
Fix data by (OK)
0 S E T oO K o
(d) Collimate the collimator C in face right (F2) and press

[OK]. Target C Face2
ZA 303°01’57”
HAR 300°53’49”
Fix data by (OK)
0 S E T oO K o
(e) Collimate the collimator D in face right (F2) and press

[OK]. Target D Face2
ZA 233°05’02”
HAR 300°54’00”
Fix data by (OK)
0 S E T oO K o
(f) Press {ENT} to memorize the new vertical 0 point V offset,ES,EL

offset along with ES and EL offset data. Press {ESC} ES: -0°00’05”
EL: -0°00’01”
to exit without memorizing the offset data. V Offs: 1° 3 0 ’ 2 1 ”
" If the calculation data of ES and EL is out of range Confirm data (ENT)
specified by software (20”), the message “Out of
range” is shown on the lower line of display and offset
cannot be input to the memory.
9-6
(3) Tilt offset

The tilt angle data measured by the X-Y tilt sensor in the X and Y direction is displayed. While
performing this function, the tilt offset is calculated by the program and stored in the internal
memory of the instrument (DCPU board).
(a) Select service function “Tilt offset”.

(b) Precisely level the instrument, so that the face left (F1) and face right (F2) tilt
indications differ no more than ±2 counts (i.e. the levelling is within 2”). Make sure
that the average data in the X and Y directions is within ±2400 counts (i.e. within
±40’).
(c) Press [0SET]. When the horizontal angle becomes 0
as shown on the display and the tilt data becomes Face 1
X = 1277
steady, press [OK] and turn the upper part of the Y = 980
instrument through 180°00’00” ± 1’ according to the H A - R 212° 1 0 ’ 1 4 ”
Fix data by (OK)
display. 0 S E T oO K o
" If collimator is used during setting procedure, the offset
can be input while sighting collimator in face left (F1) Face 1
and face right (F2) without reading the horizontal X = 1277
Y = 980
angle. HA-R 0°00’00”
Fix data by (OK)
0 S E T oO K o
(d) When the tilt data becomes steady press [OK].
Face 2
X = 1279
Y = 978
HA-R 180°00’05”
Fix data by (OK)
0 S E T oO K o
(e) Make sure that the X and Y tilt offset is within ±2400
Tilt offset
counts (i.e. within ±40’). Press {ENT} to memorize X = 1278
the new offset data. Y = 979
" If any problem occurs during the setting procedure,

press {ESC} to exit without memorizing the offset data Confirm data (ENT)
and repeat the offset setting again.
9-7
(4) Instrument type and serial No.

After replacement of the DCPU board, input the instrument serial No. and confirm the
instrument type.
ID
(a) Select service function “ID” and confirm the display. A
Serial No.: AB1234
(b) Toggle between “Serial No.” and “Type” using { T } or Type:CX-105
{ S } key.
o OKo
(c) Use the following keys to input the serial number:
{ X} press to move the cursor from left to right (and then from the end to
the beginning)
{W } press to move the cursor from right to left (and then from the
beginning to the end)
{ A }, …, { Z },
{ 0 }, …, { 9 } press the respective alphanumeric keys to input the instrument serial
number
{SHIFT} press to toggle between alphabetic input characters (A is displayed on
the screen) and numeric input characters (1 is displayed on the screen)
Caution! The instrument serial No. can be input only once in the brand new DCPU board. When
[OK] key is pressed the currently selected serial No. will be permanently fixed and
will not be editable any more. Be very careful to confirm the correct input before
pressing [OK] key.
(d) The instrument type is not selectable by the Service mode. Each type of the DCPU
board has different part code depending on the instrument type.
Instrument type preset in the factory: CX-101 / CX-102 / CX-103 / CX-105 / CX-107
(e) When setting is completed, press [OK] key to input ID
the selection to the instrument internal memory. A
Serial No.: AB1234
Type:CX-105
o OKo
9-8
(5) ROM view

The internally memorized data is displayed as follows:
Type: instrument type
S/N: instrument serial number
DT App.: DT application software version
Japanese version: 1-1.**JP
English version: 1-1.**EN
Chinese version: 1-1.**CN
Korean version: 1-1.**KR
special version: 1-5.**
DT Alib: Angle library software version (1.**)
DT FPGA: DT FPGA ROM version (000-*)
DT PCB: DCPU board type (version) (1 digit)
EDM App. EDM software version (9-1.**)
EDM FPGA: EDM FPGA ROM version (001-*)
EDM PX: PX board type (version) (1 digit)
EDM PCB: EDM board type (version) (1 digit)
ES/EL/V Offs: offset for the inclination error (horizontality of horizontal axis) – ES,
offset for the collimation error – EL, the vertical 0 point offset
X/Y: tilt offset (setting in Service mode / setting in User mode)
(a) Select service function “ROM View” and confirm the Type: :CX-10*
display. S/N :******
DT App. :*.**
DT Alib :*.**
(b) Press { T } or { S } to move between the 2 screens of DT FPGA :000-*
“ROM View” function. DT PCB :*
(c) Press {ESC} to return to “Initialize” mode submenu.

EDM App: :9-1.***
EDM FPGA:001-*
EDM PX :*
EDM PCB :*
ES : *°**’**”
EL : *°**’**”
V Offs : *°**’**”
Tilt offset
input in Service X = **** ****
mode Y = **** ****
Tilt offset input in user mode

9-9
(6) Instrument flag

Availability and options of several instrument functions can be selected and memorized in the
internal memory as the “instrument flags”.
(a) Select service function “Inst. flg” and confirm the display.
(b) Move between the displayed items using { T }or Inst. flag
{ S } key. Media : Yes
Key define : Free
(c) Select options of the respective items using { X } or Guide light : Yes
--------- : ---
{ W } key. o OKo
" The following options are available for the displayed
items: Inst. flag
Media: Yes* / No --------- : ---
Bluetooth : No
“Yes” is the standard setting for the BT Power : Norm
instrument equipped with the IF board Russia : No
o OKo
(external interface) with the USB port
Key define: Free* / Hold
When “Free” is selected, user can Inst. flag
Contrast : Norm
allocate the key functions in Config. L-plummet : No
mode according to his requirements.
When “Hold” is selected, the keyboard o OKo
functions cannot be changed. In this case
only one setting for the key functions is
available.
Guide light: Yes* / No
“Yes” is the standard setting for the instrument equipped with the guide
light
--------- ---
--------- ---
Bluetooth: WT / No*
Select “WT” when the Bluetooth unit is installed in the instrument
BT Power: Norm* / Low
Select “Low” for the setting of the Bluetooth power in the instruments
exported to the designated markets
Russia: No* / Yes
Select “Yes” for the instruments manufactured for the Russian market
Contrast: Norm* / L-tmp
Select “L-tmp” for contrast setting of the Low Temperature Models
L-plummet: No* / Yes
Select “Yes” when the optional laser plummet is installed in the
instrument
* standard factory setting
9-10
(7) Clear password

User defined password can be cleared.
(a) Select service function “Clear Password”.
(b) Press {ENT} to clear any existing password.
Beep sounds and display returns to the previous
screen. Clear Password...
Press <ENT> start
(8) Bluetooth
When the instrument is equipped with the Bluetooth unit and Inst.flag
“Bluetooth” availability is set to “WT” by service function Clear Password
“Initialize” Æ “Inst. flag”, select “Bluetooth” in “Initialize” Bluetooth
Date and time
mode and press {ENT}. TS_COMM
(a) Select service function “Initialize Device” in

“Bluetooth” screen and press {ENT}. Bluetooth
" “Initialize Device” function should be performed after Initialize Device
View Setting
installation of the Bluetooth module in the instrument BT <–––> PC
when “Bluetooth” in “Initialize” Æ “Inst.Flg” mode
is set to “WT”.
The Bluetooth device initialization is carried out in 19
Bluetooth Device
steps. The progress is shown on the screen. Make sure Initializing…
that “OK” message is finally displayed on the bottom
line of the screen. 01 of 19
…
Bluetooth Device
Initializing…
19 of 19
After initialization press {ESC} key. OK

9-11
(b) Select “View Setting” and press {ENT} key. Module:WT41

F/W:*.*.*build ***
BD_ADDR:
Module: Bluetooth module name *************
F/W: Firmware version Passkey:
BD_ADDR: Bluetooth unit address ****
Passkey: Passkey
Name: Instrument name and serial number Name:
CX-10* ******
Power: Device mode Power : Normal
Press {ESC} key to exit to “Bluetooth” screen.
(c) Select “BT <---> PC” in “Bluetooth” screen and

BT THROUGH MODE
press {ENT}. CX-’s
Through mode will be applied to Bluetooth unit. The BT <–––> PC
Device
request commands can be sent from the computer via RTS=Act, CTS=Act
serial port of the instrument. 0 R TS (115200bps) o T_ o
(Baud rate between the instrument and computer is

115200bps, baud rate between the instrument and
Bluetooth is 38400bps). BT THROUGH MODE
CX-’s
BT <–––> PC
Device
RTS=InA, CTS=InA
0 R T S ( 1 1 5 2 0 0 b p s ) oT ‫ן ן ן‬
(9) Date and time

The CX has an internal clock that maintains the correct date
and time. This service function is used to set the system date Date and time
and time.
Date: 12032011
(a) Select service function “Date and time”. Toggle Time: 11:25:33
between “Date” and “Time” using { T } or { S } key. Press <ENT> start
Date: Manually input date (format MMDDYYYY), e.g.

Date and time
December 3, 2011 is input as “12032011”. Press { T }
key or {ENT} key. Date: Dec/03/2011
Time: 14:43:59
2:43:59 pm is input as “144359”.
Press {ENT} key.
" Date and time can be set either in Service mode or in User mode.
9-12
(10) TS_COMM
The information stored in the DCPU board about TSshield TS-COMM
unit can be confirmed when the instrument is equipped Device information
with the TSshield functionality. TS-COMM <–––> PC
(a) Select service function “Device information” in

“TS-COMM” screen and press {ENT} key.
Name: TSshield device name Device information
S/N: Serial number of TSshield device Name:TR3GHW (3G)
SIM: ID of SIM card S/N:052E7020
SIM ID:89310846110
12881042
0V e r . oOKo
Press [Ver.] key to display firmware version of the

Version information
TSshield unit. FW:0.0.1.40
(b) Select service function “TS-COMM <–––> PC” in

“TS-COMM” screen and press {ENT} key.
By receiving external request command the TSshield
unit can communicate with the computer through TS-COMM <–––> PC
serial port in the instrument. (Baud rate between the
instrument and computer is 115200bps). (115200bps)
9-13
9.2.2 EDM MODE

In EDM “Counter” and “ATT.” service mode, the status of ACAL
EDM * control loop ON/OFF is indicated by asterisk mark “*”.
Constant If ACAL is ON, asterisk mark is displayed. If ACAL is OFF, RVC
Counter circuit is deactivated and asterisk mark is not displayed.
ATT.
EDM <---> PC
If the instrument is turned ON either in User mode or Service
mode, initially ACAL is always automatically switched ON, i.e.
RVC circuit is automatically activated during distance
measurement.
(1) Constant
The mechanical constant MC (offset for F1 = 75MHz) can be checked and input to the
internal memory, while using the prism (MC0), or reflective sheet (MC1) or reflectorless
mode (MC2) for distance measurement. Additionally coincidence constant CC: CC21, CC31,
CC12, CC22 and CC32 – offset for distance measured by the signals modulated with several
different frequencies can be checked and input to the instrument memory.
(2) Select “Constant” in “EDM” service mode and
EDM *
confirm the display. Constant
Counter
ATT.
(3) Move between the constants and screens using { T }or EDM <---> PC
{ S } key or press {ENT} key to move to the next
constant.
(4) For the MC numeric input, use the following function keys:
Example:
{ X } press to move cursor from left to right and then
Constant
from the end to the beginning MC0 : -50.1mm
{ W } press to move cursor from right to left and then MC1 : -51.2mm
from the beginning to the end MC2 : -51.8mm
[ 0 ], …, [ 9 ], [ +/-] press the [+/-] key and numeric keys
to input + or – sign and the respective
constant value
(5) Press {ENT} to move to the next MC constant and finally when MC2 is highlighted,
press {ENT} again to input the selected constant to the instrument internal memory. The
instrument will exit to “EDM” mode screen.
" Press {ESC} to exit to “EDM” mode screen without inputting the new constant data.
Caution! Only when the last setting (MC2) is highlighted and {ENT} key is pressed, all recently
selected data are input to the internal memory (double beep sounds).
9-14
" When MC2 setting is highlighted and { T } key is Example:

pressed the coincidence constant “CCxx” screen is Constant
displayed. The coincidence constant can be measured, CC21: 10mm
calculated and automatically input to the EEPROM CC31: 211mm
CC12: 2mm
memory on the EDM-CPU board, while sighting the
prism AP01AR at a distance within range 5∼30m. To MEAS
start the measurement press [MEAS] key. When the
measurement is completed, “Finished” message is Constant
CC22: 11mm
displayed. Press {ESC} key to exit to “EDM” mode CC32: 48mm
screen. The updated coincidence constant will be
stored in the instrument internal memory. When the
measurement is not completed successfully, “Fail”
message will be displayed and the originally
memorized coincidence constant will remain in the instrument.
(6) Counter
Specified data of the EDM unit is displayed.
FUNCTION MEANING DISPLAY
Coincidence test for the selected PF: 00000∼99999
measurement modes is performed: PF – prism NF: 000∼999
Matching
fine mode, NF – reflectorelss fine mode and NT: 000~999
NT – reflectorless tracking mode
RVC (reverse voltage control) circuit “OK”
ACAL-ON
automatically activated by CPU (function setting ON)
RVC (reverse voltage control) circuit “OK”
ACAL-OFF
deactivated (function setting ON)
F1 (F11) CAL measurement carried out in 0∼2048
ACAL mode, 12bit A/D converter data of
ACAL-CONT
peak to peak CAL signal level (voltage level
(p-p) / 2) displayed
12bit A/D converter data of MEAS signals 0∼2048
(voltage level (p-p) / 2) displayed (calculation data, in some
Signal Lv.(M)
cases when amplitude is high
it can exceed 2048)
12bit A/D converter data of CAL signals 0∼2048
(voltage level (p-p) / 2) displayed (calculation data, in some
Signal Lv.(C)
cases when amplitude is high
it can exceed 2048)
“OK”
LD Adjust. Laser diode output power ON
(function setting ON)
TCXO frequency registered in the CX 37463xxxHz
Freq. check
internal memory displayed
Fine P Distance measurement in prism fine mode 0.1mm
Rapid P Distance measurement in prism rapid mode 0.1mm
Tracking P Distance measurement in tracking mode 0.1mm
9-15
Press { S } or { T } to change the service function displayed.

Press {ENT} to start measurement. Press any key, except {} key to stop measurement and
retain the same EDM service function display.
Press {ESC} to transfer from “Counter” mode to “EDM” mode submenu.
Matching
The coincidence test for the distance measured by the signals modulated with different
frequencies is performed. Make sure that all coincidence counts are 0 or 1.
[CHG] press to change mode: PF (prism fine mode), NP (reflectorless fine mode) and NT
(reflectorless tracking mode). Sight the respective target accordingly: prism or
reflectorless target.
Counter * Counter * Counter *
Matching PF Matching NF Matching NT

( ––––– ) ( ––––– ) ( ––––– )
ENT to start CHG ENT to start CHG ENT to start CHG
⇓ ⇓ ⇓
Matching PF Matching PF Matching PF

( 00000 ) ( 001 ) ( 010 )
ENT to start CHG ENT to start CHG ENT to start CHG
ACAL-ON
ACAL–ON - RVC circuit is switched ON (it is automatically Counter *
activated by CPU.
ACAL-ON
When {ENT} key is pressed, “OK” is shown on the screen, ( ––––– )
asterisk mark “ * ” is displayed in the upper right corner
ENT to start
and the RVC (reverse voltage control) circuit function is set
to ON (it is standard setting of the EDM unit when the CX ⇓
is turned ON either in User mode or in Service mode).
Counter *
ACAL-ON
OK
ENT to start
9-16
ACAL-OFF
RVC (reverse voltage control) function is deactivated, i.e. Counter *
RVC circuit is switched OFF.
When {ENT} key is pressed, “OK” is shown on the ACAL-OFF
( ––––– )
screen, asterisk mark “ * ” is no longer displayed in
the upper right corner and the RVC circuit function is ENT to start
set to OFF. ⇓
Counter
ACAL-OFF
OK
ENT to start
ACAL-CONT
F1 (F11) signal level measurement in ACAL mode is Counter *
carried out. RVC (reverse voltage control) circuit loop is
ACAL-CONT
working continuously. ( ––––– )
F1 ACAL signal level 12bit A/D converter data is
E N T t o ⇓s t a r t
displayed.
" The asterisk mark “ * ” is shown on the display Counter *
depending on the previous selection of ACAL ACAL-CONT
function (if the ACAL OFF was set in advance, the ( 0980 )
asterisk mark will not be displayed, while ACAL-
CONT service function is performed).
Sig Lv. (M)

12bit A/D converter data of the MEAS signal levels
Counter *
(voltage level (p-p) /2) for different modulation frequencies
is displayed. Sig Lv.(M)
( ––––– )
" “Signal Lv. (M)” function can be used, while
ENT to start
sighting the prism, or reflective sheet, or
reflectorless target. ⇓
[IN] press to select CLOSED position of the emitting Counter *
beam attenuator (ND filter with slit mask) F11:0597 F12:0593
F21:0581 F22:0592
[OUT] press to select OPEN position of the emitting F31:0577 F32:0586
F41:0576
beam attenuator (ND filter with slit mask) IN OUTa
" Currently inactive setting of the emitting beam

attenuator (ND filter with slit mask) is highlighted.
9-17
Sig Lv. (C)

12bit A/D converter data of the CAL signal levels (voltage Counter *
level (p-p) /2) for different modulation frequencies is
displayed. Sig Lv.(C)
( ––––– )
ENT to start
⇓
Counter *
F11:0918 F12:0912
F21:0885 F22:0896
F31:0885 F32:0880
F41:0858
LD Adjust
The ND filter of the emitting beam attenuator is set to Counter *
OPEN position and the LD is turned ON
LD Adjust.
" “LD Adjust.” function is provided for the laser diode ( ––––– )
collimation adjustment. ENT to start
Press {ENT} to perform this function. Laser diode will ⇓

be turned ON, “OK” will be displayed.
Counter *
Press {ENT} again to set the ND filter of the emitting
LD Adjust.
beam attenuator to CLOSED position and retain the OK
same “LD Adjust.” function. “ENT to start” will be
displayed again.
⇓
While “LD Adjust” function is carried out, press
Counter *
{ESC} to return to the “EDM” service mode
submenu, or press { S } or { T } keys to change the LD Adjust.
service function displayed. OK
ENT to start
Freq. check
After pressing {ENT} key the displayed frequency can be Counter *
verified by the special tool attached to the objective lens.
This function is not used for servicing of the CX. Freq. Check
( ––––– )
ENT to start
⇓
Counter *
Freq.Check
(37463470Hz)
9-18
Fine
The distance measured in fine mode is displayed. The Counter *
minimum display is 0.1mm.
Fine P
" The displayed result includes MC, CC correction (MC, ( ––––– )
CC stored in the memory) and does not include ppm ENT to start
and PC correction (ppm=0, PC = 0).
Press {ENT} to start and stop measurement. ⇓
Counter *
Fine P
Press {SHIFT} key to toggle between prism mode ( 6.1234m)
(“Fine P”), reflective sheet mode (“Fine S”) and
reflectorless mode (“Fine N”).
Fine P Fine S Fine N

( ––––– ) ( ––––– ) ( ––––– )
ENT to start ENT to start ENT to start
Rapid
The distance measured in rapid mode is displayed. The Counter *
minimum display is 0.1mm. Rapid P
Counter *
Rapid P
(“Fine P”), reflective sheet mode (“Fine S”) and ENT to start
reflectorless mode (“Fine N”).
Rapid P Rapid S Rapid N

( ––––– ) ( ––––– ) ( ––––– )

9-19
Tracking
The distance measured in tracking mode is displayed. The Counter *
minimum display is 0.1mm.
Tracking P
Counter *
Tracking P
(“Fine P”), reflective sheet mode (“Fine S”) and
reflectorless mode (“Fine N”). ENT to start
Tracking P Tracking S Tracking N

( ––––– ) ( ––––– ) ( ––––– )
(7) ATT.
The receiving beam attenuator (ATT filter) position can be adjusted step by step. The levels of
signals modulated with each frequency can be checked, while the ATT filter is set to the fixed
position or adjusted automatically by the instrument. The status of the ATT filter setting can be
confirmed.
(a) Select “ATT.” in EDM service mode. Close<-->Open *
(b) Press { T }or { S } key to move the cursor up or down Full motion <-->
and select function to be applied. Coarse motion <-->
Fine motion <-->
(c) When “Coarse motion” or “Fine motion” is selected, F U L B STAT LVEL S I G
press { X } to turn the receiving beam attenuator (ATT

filter) to increase PX.SIG level (OPEN) or { W } to turn
the filter to lower PX.SIG level (CLOSE). When “Full motion” is selected, the ATT
filter will be placed in the fully OPEN position at single touch of { X } key ({ X } key
can be pressed several times and this action will not change the filter setting).
When “Full motion” is selected, the ATT filter will be placed in the fully CLOSED
position at single touch of { W } key ({ W } key can be pressed several times and this
action will not change the filter setting).
If { S } key is pressed while “Full motion” function is Close<-->Open *
highlighted, or { T } key is pressed while “Fine ATT. Motion FIX0
motion” function is highlighted, additional “ATT. Full motion <-->
Coarse motion <-->
Motion” function is shown on the upper line. Press Fine motion <-->
{ X } or { W } key to toggle between (Fix) and F U L B STAT LVEL S I G
(Free) mode of the ATT filter – attenuator position
will be automatically selected by the instrument in
(FREE) mode, attenuator will be fixed to the current setting in (FIX) mode.
9-20
Default setting of the receiving beam attenuator is FIX mode.
[FULB] press to set the full opaque zone of the ATT filter in front of the receiving
diode (APD).
[STAT] press to display the status of the current ATT filter setting.
PI: photo interrupter (ALC sensor) signal is
Close<-->Open
measured referring to the current position of
the ATT filter PI : 1018
STEP : 116
Step: step count of the ATT motor STATUS : F UL L BL OC K
BACK
Status: “Full Block” (step count: 116∼126) Æ
“Full Close” (step count: 313∼318) Æ
“Normal” Æ “Mispoint” Æ “Full Open” (step count: 1585∼1600) depending on
the position of ATT filter as referred to the receiving diode (position of the filter
is detected by counting the steps of the ATT motor)
[LVEL] press to display the 12bit A/D converter
data of the MEAS signal levels (voltage F11:0388 F12:0365
level (p-p) /2) for the different modulation F21:0376 F22:0348
F31:0399 F32:0396
frequencies at the specified ATT filter F41:0358
setting. IN OUTa
[IN] press to select CLOSED position of the emitting beam attenuator

(ND filter with slit mask)
[OUT] press to select OPEN position of the emitting beam attenuator
(ND filter with slit mask)
" Currently inactive setting of the emitting beam attenuator (ND filter with the
slit mask) is highlighted.
[SIG] Press [SIG] to start the F1 (F11) MEAS Close<-->Open *

signal level measurement. The 12bit A/D Signal Lv.: 310
converter data will be displayed. Full motion <-->
Coarse motion <-->
Press [OFF] to stop measurement of signal Fine motion <-->
level and retain main screen of “ATT.” F U L B STAT LVEL O F F
service function or {ESC} to exit to “EDM”
service mode submenu.
(8) EDM<--->PC
By receiving an external request command the EDM unit

can communicate with the computer, e.g. for the Service
mode performance and data input / output. EDM <---> PC
" While setting the communication parameters of the

(115200 bps)
computer, set the baud rate to 115200bps.
9-21
9.2.3 ENCODER, TILT MODE

Encoder,Tilt DT <---> PC
Select class
Constant
Slit check
Tilt
IACS
The screens as shown above are displayed, if the angle parameters (IACS function) are not input to
the DCPU internal memory.
Encoder,Tilt (HV) DT <---> PC (HV)

Select class The angle parameters (IACS
Constant
Slit check function) for both horizontal
Tilt and vertical encoders have
IACS
been input to the DCPU
internal memory
Encoder,Tilt (H) DT <---> PC (H)
Constant
Slit check function) only for horizontal
Tilt encoder have been input to the
IACS
DCPU internal memory
Encoder,Tilt (V) DT <---> PC (V)

Constant function) only for vertical
Slit check
Tilt encoder have been input to the
IACS DCPU internal memory
(1) Select class
The grade of the horizontal and vertical encoder as well as the type of the detectors (single/
double) determined by the instrument type are displayed.
(a) Set to “Select class” in “Encoder, Tilt” mode.
Confirm that the proper instrument class Select class
representing the instrument type is displayed and Class 5(V=1,H=1)

press [OK] key.
CX-101: Class 1(V=2,H2), double detector OKi
CX-105: Class 5(V=1,H1), single detector (in Low Temperature Models double
detectors are installed, but they are recognized and used as a single
detectors)
CX-107: Class 7(V=1,H1), single detector (in Low Temperature Models double
detectors are installed, but they are recognized and used as a single
detectors)
9-22
(2) Constant
The initially unsettled or updated constant data of the horizontal and (or) vertical encoders is
mathematically calculated and input to the internal memory.
unit and assembling of the instrument and after replacement of the DCPU board.
" Before starting procedures, install in the instrument both side covers and both display
units to prevent any light coming from outside into the encoder unit.
(a) Select “Constant” in “Encoder, Tilt” mode.
CX-101/CX-102/CX-103 CX-105/CX-107
Constant Constant
Select encoder Select encoder

V:ST=2 V:ST=1
H:ST=2 H:ST=1
O H i OV i O H i OV i
(b) Press [H] key to carry out the constant calculation and Constant
input for the horizontal encoder.
H :1/4
(c) While the standard base is set to any position, press HA-R 194°00’00”
>>> <<<
[OK] to memorize the initial encoder data. OKi
The short beep sounds and the horizontal angle display
is automatically reset (HA-R becomes 0°00’00”). The Constant
instrument is ready for the 2nd position data reading.
H :2/4
HA-R 0°00’00”
OKi
" If the side cover(s) is not installed and any light is
coming from outside and influencing the CMOS Constant
sensor output signal, the error code or “ERR: CCD
Adjust.” message is displayed. Protect the encoder by H :1/4
ERR:CCD Adjust.
cover and repeat the procedures from the beginning.
OKi
(d) Turn the standard base 90° ± 10° referring to the
display of the horizontal angle. Constant
" The correct angular setting is indicated by the
H :2/4
“>>> <<<” mark shown at the lower part of the HA-R 93°00’00”
display. >>> <<<
OKi
" To complete all procedures instrument can be rotated
either clockwise or counterclockwise. ⇓
Constant
(e) Press [OK] to memorize the encoder data.
The short beep sounds and the instrument is ready H :3/4
HA-R 93°00’00”
for the 3rd position data reading.
OKi
9-23
(f) Turn the standard base 90° (within 180 ± 10° from Constant
the initial setting) referring to the display of the
horizontal angle. H :3/4
HA-R 178°00’00”
" The correct angular setting is indicated by “>>> >>> <<<
OKi
<<<” mark shown at the lower part of the display.
(g) Press [OK] to memorize the encoder data. ⇓
Constant
The short beep sounds and the instrument is ready for
the 4th position data reading. H :4/4
HA-R 178°00’00”
OKi
(h) Turn the standard base 90° (within 270 ± 10° from
Constant
the initial setting) referring to the display of the
horizontal angle. H :4/4
HA-R 274°00’00”
" The correct angular setting is indicated by “>>> >>> <<<
<<<” mark shown at the lower part of the display. OKi
(i) Confirm that the buzzer sounds twice and “OK !!” ⇓
message is displayed. The encoder constant data are Constant
calculated and input to the instrument internal H :4/4
memory. Press [OK] to return to “Encoder, Tilt” HA-R 274°00’00”
mode. Calculating...
OKi
Constant
H :4/4
OK !!
OKi
" If the calculation of the constant data cannot be
completed successfully, long beep sounds and the Constant
error code is displayed.
H :4/4
E:***(***) ***(***)
Sample error code display: OKi
E:623(623) 623(623)
E:623(623) 623(623)
error code corresponding to the reading of H2 – right side detector
error code corresponding to the reading of H1 – left side detector

9-24
E:623(623) 623(623)
" While performing the constant setting function, press {ESC} at any stage to exit to
“Encoder, Tilt” submenu screen without calculation and input of the new constant data.
(j) Select service function “Constant” in “Encoder,

Constant
Tilt” mode submenu. Press [V] key to carry out the
constant calculation and input for the vertical V :1/4
encoder. ZA 202°00’00”
OKi
(k) While the telescope is set to any position, press
[OK] key to memorize the initial encoder data. ⇓
The short beep sounds and the vertical angle display Constant
is automatically reset (ZA becomes 0°00’00”). The
V :2/4
instrument is ready for the 2nd position data reading. ZA 0°00’00”
OKi
" If the IF side cover is not installed and any light is
coming from outside and influencing the CMOS Constant
sensor output signal, the error code or “ERR: CCD
V :1/4
Adjust.” message is displayed. Put the cover onto the ERR:CCD Adjust.
encoder and repeat the procedures from the
OKi
beginning.
(l) Turn the telescope 90° ± 10° referring to the display Constant
of the vertical angle.
V :2/4
" The correct angular setting (within 90° ± 10°) is ZA 82°00’00”
>>> <<<
indicated by “>>> <<<” mark appearing at the lower OKi
part of the display.
" To complete all procedures the telescope can be ⇓
Constant
rotated either clockwise or counterclockwise.
V :3/4
(m) Press [OK] to memorize the encoder data. ZA 82°00’00”
OKi
the 3rd position data reading.
9-25
(n) Turn the telescope 90° (within 180 ± 10° from the Constant
initial setting) referring to the display of the vertical
V :3/4
angle. ZA 183°00’00”
" The correct angle setting is indicated by mark “>>> >>> <<<
OKi
<<<” shown at the lower part of the display.
⇓
(o) Press [OK] to memorize the encoder data. Constant
the 4th position data reading. V :4/4
ZA 183°00’00”
OKi
(p) Turn the telescope 90° (within 270 ± 10° from the Constant
initial setting) referring to the display of the vertical
V :4/4
angle. ZA 266°00’00”
" The correct angle setting is indicated by mark “>>> >>> <<<
OKi
<<<” shown at the lower part of the display.
⇓
(q) Confirm that the buzzer sounds twice and “OK !!” Constant
message is displayed. The encoder constant data are
calculated and input to the instrument internal V :4/4
ZA 266°00’00”
memory. Press [OK] to return to “Encoder, Tilt” Calculating...
mode. OKi
Constant
V :4/4
OK !!
OKi
" If the calculation of the constant data cannot be Constant

completed successfully, long beep sounds and the
error code is displayed. V :4/4
E:***(***) ***(***)
OKi
Sample error code display:
E:623(623) 623(623)
E:623(623) 623(623)
error code corresponding to the reading of V2 – lower side detector
error codes corresponding to the reading of V1 – upper side detector

9-26
E:623(623) 623(623)
" While performing the constant setting function, press {ESC} at any stage to exit to
“Encoder, Tilt” submenu screen without calculation and input of the new constant data.
(3) Slit check
(a) Select “Slit check” in Encoder, Tilt mode.

" Carry out in advance the H and V constant input,
Slit check (H:I,V:I)
otherwise the error code E510 may be displayed. Select Encoder
ZA 98°21’04”
(b) Press [ H ] or [ V ] to select H or V encoder for the HA-R 177°10’11”
following test.
H i V i
Example: press [ V ] ⇓
(c) Slowly turn the telescope, if V encoder is selected in Slit check (H:I,V:I)
step (b) above (or turn the standard base, if H
ZA 98°21’04”
encoder is selected) until “END !!”message is shown
at the lower part of the display. Start !!
H i V i
" To complete all procedures the instrument (standard base or telescope) can be rotated
either clockwise or counterclockwise. Any position of the telescope (or standard base)
can be selected as the test starting point.
9-27

of V1 (H1) detector at all of V2 (H2) encoder at all
positions, which have been positions, which have been
checked until the current stage checked until the current stage Slit check (H:I,V:I)
of test (in CX-101/102/103 of test (in CX-101/102/103 Warning:000-000
ZA 103°22’44”
with double detector) with double encoder)
Go !!
H i V i
Warning: 000 - 000
⇓
Warning: 000 Warning:000-000
ZA 108°41’22”
total number of misread slits of V1 (H1) detector at all Check !!

positions, which have been checked until the current H i V i
stage of test (in CX-105/107 with single detector)

Warning:000-000
ZA 108°42’01”
Go !!
H i V i
…
If the errors have not been found (i.e. the error Slit check (H:I,V:I)
codes are not displayed), “END !!” message is ERR:003-010
ZA ***°**’**”
displayed when the test is complete HA-R ***°**’**”
END !!
H i V i
Slit check (H:S,V:S) " If during the test display shows message “Back !!” instead of
Warning:000-000 “Go !!” and beep sounds continuously, turn the instrument
ZA 199°06’42”
(telescope or standard base) backwards (reverse to the
ZA 183°03’35” Back originally selected direction), until both displayed angles
_MD_H _MD_V H i V i (ZA or HA-R) become close to each other. The short beep
sounds and display instantly shows “Check !!” and then “Go
!!” message. Subsequently continue the test, turning the
instrument (telescope or standard base) forward (in the
originally selected direction).
9-28

Warning:001-002 “000”), but the error code(s) is not displayed at the bottom of
ZA 203°06’42” the screen, any measures (i.e. cleaning or adjustment of the
Go !! encoder) are not necessary.
H i V i " If the “Warning” display is counted up successively when
the instrument is rotated, the dust is located on the CMOS
sensor, if the “Warning” display different than “000-000” (or
“000”) is shown at individual positions, the disk at the
specific locations is affected by dust.
ZA E191 continuously, the CMOS sensor signal processing
Stop !! (brightness adjustment) is in progress. Check the operating
H i V i conditions. If any light is coming from outside and
influencing the CMOS sensor output signal, put the cover onto
the encoder and wait until “Stop !!” message is cleared. Turn
the horizontal (vertical) axis, until short beep sounds and
display shows “Check !!” or “Go !!” message. Subsequently
continue the test turning the axis. Confirm that “Stop !!”
message is not displayed at the same position of encoder. If
“Stop !!” message is displayed always in the same location,
clean the relevant disk area and confirm the disk for any
local glass defects.
Slit check (H:I,V:I) " If the screen as shown at left is displayed, the problems of the
Warning:001-002 encoder unit are described by the respective error code.
ZA ***°**’**”
HA-R ***°**’**”
ST1:626 ST2:626
H i V i
Sample error code display:
ST1:626 ST2:626
error codes corresponding to the reading of V2 – lower side detector, or

H2 – right side detector
error codes corresponding to the reading of V1 – upper side detector, or

H1 – left side detector
ST1:626 ST2:626
9-29
Depending on the error code displayed, clean the encoder unit, adjust it or replace the respective
parts () section 10.2).
" While performing the “Slit check” function, press {ESC} at any stage to exit to initial
When the slit check is completed in Initial mode (indicated on the display as (H: I, V:I)), the
slit check can be later conducted in one of the 2 modes: Initial and Standard. Standard mode
applies rough inspection tolerances and can be used for example, by service centers for pre-
delivery inspection. When Initial mode, which applies strict tolerances for inspection is not
completed successfully in advance, i.e. the error code(s) is displayed during inspection after
performing the “Constant” setting function, the selection of Standard mode is not available (it
is not activated) until the “Slit check” function is completed successfully again (i.e. “END”
message is displayed when the test is finished). If the error counts “Warning: xxx-xxx” are not
000-000 (for double detector) or “Warning: xxx” are not 000 (for single detector) (some dust is
detected), no additional measures (like cleaning the encoder) are required, unless the error
code(s) is displayed.

only Initial mode is available Select Encoder
ZA 85°20’08”
HA-R 5°20’08”
_H__ _V__
Initial (I)/Standard (S) mode Slit check (H:I,V:I) Slit check (H:S,V:S)
selectable by [MD_H] key for the
ZA 85°20’08” ZA 85°20’08”
horizontal encoder and [MD_V] HA-R 5°20’08” HA-R 5°20’08”
key for the vertical encoder
_MD_H _MD_V _H__ _V__ _MD_H _MD_V _H__ _V__
Slit check (H:I,V:S) Slit check (H:S,V:I)
ZA 85°20’08” ZA 85°20’08”
HA-R 5°20’08” HA-R 5°20’08”
_MD_V _H__ _V__ _MD_H _H__ _V__

9-30
(4) Tilt
The tilt angle data measured by the X-Y tilt sensor and the information related to the tilt
sensor operation are displayed.
Tilt sensor data:
X: tilt data in X direction (counts represent the tilt angle measured in
angular unit “ (seconds))
Y: tilt data in Y direction (counts represent the tilt angle measured in
angular unit “ (seconds))
Tmp: temperature measured by the temperature sensor on the tilt board
PWM: LED duty cycle (brightness control)
Err: error code (0 is shown when the tilt sensor operation is normal)
S/N: tilt unit serial number
IX: tilt sensor X inclination constant
IY: tilt sensor Y inclination constant
TX: tilt sensor X temperature constant
TY: tilt sensor Y temperature constant
(a) Select “Tilt” in “Encoder, Tilt” mode submenu.

Tilt
(b) Confirm the display. Calculate the average data in X X -412
Y 1567
and Y direction taken when the instrument is Tmp 21.9
pointing towards the collimator A in face left (F1) PWM 6800
and face right (F2). Turn the standard base and Err 0
confirm the respective data.
" Press { T }or { S } key to toggle between “Tilt” screen Tilt
S/N T1B1218
pages. IX 0.99970
IY 0.99940
" Tolerance for the tilt sensor inspection: TX -5058
X tilt angle average data: within ±2400 TY -2048
Y tilt angle average data: within ±2400
(5) DT<--->PC
By receiving external request command, the DT unit can

communicate with the computer.
DT <---> PC
" While setting the communication parameters of the
computer, set the baud rate to 115200bps. (115200bps)
9-31
(6) IACS
The horizontal and vertical angle parameters can be calculated by the instrument and input to
the internal memory to enhance the angular accuracy.
Caution! At a time when the IACS function is started, the originally memorized angle parameters
are reset. It is necessary to complete full procedure until “OK!!” message is displayed to
input to the DCPU board memory new parameters. The IACS function must be
performed after mechanical adjustment of the encoder unit, replacement of the axis,
replacement of the CMOS frame complete, or replacement of the DCPU board. It is not
necessary to update original angle parameters by IACS function, when the encoder
“Constant” () step (2)) is calculated and input.
[H] press to select the horizontal encoder and start IACS
procedures for the calculation and input of the
horizontal angle parameters Select Encoder
[V] press to select the vertical encoder and start

_H__ _V__
procedures for the calculation and input of the vertical
angle parameters
(a) Select “IACS” in “Encoder, Tilt” mode submenu.
CX-101/CX-102
(b) Select the horizontal or vertical encoder for checking and calculation of the angle
parameters – press [H] key or [V] key.
(c) “CCD adjust” will be displayed temporary. When the IACS
current horizontal (vertical) angle is shown turn the 72/72 ---
standard base (telescope) to 0°00’00” ± 10” (the
0°00’03”
properly set angle will be indicated by “---“ mark
shown on the display). _OK_
(d) Press [OK] key. The beep will sound and the encoder angle reading progress will be
indicated by the following sequence of displayed symbols “---“ Æ ““ Æ “ ” Æ “
”. Wait until beep sounds and the counted number of the current setting is decreased
by 1 (for example 72/72 will change to 71/72). When the angle about 5° is displayed turn
the standard base (telescope) to the next reading position of 0°00’00” ± 10”.
IACS IACS IACS

72/72 72/72 72/72
0°00’03” 0°00’03” 0°00’03”
_OK_ _OK_ _OK_
IACS IACS
71/72 71/72 ---
4°59’58” 0°00’06”
_OK_ _OK_
9-32
" When the error code is displayed instantly (e.g.

IACS
standard base (telescope) is turned during the angle **/72
data reading process), try, if possible, to set the angle
E***
to 0° again and input data by pressing [OK] key. If the E***
problem persists, press {ESC} key and repeat _OK_
procedures from the beginning.
(e) Repeat step (d) turning the standard base each 5° (set every time the displayed angle to
0°00’00” ±10”). After collecting 72 data the angle parameters are calculated. Wait
until the buzzer beeps twice and “OK!!” is shown on the display. Press [OK] key.
IACS IACS
Calculating… OK!!
_OK_ _OK_
" When the angle parameters are input to the instrument internal memory, the character(s)
representing the encoder(s) – “(H)”, “(V)” and “(HV)”, which are treated with the IACS
function are displayed in the upper right corner of the “Encoder, Tilt” submenu screen
() page 9-21).
CX-105/CX-107
(b) Select the horizontal or vertical encoder for checking and calculation of the angle
parameters – press [H] key or [V] key.
(c) “CCD adjust” will be displayed temporary. When the IACS-SD
current horizontal (vertical) angle is shown turn the 18/18 ---
standard base (telescope) to 0°00’00” ± 10” (the
0°00’03”
properly set angle will be indicated by “---“ mark
shown on the display). _OK_
(d) Press [OK] key. The beep will sound and the encoder angle reading progress will be
indicated by the following sequence of displayed symbols “---“ Æ ““ Æ “ ” Æ “
”. Wait until beep sounds and the counted number of the current setting is decreased
by 1 (for example 18/18 will change to 17/18). When the angle about 20° is displayed
turn the standard base (telescope) to the next reading position of 0°00’00” ± 10”.
IACS-SD IACS-SD IACS-SD
18/18 18/18 18/18
0°00’03” 0°00’03” 0°00’03”
_OK_ _OK_ _OK_
IACS-SD IACS-SD
17/18 17/18 ---
19°59’58” 0°00’06”
_OK_ _OK_
9-33
" When the error code is displayed instantly (e.g. IACS-SD

standard base (telescope) is turned during the angle **/18
data reading process), try, if possible, to set the angle E***
to 0° again and input data by pressing [OK] key. If the
problem persists, press {ESC} key and repeat _OK_
procedures from the beginning.
(e) Repeat step (d) turning the standard base each 20° (set every time the displayed angle
to 0°00’00” ±10”). After collecting 18 data the angle parameters are calculated. Wait
until the buzzer beeps twice and “OK!!” is shown on the display. Press [OK] key.
IACS-SD IACS-SD
Calculating… OK!!
_OK_ _OK_
" When the angle parameters are input to the instrument internal memory, the character(s)
representing the encoder(s) – “(H)”, “(V)” and “(HV)”, which are treated with the IACS
function are displayed in the upper right corner of the “Encoder, Tilt” submenu screen
() page 9-21).
9-34
9.2.4 TEST MODE
Test Laser plummet

Running test
Display check
Key check
Battery check
Media check
(1) Running test

The horizontal and vertical angles are measured for long Running test (1)
run and displayed. The illumination is turned on and off
alternately. At the same time the program ROM, data ROM ZA 92°00’04”
HA-R 223°00’14”
and RAM tests are performed in turn. Optionally the H/V
encoder A/D converter data of CMOS sensor minimum and
maximum signal output as well as data related to the LED
duty cycle (PWM) (brightness control) and offset of the
Running test (1)
signal (DAC – digital to analog converter data) can be
checked. ZA 92°00’04”
HA-R 223°00’14”
(a) Select service function “Running test”.
ProgROM check OK
(b) Confirm the respective data.
Running test (1)

Illumination on / off
Beep ZA 92°00’04”
HA-R 223°00’14”
DataROM check OK
Running test (1)
ZA 92°00’04”
HA-R 223°00’14”
RAM check OK
" In the encoder units of the CX instruments the 3 LEDs for each individual encoder are
applied in Service mode when IACS function is used. The signals for each LED (1), (2)
and (3) can be checked by service function “Running test”. The currently applied LED is
shown on the upper line of the display.
To switch from LED (1) to LED (3) press { W } key, to switch to LED (2) press { X }
key.
9-35
" The “ZA” and “HA-R” are displayed when the center Running test (2)
diode (1) is selected. For the left and right side diodes
(2) and (3) the error codes may be displayed. If the ZA E510
HAR E510
error codes are “E5xx” or “E6xx”, it is normal.
RAM check OK
Running test (3)
ZA E510
HAR E510
RAM check OK
Press {ENT} key to confirm the H/V encoder aging

test data. Running test (1)
V1:MIN 10 MAX 238
V2:MIN 10 MAX 236
H1:MIN 10 MAX 244
H2:MIN 10 MAX 238
Running test (1)

V1:MIN 10 MAX 238
V2:MIN 10 MAX 236
H1:MIN 10 MAX 244
H2:MIN 10 MAX 238
ProgROM check OK
Illumination on / off
Beep
Running test (1)
V1:MIN 10 MAX 238
V2:MIN 10 MAX 236
H1:MIN 10 MAX 244
H2:MIN 10 MAX 238
DataROM check OK
Running test (1)

V1:MIN 10 MAX 238
V2:MIN 10 MAX 236
H1:MIN 10 MAX 244
H2:MIN 10 MAX 238
RAM check OK
To switch from LED (1) to LED (3) press { W } key, to switch to LED (2) press { X }
key.
" In the instruments with single detectors (CX-105/ Running test (1)
CX-107) the V1 and H2 data is not shown. V1:MIN - - MAX - - -
V2:MIN 10 MAX 236
H1:MIN 10 MAX 244
H2:MIN - - MAX - - -
9-36
Running test (1) Running test (2)

V1:MIN 8 MAX 241 V1:MIN 7 MAX 238
V2:MIN 10 MAX 236 V2:MIN 11 MAX 239
H1:MIN 10 MAX 244 H1:MIN 9 MAX 240
H2:MIN 7 MAX 239 H2:MIN 10 MAX 242
A/D converter data A/D converter data A/D converter data A/D converter data
of CMOS sensor of CMOS sensor of CMOS sensor of CMOS sensor
minimum output maximum output minimum output maximum output
signal signal signal signal
Running test (3)

V1:MIN 12 MAX 239
V2:MIN 10 MAX 242
H1:MIN 8 MAX 238
H2:MIN 11 MAX 240
A/D converter data A/D converter data

of CMOS sensor of CMOS sensor
minimum output maximum output
signal signal
" If the digital data of H/V encoder is highlighted, the Running test (1)
V1:MIN 8 MAX 241
respective signal level is out of the tolerance (too V2:MIN 10 MAX 255
high or too low) (the signal level becomes H1:MIN 10 MAX 244
highlighted after approx. 10 seconds). H2:MIN 0 MAX 239
Refer to the table below for troubleshooting.
Checking
Message Meaning Replacement parts
signal
highlighted
CMOS- faulty DCPU DCPU
(low value)
MIN highlighted
DCPU CN1/CN2 connection lines problem DCPU
(high value)
Flexible cable problem, LED power too
highlighted LED, CMOS,
weak, CMOS output signal absent, faulty
(low value) flexible cable, DCPU
CMOS- DCPU
MAX LED light too strong (faulty DCPU),
highlighted
DCPU CN1/CN2 connection lines DCPU
(high value)
problem
9-37
Press {ENT} key to confirm data related to the H/V encoder LED duty cycle (PWM) (brightness
level) and digital to analog converter (DAC) data, which represents the bias of the output signal.
To switch from LED (1) to LED (3) press { W } key, to switch to LED (2) press { X } key.
Example of screen of CX-101/102/103 Example of screen of CX-105/107

(double detector) (single detector)
Running test (1) Running test (1)

V1:PWM 344 DAC 280 V1:PWM - - - DAC - - -
V2:PWM 342 DAC 278 V2:PWM 342 DAC 278
H1:PWM 341 DAC 295 H1:PWM 341 DAC 295
H2:PWM 343 DAC 283 H2:PWM - - - DAC - - -
(c) Press {ESC} key to exit to “Test” mode submenu.
(2) Display check

Display check
Constant
Contrast check
Temp Sensor
(a) Select service function “Constant”.
[FACE] press to toggle between face left (F1) and face Constant
right (F2) display Face :1
Level :8
[LEV.] press to select contrast level (range: 0∼15) Count :35
For contrast levels 0~6 and 8~15 [INIT] and QR: :32
_FACE _LEV.
[SET] keys are disabled. “QR” values are
automatically assigned to each level and the
Constant
characteristics is based on the “QR” setting Face :1
assigned to level 7, which can be set manually. Level :7
For level 7 the adjustment of contrast can be done Count :32
QR: :32
by pressing { T }or { S } key, which changes the _FACE _LEV. _INIT _SET
value of “Count” within range of 0∼255.
[INIT] initialize setting (default: Level:7, Count: 32, QR:
32)
[SET] memorize setting for level 7 and selected value of “Count”. The selected “Count”
will overwrite “QR”, which is the reference for the contrast setting. If the input
“Count” is out of range 22∼40, the CPU will not memorize the setting and will
return to default Level 7 and “QR” 32.
9-38
The QR value is checked and indicated for each individual

display by the maker of the display complete. If you
replace the display complete or the key-LCD unit, read the
QR code printed on the sticker provided with the display
unit.
Example of QR code printed on sticker attached to one of QR code printed on sticker

the display units: attached to back side of the
display complete
320200 1F 11Z2N4DZ Fig. 9-1
Constant
Read this hexadecimal number. Convert it to decimal number Face :1
and input decimal as a “Count” number in “Constant” screen. Level :7
Example: hex1F is equal in decimal to (1 x 161) + (15 x 160) = 31 Count :31
QR: :31
_FACE _LEV. _INIT _SET
hex 0 ∼ 9 = decimal 0 ∼ 9
hex A ∼ F = decimal 10 ∼ 15 Input “Count” and press [SET] key to
overwrite and memorize “QR” value
(b) Select service function “Contrast check”.

All dots are getting black. The display contrast
changes in a few steps.
Check the display in face left (F1) and face right
(F2) for any abnormality.
9-39
(c) Select service function “Temp Sensor”.

LCD1: temperature measured by the temperature sensor Temp Sensor
LCD1= +22.000
on the LCD1 board LCD2= +21.500
LCD2: temperature measured by the temperature sensor PCB = +20.627
Tilt = +21.750
on the LCD2 board
PCB: temperature measured by the temperature sensor
on the DCPU board
Tilt: temperature measured by the temperature sensor
on the tilt sensor board
(d) Press {ESC} key to exit to “Test” mode submenu.
(3) Key check

The keyboard operation is checked by pressing the keys one by one and confirming the
correct response on the display.
(a) Select service function “Key check”. Example:
Key check
(b) Press any key and confirm the correct display
indication. ( F4 )
" When pressing the key, the respective characters (key Hit any key
names) are shown on the display. The { } and
{ESC} keys are only exception.
Press { F4 } key
If { } key is pressed, the illumination is
ON and OFF and (ILM) is displayed. If { } key Key check
is pressed, dual tone beep sounds and (STAR) is ( F4 )
displayed. If {±#%@} is pressed (+) is displayed.
If {ESC} key is pressed, the instrument exits to Hit any key
“Test” mode submenu.
Press { SHIFT } key
Key check
( SFT )
Hit any key
(c) Press {ESC} to exit to “Test” mode submenu.

9-40
(4) Battery check

The battery voltage detected by the instrument, battery level Battery check (Int)
coefficient and temperature measured by the temperature Bat. = 8.078(V)
sensor are displayed. The battery low adjustment is carried AD.c = 1.005089
out using a software function of Service mode. Temp = +20.627(C)
INIT SETi
(a) Select service function “Battery check”.
(b) Confirm display:
Bat. : battery voltage detected by the instrument
AD.c : battery level coefficient
Temp. : temperature measured by the temperature sensor on the DCPU board
[INIT] : press to reset the battery level coefficient to 1.000000
[SET] : press to check and memorize the newly calculated battery level coefficient
and battery low detection level
(c) Battery low adjustment:
- Remove the side covers. Using digital voltmeter check the voltage at Z17 (BAT1) test
point (TP1 (DGND) is the ground terminal) on the JX board () Fig. 3-9). Set the
external power supply connected to CN8 connector on the DCPU board via power
supply cable tool (part No. ST-CX-04) to 6.7 ± 0.01V as read on the voltmeter.
- Press [SET] to memorize the calculated battery level coefficient and battery low
detection level.
(d) Press {ESC} to exit to “Test” mode submenu.
" There is a battery type detection circuit on the JX board. When the BDC70 battery is installed,
it is detected as the internal battery. (Int) is shown on the upper line of the display. When the
external battery is connected to the instrument, it is detected as the external battery. (Ext) is
shown on the display.
(5) Media check

The reading/writing function of the external interface when using the USB flash memory can be
confirmed.
(a) Select service function “Media check”.
Test
" “Media” function is activated when the “Media” option Running test
Display check
is set by “Initialize” Æ “Inst. flg” service function to Key check
“Yes”. Battery check
Media check
(b) When the screen as shown at right is displayed insert

the USB flash memory in the USB port located in the Set USB memory.
external interface hatch.
9-41
(c) The communication with the USB flash memory will media test - USB
be checked automatically. Make sure that “USB check 0x55 : OK
0xAA : OK
OK!!” message is displayed when the test is 0x00 : OK
completed. 0xFF : OK
USB check OK!!
(d) Press {ESC} key and remove the USB flash memory
from the USB port.
(6) Laser plummet
When the optional laser plummet is installed in the instrument the laser plummet power levels
can be checked, adjusted and input to the instrument internal memory.
" “Laser plummet” function is activated when the “L-plummet” option is set by “Initialize” Æ
“Inst. flg” service function to “Yes”.
(a) Select service function “Laser plummet”.
Laser plummet
[ON] : press to turn the laser plummet ON
[OFF] : press to turn the laser plummet OFF
[CALC] : press to calculate laser power “Level2”
∼”Level4” settings based on “Level1” and
“Level5” adjusted in advance
[INIT] : press to set all laser power levels (“Level1” Level1 14
∼”Level5”) to the factory default settings Level2 33
Level3 47
[SET] : press to memorize all currently displayed Level4 57
laser power levels (“Level1”∼”Level5”) Level5 61
{ T } or { S } : press to select the respective laser power oO N o C A L C I N I T SETo
level (i.e. move between “Level1”
∼”Level5”), the currently selected level
is highlighted on the display
{ X } or { W } : press to increase or decrease the laser
output power of the highlighted level
(b) Press [INIT] key to set the laser plummet power

levels to the factory default. Level1 14
Level2 33
Factory default: Level3 47
Level1 14 Level4 57
Level5 61
Level2 33 oO N o C A L C I N I T SETo
Level3 47
Level4 57
Level5 61
" When you are going to replace the DCPU board with a new one, you can enter the
“Laser plummet” service function, while the old DCPU board is installed and note the
laser plummet output power “Level1”∼”Level5”. Then you can manually input the same
levels after installation of the new DCPU board.
9-42
(c) Press [ON] key to turn the laser plummet ON. Prepare the optical power meter with the
optical sensor and set the power meter for the wavelength of 635nm (if this setting is
not available, set to 640nm). Place the optical sensor beneath the instrument tribrach.
" Example: The instrument can be affixed on the tripod set up at a height of approx. 1.3m
(this setting can be used later for the beam alignment). After leveling the instrument,
place the optical sensor on the ground so that the laser plummet projects the beam into
the optical sensor.
" Closer distances between the instrument tribrach and optical power meter assure better
conditions for the laser beam power checking and adjustment. For the inspection at a
very short distance (it must be at least 10cm), instead of using the tripod the CX can be
laid on the flat surface with the side cover in contact with the flat surface, so that the laser
plummet projects the beam horizontally. During inspection use any darkening curtain to
prevent any light coming from outside.
" Record the optical power meter reading when the laser plummet is switched off to
confirm the power of light coming from outside into the optical sensor. Later when the
laser plummet is turned on subtract the memorized value from the total power
measurement to get the result of the laser beam power itself. It is recommended to use
any shade around the area of the optical sensor to allow only the laser beam to come into
the optical sensor. If possible, the adjustment should be done in the dark room.
" Do not set the optical sensor detecting window perpendicular to the laser beam. Slightly
incline the sensor to avoid reflection of the laser beam from the surface of the optical
sensor back to the laser plummet.
(d) Press { S } or { T } key to highlight “Level1”. Level1 14
While the optical sensor is placed underneath the Level2 33
instrument, move the optical sensor to align it with Level3 47
Level4 57
the laser plummet beam spot to measure the Level5 61
maximum output power. After alignment oO F F o C A L C I N I T SETo
temporary turn the laser plummet OFF and
reconfirm the power of light coming from outside.
(e) Turn the laser plummet ON and while “Level1” is
highlighted press { X } or { W } key to set the
measured laser plummet output power to the
specified level:
“Level1” 0.15 ± 0.01mW (0.14∼0.16mW)
(f) Press { S } or { T } key to highlight “Level5”. Press Level1 19
{ X } or { W } key to set the measured laser plummet Level2 33
Level3 47
output power to the specified level: Level4 57
“Level5” 0.90 +0.05 / -0.1 mW (0.8∼0.95mW) Level5 61
(g) Press [CALC] key. Based on the updated Levels 1
and 5, the other Levels 2, 3 and 4 will be recalcuted. Level1 19
Level2 30
Levels 2, 3 and 4 Level3 43
Level4 52
will be recalculated Level5 62
and updated oO F F o C A L C I N I T SETo
9-43
(h) Press [SET] key and then [OFF] key.

(i) Press [ON] key and after pressing { S } or { T } keys reconfirm “Level1” and
“Level5” as set in steps (e) and (f) respectively.
(j) Press { S } or { T } key to highlight “Level2”. Make Level1 19
sure that the measured laser plummet output power is Level2 29
Level3 43
as follows: Level4 52
“Level2” 0.23 ± 0.01mW (0.22∼0.24mW) Level5 62
If different, press { X } or { W } key to set the output
power to the proper level.
(k) Repeat step (j) for “Level3” and “Level4”. Check and if necessary adjust the following
laser plummet output power:
“Level3” 0.37 ± 0.03mW (0.34∼0.40mW)
“Level4” 0.63 ± 0.05mW (0.58∼0.68mW)
(l) Press [SET] key to memorize settings of all levels.
(m) Press [OFF] key to turn the laser plummet OFF.
" The following laser plummet output power levels are adjusted by the procedures
described above:
“Level1” 0.15 ± 0.01mW (0.14∼0.16mW)
“Level2” 0.23 ± 0.01mW (0.22∼0.24mW)
“Level3” 0.37 ± 0.03mW (0.34∼0.40mW)
“Level4” 0.63 ± 0.05mW (0.58∼0.68mW)
“Level5” 0.90 +0.05 / -0.1 mW (0.8∼0.95mW)
9-44
10-1
10. ERROR MESSAGES AND ERROR CODES

10.1 ERROR MESSAGES
MESSAGE MEANING
The air is shimmering a lot, etc., measuring conditions are poor.
The center of the target cannot be sighted.
Resight the target.
BadCondition Unsuitable distance measurement conditions when reflectorless
measurement is set. When reflectorless measurement is set, distance
cannot be measured because the laser beam is striking at least two
surfaces at the same time. Choose a single surface target for distance
measurement.
Bad file name File name is not entered when saving data on USB memory device.
Coordinates identical to the known point coordinates observed during
Calculation error resection exist. Set another known point so that the known point
coordinates do not coincide.
Checksum error
A sending / repetition error has occurred between the CX and external
equipment. Send / receive the data again.
Clock error occurs when the voltage of the lithium battery decreases or
Clock error the battery itself is depleted. Replace the lithium battery on DCPU
board.
A reception error has occurred in coordinate data from an external
Communication error
Comm err
instrument.
Check the settings of parameters concerning communication conditions.
Flash write error! It is impossible to read in data.
Incorrect Password Input password does not match set password. Input correct password.
Insert USB USB memory device is not inserted.
Invalid USB Incorrect USB memory device is inserted.
Invalid baseline
During setting-out line measurement or point projection measurement,
baseline has not been defined correctly.
There is no more room to enter data.
Memory is full Record the data again after deleting unnecessary data from the JOB or
coordinate data from the memory.
During missing line measurement, the observation of the starting
position was not completed normally.
Need 1st obs
Sight the starting position accurately and press [OBS] to perform the
measurement again.
During missing line measurement, the observation of the starting
position was not completed normally.
Need 2nd obs
Sight the starting position accurately and press [MLM] to perform the
measurement again.
10-2
MESSAGE MEANING
Observation of the offset point during offset measurement was not
completed normally.
Need offset pt.
Sight the target accurately and press [OBS] to perform the
measurement again.
During REM measurement, the observation of the target was not
completed normally.
Need prism obs
Sight the target accurately and press [OBS] to perform the
measurement again.
New password Diff.
Passwords input when setting a new password do not match. Input the
same password twice.
When searching for or reading in coordinate data or searching for code
No data data, the search stopped either because the item in question does not
exist or the data volume is large.
No file
There is no file for loading known point data or displaying data on the
currently selected USB memory device.
The calculation of the instrument station coordinates during resection
does not converge.
No solution Assess the results and if necessary, perform the observation again.
Intersect point could not be calculated. Either necessary data items
were not input or the Intersect point does not exist.
North/East is null, The Northing or Easting field of the given coordinate is null. Input the
Read error coordinate.
The tilt of the instrument exceeds the tilt angle compensation range
Out of range during measurement.
Level the instrument again.
During gradient % display, the display range (less than ±1000%) has
been exceeded.
During REM measurement, either the vertical angle has exceeded
horizontal ±89° or the measured distance is greater than 9999.999m.
Install the instrument station far from the target.
Out of value
The instrument station coordinates calculated during resection are too
high. Perform the observation again.
During setting-out line measurement, scale factor has been less than
0.100000 or exceeded 9.999999.
During area calculation, results exceeded the display range.
JOB data output (transmission to the host computer or output to the
printer) is not completed before JOB is cleared.
Print or send first
Either transmit the JOB to be cleared to the host computer or output it
to the printer.
Traverse tried to close on the traverse point other than the Start pt.
during automatic route search. Press any key to return to the last point
found in automatic route search. Either select the next traverse point to
Pt already on route continue the current search or specify the Start pt. to close a closed-loop
traverse.
Please use {} key in OBS mode.
Can be used only in Observation mode.
10-3
MESSAGE MEANING
When setting the baseline with "Point to Line", two reference points
Pt1-Pt2 too near are too close.
Leave the space of 1 m or longer between the two reference points.
Read-only file on the USB memory device cannot be changed and file
Read-only file
contents cannot be edited or deleted.
The same values are input in Pt.1 and Pt.2in setting-out line
Same coordinates
measurement. CX cannot define the baseline.
SDR format err The file read in is not SDR format. Check the file.
Measuring conditions are poor, and there is not any reflective light for
measuring distances.
Signal off
Resight the target. When using reflective prisms, effectiveness will be
improved by increasing the number of prism used.
Cannot calculate. Station point coordinate is set to “Null”. Input the
Station coord is Null
coordinate.
CX is outside useable temperature range and accurate measurement
cannot be performed. Repeat measurement within the appropriate
Temp Range OUT
temperature range. If the CX is used under direct sunlight, use an
umbrella to protect it against the heat of the sun.
Measuring conditions are poor, and due to the insufficient amount of
reflective light, measuring could not be carried out within the time
Time out (during
measurement)
specified. Resight the target. When using reflective prisms,
effectiveness will be improved by increasing the number of prisms
used.
Input password has fewer than 3 characters. Password must have 3 or
Too short
more characters and 8 or fewer characters.
An error has occurred in loading or saving data to USB memory
USB error
device.
USB full ! There is no more room to enter data on USB memory device.
USB not found USB memory device was removed during USB mode operation.
The calculated result is too large to be displayed on the screen in its
********
totality.
10-4
10.2 ERROR CODES

10.2.1 EDT
ERROR
DESCRIPTION ACTION
CODE
- Adjust position of the CMOS frame
E500 Slit image detect error - Replace CMOS frame complete
- Replace DCPU board
- Make sure the firm attachment of CMOS/LED unit
(check screws and glue at the CMOS/LED frame)
Insufficient quantity of detected
E501 - Adjust position of the CMOS frame to the inner side
slit image lines
(in the axis direction)
- Replace CMOS frame complete
Too big quantity of detected slit
E502 - Move the CMOS frame to the outer side of encoder
image lines
- Telescope or standard base is rotated too fast
E503 Slit image delete and insert error
- Clean CMOS and disk
E504 BCH code extraction error - Clean CMOS and disk
- Make sure the firm attachment of CMOS/LED unit
E505 BCH code decoding error
(check screws and glue at the CMOS/LED frame)
Detect bit and table bit comparison - Adjust position of the CMOS frame
E506
error - Replace CMOS frame complete
E507 Disk center calculation error - Replace DCPU board
E508 Interpolation calculation error
Insufficient slit line interpolation
E509
calculation data - Clean CMOS and disk
E510 Slit image pattern quality error - Make sure the firm attachment of CMOS/LED unit
E511 Angle data accuracy error (check screws and glue at the CMOS/LED frame)
Slit image diametrical detection
E512
error
E513~
Others - Replace CMOS frame complete
E516
- Check flexible cable and confirm encoder signals
CPU cannot control proper level of
(LED and CMOS) by “Running test” service function
CMOS signal by adjustment of
E590 - Clean CMOS and disk
LED power and CMOS gain
(horizontal encoder)
- Check flexible cable and confirm encoder signals
CPU cannot control proper level of
(LED and CMOS) by “Running test” service function
CMOS signal by adjustment of
LED power and CMOS gain
(vertical encoder)
" The error codes specified above are shown only in Service mode. In User mode all errors are re-
presented by error code ⎡E190⎦ for the horizontal encoder and ⎡E191⎦ for the vertical encoder.
" After performing any action specified above, carry out the respective service functions to input the
constant data and proceed with the slit check. If the error code is not cleared, replace the
instrument parts in the following order: CMOS frame complete → DCPU board → disk.
10-5
While “H constant”, “V constant” or “Slit check” service function is carried out, the following
error codes can be displayed:
ERROR
DESCRIPTION ACTION
CODE
E600 Slit image detect error - Replace CMOS frame complete
- Adjust position of the CMOS frame to the inner
Insufficient quantity of detected
E601 side (in the axis direction)
slit image lines
Too big quantity of detected slit
E602 - Move the CMOS frame to the outer side of encoder
image lines
Slit width / bit transformation
E603
error - Replace disk (axis complete)
E604 Bit threshold calculation error
- Change DCPU board
Detect bit and table bit
E605 - Adjust position of the CMOS frame
comparison error
E606 Slit image delete and insert error
- Move the CMOS frame in the direction of the
Alignment error of CMOS and
E607 bigger pixel No.
slit pattern circle
- Adjust disk eccentricity (replace axis complete)
- Move the CMOS frame in the direction of the
Alignment error of CMOS and
E608 smaller pixel No.
slit pattern circle
- Adjust disk eccentricity
Alignment error of CMOS and - Move the CMOS frame to the outer side of encoder
E609
slit pattern circle - Adjust disk eccentricity (replace axis complete)
E610 BCH code extraction error
E611 BCH code decoding error
Slit image average interval
E612
calculation error - Clean CMOS and disk
E613 Regression calculation error
Insufficient slit quantity for
E614
regression calculation
E615 CMOS angle data setting error ----
Rotation angle different than
E616 ----
CMOS data
CMOS units not parallel one to
E617 - Adjust CMOS frame position
another
Distance from the axis center
different for both CMOS units
Slit interpolation range setting - Adjust CMOS frame position
E619
error - Clean CMOS and disk
10-6
ERROR
DESCRIPTION ACTION
CODE
Disk eccentricity calculation
E620 - Replace CMOS frame complete
error
E621 Disk eccentricity out of tolerance - Adjust disk eccentricity
Eccentricity parameter out of - Adjust disk eccentricity (replace axis complete)
E622
tolerance - Adjust CMOS frame position
E623 Slit image pattern quality error
Slit center position interval
E624
calculation error
Slit image pattern quality out of
tolerance
- Adjust CMOS frame position
Interpolation error while
E626
calculating slit image line No.
Standard deviation out of
E627
tolerance - angle accuracy error
Angular data continuity error on
E628
detector at one side
- Adjust CMOS frame position
Angular data continuity error on
E629
detectors at both sides
Inspection error – continuity
error
E631 Slit inspection table writing error - Adjust position of the CMOS frame
E632∼ - Replace CMOS frame complete
Others
E645 - Replace DCPU board
Data stability out of range in
E646 - Make sure that the disk is firmly fixed
stationary position
E647∼
Others - Replace CMOS frame complete
E648
" If the error code is not cleared after performing any action specified above (adjustment /
cleaning), replace the instrument parts in the following order: CMOS frame complete →
DCPU board → disk.
10-7
While “IACS” service function is carried out, the following error codes can be displayed:
ERROR
DESCRIPTION ACTION
CODE
E700 System observation (watchdog) - Replace CMOS frame complete
E701 error - Replace DCPU board
E710 Cannot get angle data - Replace CMOS frame complete
Cannot get slit information - Replace CMOS frame complete
E721
E724 Deterioration of slit data - Replace CMOS frame complete
E732 Deterioration of slit data - Replace CMOS frame complete
E740 Disk accuracy out of standard - Replace disk (axis complete)
E750 Cannot get slit information - Replace CMOS frame complete
E760
E761 - Replace CMOS frame complete
Calculation error
E762 - Replace DCPU board
E763
10-8
DCPU error codes (shown only on serial port as data out):
ERROR CODE DESCRIPTION

E410∼E450 Loader errors
E912 System error
E913 Parameter error
E999 Stack error
" If E271 error code is displayed, there is a failure in communication with Bluetooth device
(defective Bluetooth unit or initialization of Bluetooth device failed).
Tilt sensor error codes:

Tilt error codes are displayed as “Err x” in “Tilt” screen of Tilt
“Encoder, Tilt” mode submenu. X -412
Y 1567
“x”: error: ⎡0⎦ = OK Tmp 21.9
PWM 6800
except ⎡0⎦ = error code (***) Err 0
Error codes of “x”:
ERROR MEANING DESCRIPTION

CODE
123 Cannot read EEPROM data
124 Cannot read temperature sensor data Check connections (Tilt board / JX board,
JX board / DCPU), replace tilt sensor,
125 Cannot adjust LED power check (replace) DCPU board, check
126 LED PWM value out of range (replace) JX board
127 Calculation failure
10-9
10.2.2 EDM
ERROR CODE SERVICE MODE USER MODE

DESCRIPTION
DISPLAY DISPLAY
011 E011 F1 (F11) MEAS level error
014 E014 Signal off F4 (F12) MEAS level error
019 E019 Other distance meas. error
021 E021 E021 F1 (F11) CAL level error
022 E022 E022 F2 (F21)CAL level error
029 E029 E029 Other CAL meas. error
031 E031 E031 ACAL adjustment error
CX is out of useable temp. range
Temp Range
032 E032 (temp. inside the CX is less than
OUT
-25°C or more than +70°C)
033 E033 E033 ACAL adjustment out of range
070 E070 Distance calculation failure
072 E072 F2-F1 coincidence erorr
BadCondition
096 E096 BadCondition Mispointing error
097 E097 E097 Device (self check) error
201 E201 Time out EDM time out error
205 E205 E205 EDM serial communication error
902 E902 - Command format error
911 E911 - Command parameter range error
912 E912 - Command parameter quantity error
If the respective request command is sent from the computer to the instrument, and “EDM < - - >
PC” service function is selected, the error code output is the same as Service mode display shown
in the table above.
10-10
11-1
11. EXPLODED VIEW
11. EXPLODED VIEW

(NAMES OF PARTS, LUBRICATION)
11-2
In the parts list below LTM stands for Low Temperature Model
11.1 TRIBRACH TR-102
Parts stated in Sokkia Parts Catalogue No. 192E

1-1 Circular level complete 1-11 Screw, plate spring
1-2 Adjusting screw, plate level 1-12 Ring nut
1-3 Levelling screw cap 1-13 Levelling screw complete
1-4 Leveling head w/clamp 1-14 Retainer ring
1-5 Lock label 1-15 Levelling screw retainer
1-6 Cap 1-16 Screw, levelling screw retainer
1-7 Screw, 2.5x3.0mm 1-17 Base plate w/screw holder
1-8 Clamp plate retaining ring 1-18 Levelling screw holder
1-9 Plate spring 1-19 Steel ball
1-10 Plate spring B 1-20 Stopper cap
Parts stated in Sokkia Parts Catalogue No. 192E(S) in accordance with new parts control system
1-1 Circular level complete 1-11 Spring retainer screw QS
1-2 Plate level adjusting screw 1-12 Retainer ring QS
1-3 Screw cap QS 1-13 Levelling screw
1-4 Leveling head w/clamp 1-14 Ring plate GLS-1500
1-5 Clamp seal qs 1-15 Levelling screw retainer
1-6 Plummet blind cover QS 1-16 Spring plate retainer QS
1-7 6SU-K 2.5x3 S 3BZn 1-17 Base plate w/screw holder
1-8 Clamp seal retainer QQS 1-18 Levelling screw holder
1-9 Leaf spring QS 1-19 Steel ball
1-10 Plate spring B 1-20 Stopper cap
11-3
Cemedine Super X torque: Three Bond

Three Bond No. 8008 (clear) 14∼18 kgfcm 1401C
1401 (ball position) (1.4∼1.8 Nm)
No.7 1-3 1-7 SH-33M
1-4 1-1 1-12 1-13
1-19 G53
1-7 1-6 1-14
1-5 1-7
1-7 1-15
1-9 G53
No.7-2
1-11
1-10 1-2 1-20
Three Bond 1-18
G53 1-17
1401C torque:
6 kgfcm
1-8 (0.6 Nm) 3M
Three Bond EC-1368
Three Bond torque: 1401 1-16 (front and
1401C back side)
3 kgfcm
(0.3 Nm)
Fig. 11-1
11-4
11.2 AXIS FLANGE, H-SLIPRING

No. Part Name No. Part Name
2-1 Seal, waterproof plate 2-14 H-slipring cable (CX-101/102/LTM)
2-2 Waterproof plate 2-15 Screw, 3.0x8.0mm (CX-101/102/LTM)
2-3 V ring E 2-16 Seal, connector base (CX-101/102/LTM)
2-4 Axis flange B (CX-101/102/LTM) 2-17 Connector base (CX-101/102/LTM)
EXT-CN2 with connector base (CX-
2-5 Axis flange A (CX-103/105/107) 2-18
101/102/LTM)
Axis flange complete (12)
2-6 2-19 Connector cap (CX-101/102/LTM)
(CX-101/102/LTM)
Axis flange complete (357)
2-7 2-20 Tube, H cable (CX-101/102/LTM)
(CX-103/105/107)
Seal, axis flange cover
2-8 Seal washer C (CX-103/105/107) 2-21
(CX-101/102/LTM)
Axis flange cover complete
2-9 Screw, 4.0x10.0mm 2-22
(CX-101/102/LTM)
2-10 Spacer (CX-101/102/LTM) 2-23 Screw, 2.0x5.0mm (CX-101/102/LTM)
CT 2.5x8 SUS 3BZn
2-11 Screw, 2.0x5.0mm (CX-101/102/LTM) 2-24
(CX-101/102/LTM)
2-12 H-slipring board (CX-101/102/LTM) 2-25 Screw, 2.0x8.0mm
2-13 H-slipring brush (CX-101/102/LTM) 2-26 Spring washer
2-1 Seal, waterproof plate 2-14 H-slipring cable (CX-101/102/LTM)
2-2 Waterproof plate 2-15 CR 3X8 S Ni (CX-101/102/LTM)
2-3 V ring E 2-16 Seal, connector base (CX-101/102/LTM)
2-4 Axis flange B (CX-101/102/LTM) 2-17 Connector base (CX-101/102/LTM)
EXT-CN2 with connector base (CX-
2-5 Axis flange A (CX-103/105/107) 2-18
101/102/LTM)
2-6 Axis flange complete (CX-101/102/LTM) 2-19 Connector cap (CX-101/102/LTM)
2-7 Axis flange complete (CX-103/105/107) 2-20 Tube, H cable (CX-101/102/LTM)
Seal, axis flange cover
2-8 Seal washer C (CX-103/105/107) 2-21
(CX-101/102/LTM)
Axis flange cover complete
2-9 6S 4X10 SUS E 2-22
(CX-101/102/LTM)
2-10 Spacer (CX-101/102/LTM) 2-23 CR 2X5 S 3BZn (CX-101/102/LTM)
CT 2.5x8 SUS 3BZn
2-11 CR-L 2X5 B 0 (CX-101/102/LTM) 2-24
(CX-101/102/LTM)
2-12 H-slipring board (CX-101/102/LTM) 2-25 CT 2X8 S Ni
2-13 H-slipring brush (CX-101/102/LTM) 2-26 SW 2 Pb Ni
(*) Clean the H-slipring board “2-12” with mixture of alcohol and ether and using a brush (tool)
apply grease G51 to the contacts of H-slipring board
11-5
Three Bond Three Bond

Three Bond torque:
1401C 1401C
1121 2.5 kgfcm (0.25 Nm)
2-25
2-26 2-5
2-1
2-4
2-16 Cemedine
2-17 1500
2-24
2-2 2-8 2-7
2-19 2-9
2-6 2-10
torque: 2-20
2-9 2 kgfcm
2-14 2-18 torque:
(0.2 Nm) 10 kgfcm
G38 2-11 2-13 (1 Nm)
torque:
2-3 2-12 2-21
2-15 6 kgfcm
G51 (0.6 Nm) 2-22
torque: torque: 2-23 torque:

torque: 2 kgfcm
2 kgfcm (0.2 Nm) 10 kgfcm (1 Nm) 3 kgfcm Three
(0.3 Nm) (0.2 Nm)
Bond
Three Bond 1401C
1401C
Fig. 11-2
11-6
11.3 VERTICAL AXIS, CMOS FRAME H

Vertical axis complete (12L)
3-1 3-6 Screw, 2.6x6.0mm
(CX-101/102/LTM)
Vertical axis complete (357)
3-2 3-7 CCD shield sticker (double detector)
(CX-103/105/107)
CMOS frame complete H (double)
3-3 Cable retainer A (CX-101/102/LTM) 3-8
(double detector)
CMOS frame complete H (single)
3-4 Screw, 2.6x4.0mm (CX-101/102/LTM) 3-9
(single detector)
3-5 CMOS frame base 3-10 Screw, 3.0x6.0mm
Vertical axis complete (12L)
3-1 3-6 CT 2.6X6 S Ni
(CX-101/102/LTM)
Vertical axis complete (357)
3-2 3-7 CCD shield sticker (double detector)
(CX-103/105/107)
CMOS frame complete H (double)
3-3 Cable retainer A (CX-101/102/LTM) 3-8
(double detector)
CMOS frame complete H (single)
3-4 CR 2.6X4 B 0 (CX-101/102/LTM) 3-9
(single detector)
3-5 CMOS frame base 3-10 CT 3X6 B 0
11-7
torque: Three Bond

6 kgfcm (0.6 Nm) 1401C Three Bond
1401C
3-10
torque:
3-9 3-8
5 kgfcm
(0.5 Nm)
Three Bond
3013B
torque:
4 kgfcm 3-6
(0.4 Nm) 3-7
Three Bond 3-5 torque:
1401C 2 kgfcm G38
3-4
(0.2 Nm)
3-3
Three Bond
1401C
G38
O2
G38
3-1 G38
3-2 G38
CX-107
CX-102 CX-105
CX-101 CX-103
torque: Three Bond

25 kgfcm (2.5 Nm) 1401C
Fig. 11-3
11-8
11.4 OPTICAL PLUMMET, LASER PLUMMET, HANDLE

4-1 Cable guide 4-13 Screw, 2.0x2.5mm
4-2 Screw, 2.0x4.0mm 4-14 Optical plummet eyepiece knob cover
4-3 Sticker B 4-15 V ring
4-4 V ring sticker A 4-16 Screw, 3.0x4.0mm
Handle complete w/antenna
4-5 4-17 Laser plummet complete
(TSshield(2G)(3G))
Handle complete
4-6 4-18 Cap, laser plummet
(w/o TSshield(2G)(3G))
4-7 Screw, handle 4-19 TS shield label (TSshield(2G)(3G))
4-8 Optical plummet complete 4-20 US patent sticker (for US market)
FCC label (TSshield(2G)(3G)/BT except
4-9 Optical plummet focusing ring cover 4-21
Europe/Korea/China)
Adjusting screw, optical plummet Explanatory label (BT except
4-10 4-22
reticle Europe/China)
Explanatory label (2G) (TSshield(2G)
4-11 Cover, reticle screw 4-23
except Europe/Korea/China)
4-12 Optical plummet eyepiece knob 4-24 Explanatory label (3G) (TSshield(3G))
4-1 Cable guide 4-13 Screw, 2.0x2.5mm
4-2 CT 2X4 S 3BZn 4-14 Optical plummet eyepiece knob cover
4-3 Sticker B 4-15 V ring
4-4 V ring sticker A 4-16 6SV 3X4 SUS E
Handle complete w/antenna
4-5 4-17 Laser plummet complete
(TSshield(2G)(3G))
Handle complete
4-6 4-18 Cap, GTS-220
(w/o TSshield(2G)(3G))
4-7 Screw, handle 4-19 TS shield label (TSshield(2G)(3G))
4-8 Optical plummet complete 4-20 US patent sticker (for US market)
Optical plummet focusing knob FCC label (TSshield(2G)(3G)/BT except
4-9 4-21
cover Europe/Korea/China)
Optical plummet reticle adjusting Explanatory label (BT except
4-10 4-22
screw Europe/China)
Explanatory label (2G) (TSshield(2G)
4-11 Reticle screw cover 4-23
except Europe/Korea/China)
4-12 Optical plummet eyepiece knob 4-24 Explanatory label (3G) (TSshield(3G))
11-9
G38
4-3
4-4
4-19
4-7
4-5
4-6
4-7 4-21
Three Bond torque: 4-22

1401C 3 kgfcm 4-16
(0.3 Nm) G41
4-13 G41 Three Bond 4-20 4-23
1401C 4-24
4-14 4-2
4-11 G41
4-12 4-15
G41 4-10 4-9
G38
4-1
4-8
torque:
4-17 Three Bond
2 kgfcm
torque: 4-18 (0.2 Nm) 1401C
3 kgfcm
(0.3 Nm) Fig. 11-4
11-10
11.5 TR COVER, TRIGGER KEY, TRGK BOARD

5-1 TR cover 5-13 Handle caution label (TSshield(2G)(3G))
5-2 Screw, 2.5x8.0mm 5-14 Explanatory label (w/o TSshield(2G)(3G))
5-3 PTP-S 2x5 S 3Zn-CY 5-15 Explanatory label (TSshield(2G)(3G))
5-4 Waterproof sheet 5-16 Low Temperature Model sticker 1
5-5 Trigger key 5-17 Laser explanatory label (class3R)
5-6 Tape, buzzer 5-18 Warning label (for laser plummet)
5-7 Buzzer unit 5-19 CX sticker
5-8 TRGK 5-20 Standard base
5-9 TRG_HNS 5-21 Screw, 4.0x16.0mm
5-10 Seal, TR cover 5-22 Cap A
5-11 Shield sheet A 5-23 TR cover complete A (TSshield(2G))
5-12 Shield sheet B 5-24 TR cover complete B (TSshield(3G))
5-1 TR cover 5-13 Handle caution label (TSshield(2G)(3G))
5-2 CR 2.5X8 SUS E 5-14 Explanatory label (w/o TSshield(2G)(3G))
5-3 PTP-S 2x5 S 3Zn-CY 5-15 Explanatory label (TSshield(2G)(3G))
5-4 Waterproof sheet 5-16 Low Temperature Model sticker 1
5-5 Trigger key 5-17 Laser explanatory label (class3R)
5-6 Tape, buzzer 5-18 Warning label (for laser plummet)
5-7 Buzzer unit 5-19 CX sticker
5-8 TRGK 5-20 Standard base
5-9 TRG_HNS 5-21 6S 4X16 SUS E
5-10 Seal, TR cover 5-22 Cap A
5-11 Shield sheet A 5-23 TR cover complete A (TSshield(2G))
5-12 Shield sheet B 5-24 TR cover complete B (TSshield(3G))
11-11
Three Bond torque:

torque: Three Bond torque:
1401C 3 kgfcm
20 kgfcm (2.0 Nm) 1401C 3 kgfcm
(0.3 Nm)
(0.3 Nm)
5-22 5-3
5-21 5-23
5-24
5-11
COAX_TB
3G_COAX 5-10
_HNS
5-16 5-3 TS_COMM

_3G
TS_COMM
_2G 5-1
5-7
5-3
5-6
5-3 5-8
5-17 5-5
5-12 5-4
5-2
5-18 5-9
5-13 GPS_
torque: ANTENNA 5-19
5-14
5-15 5-20 3 kgfcm
(0.3 Nm) Three Bond
1401C
Fig. 11-5
11-12
11.6 CLAMP AND FINE MOTION SCREWS, DISPLAY

Standard base clamp&fine motion screw
6-1 Display complete 6-15
(CX-103/105/107/LTM)
6-2 Display complete (L) (LTM) 6-16 Clamp knob (CX-101/102)
Clamp knob
6-3 Display frame w/LCD cover 6-17
(CX-103/105/107/LTM)
6-4 Screw, 2.0x6.0mm 6-18 Set screw, clamp knob
Telescope clamp & fine motion screw
6-5 Sealing, display frame 6-19
(CX-101/102)
6-6 Key top 6-20
(CX-103/105/107/LTM)
6-7 KEY-LCD UNIT1 6-21 Flexible cable
6-8 KEY-LCD UNIT2 (LTM) 6-22 Double sided adhesive tape
6-9 PTP-S 2x5 S 3Zn-CY 6-23 Ferrite core
6-10 Shield sticker 6-24 Double sided adhesive tape
6-11 Display rear frame 6-25 Ferrite core (double display)
6-12 Screw, 2.5x6.0mm 6-26 Standard base cover (single display)
6-13 Sealing, display rear frame 6-27 Screw, 2.5x8.0mm (single display)
6-14 6-28 Screw, 3.0x4.0mm
(CX-101/102)
6-1 Display complete 6-15
(CX-103/105/107/LTM)
6-2 Display complete (L) (LTM) 6-16 Clamp knob (CX-101/102)
Clamp knob
6-3 Display frame w/LCD cover 6-17
(CX-103/105/107/LTM)
6-4 CR-L 2X6 B Ni 6-18 Set screw, clamp knob
6-5 Sealing, display frame 6-19
(CX-101/102)
6-6 Key top 6-20
(CX-103/105/107/LTM)
6-7 KEY-LCD UNIT1 6-21 Flexible cable
6-8 KEY-LCD UNIT2 (LTM) 6-22 Double sided adhesive tape
6-9 PTP-S 2x5 S 3Zn-CY 6-23 Ferrite core DL-502/503
6-10 Shield sticker 6-24 Double sided adhesive tape
6-11 Display rear frame 6-25 Ferrite core (double display)
6-12 CT2.5X6S Ni 6-26 Standard base cover (single display)
6-13 Sealing, display rear frame 6-27 Screw, 2.5x8.0mm (single display)
6-14 6-28 Screw, 3.0x4.0mm
(CX-101/102)
11-13
Three Bond torque:

Three Bond torque: 1401C 1.8 kgfcm
torque: 1401C 2 kgfcm torque:
(0.18 Nm)
4 kgfcm (0.2 Nm) 2 kgfcm
(0.4 Nm) 6-3 (0.2 Nm)
6-21
6-5
6-24
6-8 6-6 6-4
Three Bond 6-7
1121 6-9
6-25 6-10
G41 6-1
6-24 6-11 6-2
6-23
G41
6-20 6-12
6-19 6-28 6-9
6-21 6-15
6-14 6-17
6-28 6-16 6-13
6-22 6-8
6-18 6-10
6-7
6-17
6-16 6-18 6-6
6-13 6-26
6-27
Three Bond
1121 6-3
6-11
6-5
6-12 torque: 6-1
6 kgfcm 6-2
torque: 6-13
torque: (0.6 Nm) 6-4 torque:
6 kgfcm
3 kgfcm torque: 1.8 kgfcm torque:
(0.6 Nm)
(0.3 Nm) 2 kgfcm (0.18 Nm) 3 kgfcm
(0.2 Nm) (0.3 Nm)
Three Bond
1401C
Fig. 11-6
11-14
11.7 IF COVER
7-1 IF cover 7-19 Battery cover hook
7-2 Brand name plate 7-20 Spring, battery hook
7-3 Double sided adhesive tape 7-21 Sealing B, BAT cover
7-4 USB cover 7-22 Battery spring
7-5 USB cover hook 7-23 Sealing, IF board
7-6 Spring 7-24 Dipole antenna (BT)
7-7 Hinge 7-25 Antenna cap (w/o BT)
7-8 Sealing B, USB cover 7-26 BT board complete
7-9 Tape A 7-27 PTP2x4S Ni (7-27A: BT, 7-27B: w/o BT)
7-10 Double sided adhesive tape 7-28 PTP2x6S Ni (BT)
7-11 IF board base 7-29 IF cover complete w/BT
7-12 PTP2x4S Ni 7-30 IF cover complete w/o BT
7-13 FC-4 complete 7-31 Sealing C, USB cover
7-14 IF board cover 7-32 Sealing C, BAT cover
7-15 Shield sheet 7-33 BT label (for BT board complete)
7-16 Tape SW 7-34 Screw, 2.5x8.0mm
7-17 Tape U 7-35 Washer
7-18 Battery cover
7-1 IF cover 7-19 Battery cover hook
7-2 Brand name plate 7-20 Spring, battery hook
7-3 Double sided adhesive tape 7-21 Sealing B, BAT cover
7-4 USB cover 7-22 Battery spring
7-5 USB cover hook 7-23 Sealing, IF board
7-6 Spring 7-24 Dipole antenna (BT)
7-7 Hinge 7-25 Antenna cap (w/o BT)
7-8 Sealing B, USB cover 7-26 BT board complete
7-9 Tape A 7-27 PTP2x4S Ni (7-27A: BT, 7-27B: w/o BT)
7-10 Double sided adhesive tape 7-28 PTP2x6S Ni (BT)
7-11 IF board base 7-29 IF cover complete w/BT
7-12 PTP2x4S Ni 7-30 IF cover complete w/o BT
7-13 FC-4 complete 7-31 Sealing C, USB cover
7-14 IF board cover 7-32 Sealing C, BAT cover
7-15 Shield sheet 7-33 BT label (for BT board complete)
7-16 Tape SW 7-34 CR 2.5X8 SUS E
7-17 Tape U 7-35 Washer
7-18 Battery cover
11-15
torque: Three Bond

2 kgfcm 1401C
(0.2 Nm)
7-24 Cemedine 7-30
7-23 7-29
Super X (clear)
7-12 7-27B 7-25 (for BT)
7-28
7-33 green
7-7
7-27A 7-32
7-21 gray
7-12 7-34 7-16 7-19
7-14 7-26
7-17
7-5
7-13 7-12 7-31
7-35 7-20
7-11 7-6
7-15 7-18
7-20
7-9
7-10 7-19
7-8
7-15
7-4 7-2
torque: 7-1 7-22 7-3
7-7
3 kgfcm green
gray
(0.3 Nm)
Fig. 11-7
11-16
11.8 TILT SENSOR, TELESCOPE CLAMP, V CONTACT

RING, JX BOARD, LASER BOARD
8-1 Horizontal axis bushing R 8-12 Flexible cable FC-5
8-2 Screw, 3.0x8.0mm 8-13 JX board
8-3 Washer 8-14 Screw, 2.0x4.0mm
8-4 Telescope clamp complete 8-15 Laser board (laser plummet)
8-5 Screw, 2.5x8.0mm 8-16 LP-HNS cable (laser plummet)
8-6 Vertical contact ring complete 8-17 Screw, 2.0x4.0mm (laser plummet)
8-7 Screw, 2.0x5.0mm 8-18 Coil spring
8-8 Screw, 2.0x8.0mm 8-19 Screw, 2.5x5.0mm
8-9 X-Y tilt sensor complete 8-20 CN-COAX-HNS (TSshield(2G)(3G))
8-10 Screw, 3.0x10.0mm 8-21 Waterproof plate (w/o TSshield(2G)(3G))
8-11 Washer
8-1 Horizontal axis bushing R 8-12 Flexible cable FC-5
8-2 6S 3X8 SUS E 8-13 JX board
8-3 FWs 3 B 0 8-14 CT 2X4 S Ni
8-4 Telescope clamp complete 8-15 Laser board (laser plummet)
8-5 6S 2.5X8 S Cr 8-16 LP-HNS cable (laser plummet)
8-6 V-contact ring complete 8-17 CT 2X4 S Ni (laser plummet)
8-7 CR-L 2X5 B 0 8-18 Coil spring
8-8 CR-L 2X8 S Ni 8-19 CT 2.5X5 S Ni
8-9 X-Y tilt sensor complete 8-20 CN-COAX-HNS (TSshield(2G)(3G))
8-10 6S 3X10 SUS E 8-21 Waterproof plate (w/o TSshield(2G)(3G))
8-11 FW 3 SUS E
(*) Clean the Vertical contact ring complete “8-6” with mixture of alcohol and ether and using a
brush (tool) apply grease G51 to the contacts of contact ring
11-17
torque:
Three Bond 8-20 6 kgfcm (0.6 Nm)
1401C 8-21
torque:
8-3 10 kgfcm (1 Nm)
8-1 8-2
8-4
G38
G38 8-6
8-9
G51
G38
8-5
8-12
torque: 8-7
8-18 8-15 12 kgfcm
8-11 (1.2 Nm)
8-8
8-10 8-13
8-19 8-17
torque: torque:
torque: 8-16 2 kgfcm 2 kgfcm
8-19 8-18
2.5 kgfcm (0.25 Nm) 8-14 (0.2 Nm) (0.2 Nm)
Three Bond 1401C Three Bond apply to

(screw thread) 1401C fixing screws
Fig. 11-8
11-18
11.9 HORIZONTAL AXIS, CMOS FRAME V

9-1 Horizontal axis complete (S) (single detector) 9-11 Screw, 2.0x6.0mm
9-2 Horizontal axis complete (D) (double detector) 9-12 Connector cap (CX-103/105/107)
9-3 Screw, 3.0x10.0mm 9-13 Sealing, connector base
EXT-CN1 with connector base
9-4 Washer 9-14
(CX-103/105/107)
9-5 CMOS frame complete V (double detector) 9-15 Blind cover (CX-101/102/LTM)
9-6 CMOS frame complete V (single detector) 9-16 Screw, 2.0x4.0mm
9-7 Screw, 3.0x6.0mm 9-17 FC-3
9-8 CMOS frame base 9-18 Ferrite core
9-9 Screw, 2.6x6.0mm 9-19 Double sided adhesive tape
9-10 Connector base (CX-103/105/107)
9-1 Horizontal axis complete (S) (single detector) 9-11 CR-L 2X6 B Ni
9-2 Horizontal axis complete (D) (double detector) 9-12 Connector cap (CX-103/105/107)
9-3 6S 3X10 SUS E 9-13 Sealing, connector base
EXT-CN1 with connector base
9-4 FWs 3 B 0 9-14
(CX-103/105/107)
9-5 CMOS frame complete V (double detector) 9-15 Blind cover (CX-101/102/LTM)
9-6 CMOS frame complete V (single detector) 9-16 CT 2X4 S Ni
9-7 CT 3X6 B 0 9-17 FC-3
9-8 CMOS frame base 9-18 Ferrite core DL-502/503
9-9 CT 2.6X6 S Ni 9-19 Double sided adhesive tape
9-10 Connector base (CX-103/105/107)
11-19
torque:
6 kgfcm (0.6 Nm) 9-7
9-4 9-5 torque:
9-3 4 kgfcm
(0.4 Nm)
torque:
6 kgfcm
(0.6 Nm)
torque:
10 kgfcm 9-2
(1 Nm)
9-8
9-9
9-19 9-8
9-17 9-18 9-16
9-4
Refer to 9-3
9-13 16-1∼30 9-9
9-11 9-12
9-15
9-13 9-6
9-14 9-7
torque: 9-10 9-11
2 kgfcm 9-1
(0.2 Nm) torque: torque: torque:
6 kgfcm 2 kgfcm 6 kgfcm (0.6 Nm)
(do not apply
locking agent) (0.6 Nm) (0.2 Nm)
(do not apply Three Bond apply to
locking agent) 1401C fixing screws
Fig. 11-9
11-20
11.10 TELESCOPE FRAME AND TELECOPE COVERS, ECPU

BOARD, PX BOARD, DICHROIC PRISM
10-1 Telescope frame complete 10-14 Washer
10-2 Dustproof sticker 10-15 Screw, 2.5 x 6.0mm
10-3 Spacer 10-16 PX board complete
10-4 V ring A 10-17 Screw, 2.0x4.0mm
10-5 V ring B 10-18 FC2
10-6 Upper cover 10-19 Dichroic prism complete
10-7 Screw, 2.0x8.0mm 10-20 Screw, 2.5 x 6.0mm
10-8 Sighting collimator unit 10-21 ECPU board complete
10-9 CR-L 2x4 B BNi 10-22 Screw, 2.0x4.0mm
10-10 Sealing, cover 10-23 FC1
10-11 Clip 10-24 Shield sheet
10-12 Guide light cover complete 10-25 Screw, 2.0x3.0mm
10-13 PX base w/ALC complete 10-26 Packing
10-1 Telescope frame complete 10-14 FW 2.6 S Ni
10-2 Dustproof sticker 10-15 6S 2.5X6 S 3BZn
10-3 Spacer 10-16 PX board complete
10-4 Telescope frame V ring A 10-17 CR-L 2X4 S Ni
10-5 Telescope frame V ring B 10-18 FC2
10-6 Upper cover 10-19 Dichroic prism complete
10-7 CR-L 2X8 B Ni 10-20 6S 2.5X6 S 3BZn
10-8 Sighting coll. unit, GPT-3000 10-21 ECPU board complete
10-9 CR-L 2x4 B BNi 10-22 CT 2X4 S Ni
10-10 Sealing, cover 10-23 FC1
10-11 Clip 10-24 Shield sheet
10-12 Guide light cover complete 10-25 6SU-K 2X3 S 3BZn
10-13 PX base w/ALC complete 10-26 Packing
11-21
Cemedine torque: Three Bond

Super X (clear) 2 kgfcm 1401C
(one drop of glue) (0.2 Nm)
torque:
10-8 G38 2 kgfcm
10-9 torque:
10-26 10-5 (0.2 Nm)
3 kgfcm
10-7 (0.3 Nm) 10-18 torque:
10-17 2.5 kgfcm
10-20
10-6 10-2 (0.25 Nm)
10-11 10-16
10-13 10-25
10-14
10-10 10-2 10-19 10-15
10-24 10-10
10-3
10-22
10-11
10-23 10-21 10-1

10-7
10-4 10-12
Cemedine
G38 10-8
Super X (clear) 10-26
torque: Three Bond (one drop of glue) 10-9
2 kgfcm (0.2 Nm) 1401C
torque:
2 kgfcm
Fig. 11-10 (0.2 Nm)
11-22
11.11 CX/LD, SHUTTER, CAL FILTER, SOLENOID COMPLETE,

GUIDE LIGHT, TX BOARD
11-1 CX/LD with frame complete 11-18 Laser beam mask 2
11-2 Screw, 2.5x8.0mm 11-19 FC-RTCLPI
11-4 LD lens frame complete 11-21 Mirror complete
11-5 LD lens frame complete (L) (LTM) 11-22 Screw, 2.5 x 6.0mm
11-6 CR-L2x5S Ni 11-23 Washer
11-7 Spring washer 11-24 Laser beam mask
11-9 Shutter motor complete 11-26 Solenoid complete
11-10 Screw, 1.7x3.0mm 11-27 TX board complete
11-11 Shutter frame complete 11-28 Screw, 2.0x4.0mm
11-12 Screw, 2.5x6.0mm 11-29 Guide light base
11-13 CAL filter 11-30 Guide light complete
11-14 CAL diffusion filter 11-31 Washer
11-15 ND filter 11-32 CAL fiber
11-17 Screw, 2.0x3.0mm
11-1 CX/LD with frame complete 11-18 Laser beam mask 2
11-2 6S 2.5X8 S Cr 11-19 FC-RTCLPI
11-3 Washer 11-20 CR 2X3 S 3BZn
11-4 LD lens frame complete 11-21 Mirror complete
11-5 LD lens frame complete (L) (LTM) 11-22 6S 2.5X6 S 3BZn
11-6 CR-L2x5S Ni 11-23 PX case washer (t=0.25 mm)
11-7 SW 2 S Ni 11-24 Laser beam mask
11-8 FWs 2.5 S Ni 11-25 6S 2X3 S 3BZn
11-9 Shutter motor complete 11-26 Solenoid complete
11-10 CRs 1.7X3 S 3BZn 11-27 TX board complete
11-11 Shutter frame complete 11-28 CT 2X4 S Ni
11-12 CR 2.5X6 S 3BZn 11-29 Guide light base
11-13 CAL filter 11-30 Guide light complete
11-14 CAL diffusion filter 11-31 FW 2.6 S Ni
11-15 ND filter 11-32 CAL fiber
11-16 6S 2X3 S 3BZn 11-33 6S 2.5X8 S Cr
11-17 6SU-K 2X3 S 3BZn
11-23
torque: torque:
torque: 2 kgfcm 2.5 kgfcm
2.5 kgfcm
11-28 (0.2 Nm)
(2.5 Nm)
(0.25 Nm)
11-27
11-9 11-22 torque:
11-32 11-22 0.5 kgfcm
torque: 11-31 (0.05 Nm)
2 kgfcm 11-30
(0.2 Nm)
11-18 11-21 11-22
11-26
11-16 11-14 11-22 11-23
11-25
11-17 11-12
11-15
11-13 11-11
11-29
11-5 11-33 11-24
11-6
11-7 11-4 11-25
11-8 11-10
torque:
2 kgfcm
11-3 (0.2 Nm)
11-1 11-19 torque:
2.5 kgfcm
11-2 11-20 (0.25 Nm)
torque: torque:
torque:
2.5 kgfcm 6 kgfcm
2 kgfcm
(0.25 Nm) (0.6 Nm) Three Bond apply to
(0.2 Nm)
1401C fixing screws
Fig. 11-11
11-24
11.12 OBJECTIVE LENS, FOCUSING TUBE, FOCUSING RING

12-1 Objective lens complete 12-9 V ring, focusing ring
12-2 Screw, 2.0x5.0mm 12-10 Focusing ring
12-4 Objective lens retainer 12-12 Washer
12-5 O ring B, objective lens 12-13 Screw, 4.0x5.0mm
12-6 O ring A, objective lens 12-14 Focusing ring cover
12-7 Focusing tube complete 12-15 V ring sticker
12-8 Focusing tube screw complete
12-1 Objective lens complete 12-9 Focusing knob V ring
12-2 6S 2X5 SUS E 12-10 Focusing ring
12-3 FW 2 S Ni 12-11 6S 2X3 SUS E
12-4 Objective lens retainer 12-12 FW 2 S Ni
12-5 Objective lens O ring B 12-13 6S 4X5 SUS E
12-6 Objective lens O ring A 12-14 Focusing knob cover
12-7 Focusing tube complete 12-15 V ring sticker
12-8 Bushing QS
11-25
G42 12-8 Loctite 222

12-9
G42
G42 12-10 G42
12-7 12-14
G42 12-12
12-9
G31
G31 12-11 G42
12-2
12-3
12-4 Three Bond
12-5 1401C
12-6 12-13
G42
12-1
12-15
Fig. 11-12
11-26
11.13 PORRO PRISM, RETICLE, EYEPIECE

13-1 Porro prism w/ frame complete 13-12 Screw, 2.0x4.0mm
13-2 Screw, 2.0x5.0mm 13-13 Sealing, reticle cover
13-3 Washer 13-14 Reticle cover
13-5 Screw, 5.0x5.0mm 13-16 Eyepiece complete
13-6 Spring, reticle 13-17 Eyepiece knob cover
13-7 Reticle complete 13-18 Eyepiece knob
13-9 Spring washer 13-20 O ring
13-10 Washer 13-21 Laser label
13-11 Ring, eyepiece
13-1 Porro prism w/frame complete 13-12 CRS2X4S 3BZN
13-2 6S 2X5 SUS E 13-13 Packing QS
13-3 FW 2 S Ni 13-14 Reticle cover
13-4 6S 2x8 SUS E 13-15 CR 2X4 S 3BZn
13-5 6SV 5x5 SUS E 13-16 Eyepiece complete
13-6 Spring QS 13-17 Eyepiece knob cover DL-503
13-7 Reticle complete 13-18 Eyepiece knob DL-503
13-8 CT2X5S NI 13-19 Screw 1.7X3.0mm DL-502-503
13-9 SW 2 Pb Ni 13-20 O ring
13-10 FW 2 S Ni 13-21 Laser label
13-11 Eyepiece ring QS
11-27
13-16
13-21
G46
13-19
13-18
13-17
13-5
13-6 13-20
13-4
13-7
13-11 13-14
13-1 13-12
13-3
13-15
13-2
13-10
13-8 13-13
13-9
Fig. 11-13
11-28
11.14 CASE PARTS

14-1 Hook complete, shoulder strap 14-15 Wiping cloth
14-2 Hook, shoulder strap 14-16 Hexagonal wrench (1.5) (laser plummet)
14-3 Hinge complete 14-17 Lens brush, small
14-4 Lock complete 14-18 Screw driver
14-5 Sealing 14-19 Adjusting pin, straight
14-6 Native sticker 14-20 Adjusting pin, bent
14-7 Name plate 14-21 Tool bag1
14-8 Caution label 14-22 Tool set M
14-9 FCC label 14-23 Telescope cap
14-10 Warning label 14-24 Sunshade
14-11 Packing illustration sticker 14-25 Plumb bob, transit
14-12 Caution sticker 14-26 CX operator's manual with TSshield
14-13 Laser caution sign board 14-27 CX operator's manual w/o TSshield
14-14 Silica gel
14-1 Shoulder strap hook complete 14-15 Wiping cloth
14-2 Shoulder strap hook 14-16 Hexagonal wrench (1.5) (laser plummet)
14-3 Hinge complete 14-17 Lens brush, small
14-4 Lock complete 14-18 Screw driver
14-5 Sealing 14-19 Adjusting pin, straight
14-6 Native sticker 14-20 Adjusting pin, bent
14-7 Name plate 14-21 Tool bag1
14-8 Caution label 14-22 Tool set M
14-9 FCC label DL-502/503 14-23 Telescope cap
14-10 Warning label DL-502/503 14-24 Lens hood, MS
14-11 Packing illustration sticker 14-25 Plumb bob, transit
14-12 Caution sticker 14-26 CX operator's manual with TSshield
14-13 Laser caution sign board 14-27 CX operator's manual w/o TSshield
14-14 Silica gel
11-29
Fig. 11-14
Refer to Fig. 11-15 for details of carrying case parts (14-A)

11-30
11.15 CASE WITH CARDBOARD AND CUSHION

15-1 Case complete 15-4 Cushion
15-2 Cardboard 15-5 Shoulder strap
15-3 Cushion
15-1 Case complete 15-4 Cushion
15-2 Cardboard 15-5 Shoulder strap
15-3 Cushion
11-31
Fig. 11-15
11-32
11.16 DCPU BOARD

Parts stated in Sokkia Parts Catalogue No. 192E and 192E(S)
No. Part Name Notes
16-1 DCPU board complete E CX-101 TS English CX-101 TSshield
16-6 DCPU board complete C CX-101 TS Chinese CX-101 TSshield
16-11 DCPU board complete K CX-101 TS Korean CX-101 TSshield
16-16 DCPU board complete E CX-101 English CX-101 w/o TSshield
16-21 DCPU board complete C CX-101 Chinese CX-101 w/o TSshield
16-26 DCPU board complete K CX-101 Korean CX-101 w/o TSshield
16-31 Lithium battery
11-33
silicone glue
SE9186 (clear)
16-31
16-1∼30
Fig. 11-16
11-34
12-1
12.
12. APPENDICES
12-2
12-3
I. SPECIFICATIONS
Except where stated, the following specifications apply to all CXs.
Telescope
Length 171mm
Aperture 45mm (EDM: 48mm)
Magnification 30x
Image Erect
Resolving power CX-101/102/103/105: 2.5” CX-107: 3.5”
Field of view 1°30’
Minimum focus 1.3m
Focusing screw 1 speed
Reticle illumination 5 brightness levels
Angle measurement
Horizontal and vertical circles Rotary absolute encoder
type
Detecting CX-101/102/103: 2 sides CX-105/107: 1 side
Angle units Degree / Gon / Mil (selectable)
Minimum display CX-101: 1” (0.0002gon / 0.005mil) / 0.5” (0.0001gon /
0.002mil) (selectable)
CX-102/103/105: 1” (0.0002gon / 0.005mil) / 5” (0.0010gon /
0.02mil) (selectable)
CX-107: 5” (0.0010gon / 0.02mil) / 1” (0.0002gon / 0.005mil)
(selectable)
Accuracy CX-101: 1” (0.0003gon/0.005mil) ISO 17123-3: 2001
CX-102: 2” (0.0006gon/0.010mil) ISO 17123-3: 2001
CX-103: 3” (0.0010gon/0.015mil) ISO 17123-3: 2001
CX-105: 5” (0.0015gon/0.025mil) ISO 17123-3: 2001
CX-107: 7” (0.0022gon/0.035mil) ISO 17123-3: 2001
Measuring time 0.5sec or less
Collimation compensation On/Off (selectable)
Measuring mode
Horizontal angle Right / Left (selectable)
Vertical angle Zenith / Horizontal / Horizontal ±90° / % (selectable)
Tilt angle compensation
Type Liquid 2-axis tilt sensor
Minimum display Agrees with minimum displayed measurement angle
Range of compensation ±6’ (±0.1111gon)
Automatic compensator ON (V & H / V) / OFF (selectable)
Compensation constant Can be changed
12-4
Distance measurement
Measuring method Coaxial phase shift measuring system
Signal source Red laser diode 690nm
Class 3R
(IEC60825-1 Ed. 2.0: 2007/FDA CDRH 21CFR Part 1040.10
and 1040.11 (complies with FDA performance standards for
laser products except for deviations pursuant to laser Notice
No. 50, dated June 24, 2007.))
(When the prism or reflective sheet is selected in Config mode
as target, the output is equivalent to Class 1).
Measuring range (Using the following reflective prism / reflective sheet target
during normal atmospheric conditions *1 / *2 is good
atmospheric conditions / *3 is conditions for the Low / High
Temperature Models
CX-101/102/103/105/107: Reflective sheet RS90N-K*4: 1.3 to 500m (1,640ft)
1.3 to 300m (980ft)*3
Reflective sheet RS50N-K*4: 1.3 to 300m (980ft)
1.3 to 180m (590ft)*3
*4
Reflective sheet target RS10N-K : 1.3 to 100m (320ft)
1.3 to 60m (190ft)*3
Compact prism CP01: 1.3 to 2,500m (8,200ft)
Standard prism AP01AR x 1: 1.3 to 4,000m (13,120ft)*7
1.3 to 5,000m (16,400ft)*2 *7
Standard prism AP01 x 3: 1.3 to 5,000m (16,400ft)*7
1.3 to 6,000m (19,680ft)*2 *7
Mini pole prism OR1PA: 1.3 to 500m (1,640ft)
Reflectorless (White)*5: 0.3 to 500m (1,640ft)
0.3 to 200m (650ft)*8
Reflectorless (Gray)*6: 0.3 to 220m (720ft)
0.3 to 100m (320ft)*8
Minimum display Fine/Rapid measurement: 0.001m (0.01ft./1/8inch)
Tracking measurement: 0.01m (0.1ft/1/2inch)
Maximum slope distance Prism/reflective sheet: 7680m (25,196.9ft)
display Reflectorless: 768m (2,519.7ft)
Distance unit m/ft/inch (selectable)
12-5
Accuracy
Using prism Fine measurement: ±(2 + 2ppm x D)mm
Rapid measurement: ±(5 + 2ppm x D)mm
Using reflective sheet target *4 Fine measurement: ±(3 + 2ppm x D)mm
Rapid measurement: ±(5 + 2ppm x D)mm
Reflectorless (White) *5 Fine measurement:
±(3 + 2ppm x D)mm (0.3 to 200m)
±(5 + 10ppm x D)mm (over 200 to 350m)
±(10 + 10ppm x D)mm (over 350 to 500m)
Rapid measurement:
±(6 + 2ppm x D)mm (0.3 to 200m)
±(8 + 10ppm x D)mm (over 200 to 350m)
±(15 + 10ppm x D)mm (over 350 to 500m)
Reflectorless (Gray) *6 Fine measurement:

±(3 + 2ppm x D)mm (0.3 to 100m)
±(5 + 10ppm x D)mm (over 100 to 170m)
±(10 + 10ppm x D)mm (over 170 to 220m)
Rapid measurement:
±(6 + 2ppm x D)mm (0.3 to 100m)
±(8 + 10ppm x D)mm (over 100 to 170m)
±(15 + 10ppm x D)mm (over 170 to 220m)
(D: measurement distance; unit: mm)
Measurement mode Fine measurement (single / repeat / average) /
Rapid measurement (single / repeat) /
Tracking measurement (selectable)
Measuring time Fine measurement: 1.7sec. + every 0.9sec.
Rapid measurement: 1.4sec. + every 0.7sec.
Tracking measurement: 1.4sec. + every 0.3sec.
Atmospheric correction
Temperature input range -30 to 60°C (in 0.1°C step) / -22 to 140°F (in 1°F step)
500 to 1,400hPa (in 1hPa step)
Pressure input range
375 to 1,050mmHg (in 1mmHg step)
14.8 to 41.3inchHg (in 0.1inchHg step)
ppm input range -499 to 499ppm (in 1ppm step)
-99 to 99mm (in 1mm step)
Prism constant correction
0mm fixed for reflectorless measurement
Earth curvature and refraction No / Yes K=0.142 / Yes K=0.20 (selectable)
correction
Scale factor setting 0.5 to 2.0
Sea level correction No/Yes (selectable)
(*1) Slight haze, visibility about 20km, sunny periods, weak scintillation.
(*2) No haze, visibility about 40km, overcast, no scintillation.
(*3) Measurement at -30 to -20°C (-22 to -4°F) (Low Temperature Model) / 50 to 60°C (122 to
140°F) (High Temperature Model)
(*4) Figures when the laser beam strikes within 30° of the reflective sheet target
12-6
(*5) Figures when using Kodak Gray Card White side (reflection factor 90%) and brightness
level is less than 30,000lx (a little cloudy).
(*6) Figures when using Kodak Gray Card Gray side (reflection factor 18%) and brightness level
is less than 30,000lx (a little cloudy).
(*5,*6) When performing reflectorless measurement, the possible measurement range and precision
will change depending on the target reflection factor, weather conditions and location
conditions.
(*7) Face the prism toward the instrument, so that the prism surface is at the right angle to the
instrument emitting beam (i.e. prism is not inclined) with the distance at 10m or less.
(*8) At the time of tracking measurement.
Guide light
Light source LED (red 626nm / green 524nm)
Distance 1.3 to 150m *1
Visible range Right and Left / Upward and Downward: ±4° (7m/100m)
Resolving power at 4’ (about 0.12m/100m)
center area (width)
Brightness 3 levels (bright/normal/dim)
Internal memory
Capacity 10,000 measurement points
External memory
USB flash memory (up to 8GB)
Data transfer
Data input/output Asynchronous serial, RS232C compatible
USB USB Revision 2.0 (FS), Host (Type A)
Bluetooth wireless technology
Transmission method FHSS (Frequency Hopping Spread Spectrum)
Modulation GFSK (Gaussian-filtered frequency shift keying)
Frequency band 2,402 to 2,48GHz
Bluetooth profile SPP (Serial Port Profile), DUN (Dial-up Networking Profile)
Power class Class 1
Usable range about 300m (no obstacles, few vehicles or sources of radio
emissions/interference in the near vicinity of the instrument,
no rain)
Authentication Yes/No (selectable)
12-7
Power supply
Power source Rechargeable Li-ion battery BDC70
Working duration at 25°C Distance and angle measurement:
(fine single measurement = every 30 sec.)
BDC70: about 36 hours
BDC60 (external battery, optional accessory):
about 44 hours
BDC61 (external battery, optional accessory):
about 89 hours
Battery state indicator 4 levels
Auto power-off 5 levels (5/10/15/30min / not set) (selectable)
External power source 6.7 to 12V
Charging time at 25°C about 5.5 hours (using CDC68) *9
Battery (BDC70)
Nominal voltage 7.2V
Capacity 5240mAh
Dimensions 38 (W) x 70 (D) x 40 (H) mm
Weight about 195g
Charger (CDC68)
Input voltage AC100 to 240V, frequency: 50/60Hz
Charging time per battery BDC70: about 5.5 hours
(at 25°C) (Charging can take longer than the times stated above when
temperatures are either especially high or low.)
Charging temp. range 0 to 40°C
Storage temp. range -20 to 65°C
Size 94 (W) x 102 (D) x 36 (H) mm
Weight about 170g
(*9) Charging can take more than 2.5hours when temperatures are either especially high or low.
12-8
General
Display LCD graphic display 192dots x 80dots
CX-101/102/103/105:
1 LCD graphic display on each face w/illuminator
CX-107: 1 LCD graphic display w/illuminator
Operation panel (keyboard) 25 keys (soft function, operations, power on, light)
w/illuminator
Auto power-off 5 levels (selectable)
Laser sighting function Provided On/Off (selectable)
Internal memory 1MB (about 10,000 points)
Sensitivity of levels
Circular level 10’ / 2mm
Electronic circular levels
Graphic display range 6’ (inner circle)
Digital display range ±6’30”
Optical plummet
Image Erect
Magnification 3x
Minimum focus 0.3m
Laser plummet (option)
Signal source Red laser diode 635±10nm (Class 2 IEC60825-1 Ed. 2.0: 2007/
FDA 21 CFR Ch. 1 Section 1040.10 and 1040.11) (Complies
with FDA performance standards for laser products except for
deviations pursuant to Laser Notice No. 50, June 24, 2007.))
Beam accuracy 1mm or less (when tripod head height is 1.3m)
Spot diameter φ3mm or less
Brightness control 5 levels
Auto power-off Provided (power cut off after 5 minutes)
Operating temperature -20 to 50°C (-4 to 122°F) - Standard Models
(no condensation) -30 to 50°C (-22 to 122°F) - Low Temperature Models
-20 to 60°C (-4 to 140°F) - High Temperature Models (no direct
sunlight)
Storage temperature range -30 to 70°C (-22 to 158°F) (no condensation)
Water and dust resistance IP66 (IEC60529: 2001)
Instrument height 192.5mm from tribrach mounting surface
236mm +5/-3mm from tribrach bottom
Size (with handle) CX-101/102/103/105: 191 (W) x 181 (D) x 348 (H) mm
CX-107: 191 (W) x 174 (D) x 348 (H) mm
Weight (with handle and 5.6kg (12.3lb)
battery)
12-9
II. NAMES OF PARTS
17 1
16 2
4
3
15
14 4
5
13 6
12 7
8
11 9
10
Fig. 12-1
1 Handle 10 Base plate

2 Bluetooth antenna 11 Levelling foot screw
3 External interface hatch (USB port) 12 Optical plummet focusing ring
4 Instrument height mark 13 Optical plummet eyepiece
5 Battery cover 14 Optical plummet reticle cover
6 Operation panel 12∼14: are not included on instruments
7 Serial connector with optional laser plummet
8 Circular level 15 Display unit
9 Circular level adjusting screws 16 Objective lens
(includes Laser Pointer function)
17 Handle locking screw
12-10
29 18
28
19
27 4
26
20
4 21
22
23
24
25
Fig. 12-2
18 Tubular compass slot 24 Horizontal fine motion screw

19 Vertical fine motion screw 25 Tribrach clamp
20 Vertical clamp 26 Telescope eyepiece screw
21 Speaker 27 Telescope focusing ring
22 Trigger key 28 Sighting collimator
23 Horizontal clamp 29 Instrument center mark
12-11
30
Fig. 12-3
CX-101/102 and Low Temperature Models only

30 Combined communications and power source connector (CX-101/102, Low Temperature
Models)
12-12
12-13
III. REMOVING THE HANDLE

The handle can be removed from the instrument.
To remove it, loosen the handle locking screw. handle handle
locking
screw
Fig. 12-4
Caution! To remove the handle, hold both sides
of the handle and lift it straight above.
If you hold the handle by one hand or
incline it, the terminal attached on the
handle may be damaged.
Fig. 12-5
12-14
12-15
IV. INSTALLING / REMOVING THE BATTERY

Mount the charged battery.
CAUTION: • When removing the battery, turn the power OFF.

• When installing / removing the battery, make sure that moisture or dust
particles do not come in contact with the inside of the instrument.
• Waterproofing property for this instrument is not secured unless the external
interface hatch and battery cover are tightly closed. Do not use it with the
hatch or cover open under the condition where water or other liquid spills
over the instrument.
(1) Open the battery cover while pressing the

buttons on both sides of the cover.
battery
cover
. Fig. 12-6
(2) Insert the battery with the arrow shown
on it downward while pressing toward
the instrument.
Caution! Inserting the battery aslant may damage
the instrument or the battery terminal.
battery
Fig. 12-7
(3) Close the battery cover. Listen for the
click to ensure that the cover is properly
closed.
12-16
12-17
V. KEY FUNCTIONS
display
softkeys
Fig. 12-8
Power ON and OFF

To switch the power ON, press { }.
To switch the power OFF, press and hold about 1 second { }.
Lighting up the display and key

To switch the display/key backlight and reticle illumination ON / OFF, press { }.
Switching target type

Target type can be switched only on the screen where the target symbol is displayed (ex. ).
{SHIFT} : Switches between target types (Prism/Sheet/N-Prism (reflectorless))
Switching the Laser-pointer/Guide light ON / OFF

{ } (Press and hold):To turn the Laser-pointer / Guide light ON / OFF, press and hold until a
beep sounds.
" After turning ON the Laser-pointer / Guide light, the laser beam is emitted for 5 minutes,
and then automatically switches OFF. But in Status screen and when target symbol
(ex. ) is not displayed in the OBS mode, the laser beam is not automatically turned
off.
12-18
Softkey operation
Softkeys are displayed on the bottom line of the screen.
{F1} to {F4} : Select the function matching the softkeys
{FUNC} : Toggle between OBS mode screen pages (when more than 4 sofkeys are allocated)
Inputting letters / figures

{SHIFT} : Switch between numeric and alphabetic characters
{0} to {9} : During numeric input, input number of the key. During alphabetic input, input
the characters displayed above the key in the order they are listed
{.} / {±} : Input a decimal point / plus or minus sign during numeric input. During
alphabetic input, input the characters displayed above the key in the order they
are listed.
{W}/{X } : Right and left cursor / select other option
{ESC} : Cancel the input data
{B.S.} : Delete a character on the left
{ENT} : Select / accept input word / value
Example: Entering “JOB M” in the JOB name field

1. Press {SHIFT} to enter the alphabet input mode. Alphabet input mode is indicated by an “A”
on the right of the screen.
2. Press {4}. “J” is displayed.
3. Press {5} three times. “O” is displayed.
4. Press {7} twice. “B” is displayed.
5. Press { X } twice. Input a blank space.
6. Press {5} once. “M” is displayed. Press { } to complete JOB details
inputting. JOB name A
JOB M 5
SCALE:1.00000000
aOKa
Selecting options
{S}/{T} : Up and down cursor keys
{W}/{X } : Right and left cursor keys / select other option
{ENT} : Accept the option
Example: Select a reflector type

1. Press [EDM] in page 2 of OBS mode.
2. Move to “Reflector” using { S } / { T }.
3. Display the option you want to select using { W } / { X }. EDM
Switches between “Prism”, “Sheet” and “N-prism”. Mode :Fine”r”
Reflector: Prism
4. Press {ENT} or { T } to move to the next option. The PC :0
selection is set and you can set the next item. Illum hold:Laser
12-19
Switching modes
{} : from OBS mode (Observation mode) to Star Key Mode
[CNFG] : from Status mode to Config mode (Configuration mode)
[OBS] : from Status mode to OBS mode (Observation mode)
[USB] : from Status mode to USB mode
[DATA] : from Status mode to Data mode
{ESC} : return to the Status mode from each mode
Other operation
{ESC} : return to the previous screen
12-20
12-21
VI. DISPLAY SYMBOLS
Status screen
Instrument name
CX-103 rec 9999

S/N XXXXXX
Ver. XXX-XX-XX Application software version
XXX-XX-XX
Job. JOB1 JOB
a O B S a aUSBa D A T A C N F G
OBS Mode screen

Target *5
OBS PC 0 Prism constant value

ppm 0 Atmospheric correction factor
Distance *1 SD Remaining battery power *4
Vertical angle *2 ZA 90°00’09” ⊥+ Tilt angle compensation *6
Horizontal angle *3 HA-R 129 ° 0 0 ’ 0 9 ” P 1 Page number
Laser-pointer function / Guide light On *7

Bluetooth communication status *8
Measuring screen
Dist
Fine”r” PC 0
ppm 0
oSTOP
Laser is emitted *9
Input screen
CD Previous page
: A Input mode *10
Operator:
:SOKKIAsssssssssss
Next page
MiOKS
12-22
*1 Distance (switching distance display status: “Config mode”):

SD: Slope distance
HD: Horizontal distance
VD: Height difference
*2 Vertical angle (switching vertical angle display status: “Config mode”):

ZA : Zenith angle (Z = 0)
VA : Vertical angle (H = 0 / H = ±90)
To switch vertical angle / slope in %, press [ZA/%]
*3 Horizontal angle:
Press [R/L] to switch the display status
HA-R: Horizontal angle right
HA-L: Horizontal angle left
*1,2,3 To switch usual “SD, ZA, HA-R” display to “SD, HD, VD”, press [SHV].
*4 Remaining battery power (Temperature = 25°C, EDM on)
Using Using external

BDC70 battery
: level 3 Full power

: level 2 Plenty of power remains
: level 1 Half or less power remains
: level 0 Little power remains. Charge the battery
(This symbol is displayed every 3 seconds): No power remains.

Stop the measurement and charge the battery.
*5 Target display:
Press {SHIFT} to switch the selected target. This key function can be used only on the
screens on which the target symbol is displayed:
: prism
: reflective sheet
: reflectorless
*6 Tilt angle compensation:

When this symbol is displayed, the vertical and horizontal angles are automatically
compensated for small tilt errors using 2-axis tilt sensor.
12-23
*7 Laser-pointer / Guide light display (selecting Laser-pointer / Guide light:”EDM Settings”):

: laser pointer is selected and ON
: guide light is selected and ON
*8 Bluetooth communication status:
: Connection established (“Mode” is set to “Slave”)
: Connection established (“Mode” is set to “Master”)
(flashing): Connecting (“Mode” is set to “Slave”)
(flashing): Connecting (“Mode” is set to “Master”)
(flashing): Waiting
(flashing): Disconnecting (“Mode” is set to “Slave”)
(flashing): Disconnecting (“Mode” is set to “Master”)
: Bluetooth device is OFF (“Mode” is set to “Slave”)
: Bluetooth device is OFF (“Mode” is set to “Master”)
*9 Appears when laser beam is emitted for distance measurement
*10 Input mode:

A : Inputting capital letters and figures
aa : Inputting small letters and figures
a1 : Inputting numbers
12-24
12-25
VII. MODE DIAGRAM

12-26
12-27
VIII. CHANGING THE INSTRUMENT PARAMETERS

The instrument parameter settings can be changed by key operations to meet the measurement
requirements. Before inspection with collimators, change the settings to the factory default.
VIII.1 EDM SETTINGS (ITEMS SET, OPTIONS, INPUT RANGE)

(1) Press [EDM] in the 2nd page of OBS mode. OBS PC 0
ppm 0
(2) Select the respective parameter using { T } or { S } key. SD
ZA 90°00’12” ⊥+
(3) Select the required option using { X } or { W } key. HAR 93°14’31” P2
MENU TIL T H-SET E D M
(4) Press {ENT} to input the selected option to memory.
EDM
(5) Press {ESC} or {ENT} to return to 2nd page of OBS Mode : Fine”r”
mode. Reflector:Prism
PC : 0
Illum.hold: Laser
[0ppm] : Atmospheric correction EDM

Temp :a15°C
factor returns to 0 - temperature and Press :1013hPa
air pressure are set to the default ppm : 0
values
0ppm
PARAMETER OPTIONS
Mode (Distance measurement mode) Fine “r” *
Fine AVG (setting: 1 to 9 times)
Fine “s”
Rapid “r”
Rapid “s”
Tracking
Reflector Prism *
Sheet
N-prism (reflectorless)
PC (Prism constant) -99 to 99 (“Prism” is selected: 0 *, “Sheet” is
selected: 0*)
Illum.hold Laser (laser-pointer)*
Guide (guide light)
Temp. (Temperature) -30 to 60°C (15 *)
Air pressure 500 to 1400hPa (1013 *), 375 to 1050mmHg (760 *)
ppm (Atmospheric correction factor) -499 to 499 (0 *)
* - factory setting
12-28
" The screen will be displayed only when “Illum. hold” is set to “Guide” and the cursor is
on “Guide”.
The Guide light (Brightness level of the guide light): EDM
1 to 3 (3 is factory setting) Mode : Fine”r”
Reflector:Prism
PC : -30
Illum.hold: Guide
Guide light: 3
VIII.2 CONFIG MODE SETTINGS (ITEMS SET, OPTIONS,

INPUT RANGE)
(1) Press [CNFG] in the Status screen. CX-103 rec 9999
S/N XXXXXX
Ver. XXX-XX-XX
XXX-XX-XX
Job. JOB1
(2) Select “Obs.condition”. a O B S a aUSBa D A T A C N F G
Config
Obs.condition
Instr.config
Instr.const
Comms setup
Unit
Key function
Change Password
Date and time
(a) Select the respective parameter using { T } or { S }

key. Dist mode :Sdist
H Dist :Ground
(b) Select the required option using { X } or { W } key. Tilt crn :Yes(H,V)
coll.crn :Yes
(c) Press {ENT} to input the selected option to memory. C&R crn. :K=0.20
Sea level crn :No
(d) Press {ESC} or {ENT} to return to Config mode menu.
V.obs :Zenith
Coord. :N-E-Z
Ang.reso :1”
S h e e t m o d :On
O f s V a n g :H o l d
S t n . I D I n c r . :1 0 0
V manual :No
12-29
PARAMETER OPTIONS
Dist mode (Distance measurement Sdist * (CX-101/CX-102/CX-103)
mode) Hdist * (CX-105/CX-107)
Vdist
H Dist (Horizontal distance display Ground *
method) Grid
Tilt crn (Tilt angle compensation) Yes (H,V) *
Yes (V)
No
coll. crn (Collimation correction) Yes *
No
C&R crn (Earth curvature and No
refraction correction) K=0.142
K=0.20*
Sea level crn (Sea level correction) Yes
No *
V.obs (Vertical angle display method) Zenith *
Horiz
Horiz 90° (Horizontal ±90°)
Coord. N-E-Z *
E-N-Z
Ang.reso. (Angle resolution) CX-101/CX-102/CX-103/CX-105: 1” *
5”
CX-107: 1”,
5” *
Sheet mod On *
Off
Ofs V ang Hold *
Free
Stn.ID Incr. (station ID increment) 0 to 99999 (100 *)
V manual Yes
No*
* - factory setting
12-30
Config
(3) Select “Instr. Config.” in Config mode. Obs.condition
Instr.config
Instr.const
Comms setup
Unit
(a) Select the respective parameter using { T } or { S } Power off :30min

key. Reticle lev:3
Contrast :10
(b) Select the required option using { X } or { W } key. Resume :On
EDM ALC :Free
(c) Press {ENT} to input the selected option to memory. Guide pattern: 1
PARAMETER OPTIONS
Power off (Power-saving automatic 5 min
cut-off) 10 min
15 min
30 min *
No
Reticle lev (Reticle backlight control) 0 to 5 level (3 *)
Contrast 0 to 15 level (10 *)
Resume On *
Off
EDM ALC Hold
Free *
Guide pattern 1 * (the red and green lights flash simultaneously)
2 (the red and green lights flash alternately)
* - factory setting
12-31
Config
(4) Select “Comms setup” in Config mode. Obs.condition
Instr.config
Instr.const
Comms setup
Unit
(a) Select the respective parameter using { T } or { S } Wireless :No

key. Baud rate :9600bps
Data bits :8bit
(b) Select the required option using { X} or { W } key. Parity :None
Stop bit :1bit
(c) Press {ENT} to input the selected option to memory. Check sum:No
(d) Press {ESC} or {ENT} to return to Config mode menu. ACK/NAK :No
CR,LF :No
ACK mode :Standard
PARAMETER OPTIONS
Wireless Yes
No *
Baud rate 1200bps
2400bps
4800bps
9600bps *
19200bps
38400bps
Data bits 8bit *
7bit
Parity None *
Odd
Even
Stop bit 1bit *
2 bit
XACK/NAK Yes
No *
* - factory setting
The setting effective when selecting "T types"

PARAMETER OPTIONS
CR, LF Yes
No *
ACK mode Standard *
Omitted
* - factory setting
12-32
The setting efective when selecting "S types"

PARAMETER OPTIONS
Check sum Yes
No *
* - factory setting
The following are communication formats compatible with the CX.

T type GTS (Obs / Coord), SSS (Obs, Coord)
S type SDR33, SDR2X
Depending on the communication format used, select T type / S type.
(5) Select “Unit” in Config mode. Config

Obs.condition
Instr.config
Instr.const
Comms setup
Unit
(a) Select the respective parameter using { T } or { S}

Temp. :°C
key. Press. :hPa
Angle :degree
(b) Select the required option using { X} or { W } key. Dist :meter
(c) Press {ENT} to input the selected option to memory.

PARAMETER OPTIONS
Temp. (Temperature) °C *
°F
Press. (Pressure) hPa *
mmHg
inchHg
Angle degree *
gon
mil
Dist meter *
feet
inch
Feet (only displayed when “feet” or Int. feet * (1m = 3.280839895)
“inch” selected above) US feet (1m = 3.280833333)
* - factory setting
12-33
(6) Select “Date and time” in Config mode. Config

Obs.condition
Instr.config
Instr.const
Comms setup
Unit
Key function
Change Password
Date and time
(a) Verify the proper date and time setting. If necessary,

Date and time
proceed with the correct input.
Date: 12032011
Date: Manually input date (format MMDDYYYY), Time: 11:25:33
e.g. December 3, 2011 is input as “12032011.
2:43:59 pm is input as “144359”. Date and time
Press {ENT} key.
Date: Dec/03/2011
Time: 14:43:59
12-34
12-35
IX. EDM ADJUSTMENT PROGRAM: “1131EDM-ADJ.EXE”

AND “1131EDM-ADJ.XLS”
The “1131edm-adj.xls” (Excel format file) and “1131edm-adj.exe” communication interface are the
programs, which can be used on the computers equipped with Windows XP operating system.
Programs originally developed by Topcon Corp. are intended for adjustment and inspection of the
EDM unit of the CX instruments.
IX.1 PROGRAM INSTALLATION

(7) Create the folder on the hard disk of your computer to store the EDM adjustment
program. Copy the 3 files “1131edm-adj.exe”, “1131edm-adj.ini” and “1131edm-
adj.xls” to this folder.
IX.2 USING THE PROGRAM

(1) Connect the combined communications and power source connector of the CX to the
computer and regulated DC power supply (specified voltage: 7.5∼8.0V DC, 2.5A) using
the external power supply & communication cable (tool, part No. ST-CX-01) and RS-
232C communication cable (DOC27).
(2) Execute “1131edm-adj.exe” file to launch the communication interface program. Open
Excel file “1131edm-adj.xls” provided for inspection and adjustment of the EDM unit.
Click “Enable macros” when the Excel file is being opened. Make sure that windows of
both programs are seen on the computer monitor.
1131edm-adj.exe 1131edm-adj.xls file
program screen for EDM adjustment
12-36
(3) Click ⎡SETTING⎦ tab on the computer screen to enter “SETTING” spreadsheet. In
“SETTING” sheet confirm that the check box next to message “Use application for
adjustment” is selected. The instrument will communicate with the computer through
“1131edm-adj.exe” communication program.
(4) Select the required function by pressing the respective button on the program screen.
IX.3 PROGRAM FUNCTIONS

SETTING Select check box. The “1131edm-adj” will be used as the communication
program together with Excel format file for the EDM adjustment.
" If the check box is cleared, the Tera Term program (free software
terminal emulator) can be used for communication with the instrument.
ECPU INIT 1. ⎡Init. EEPROM⎦ and ⎡Init. check⎦ – do not use these buttons, all
EDM adjustment parameters are initialized by this function
2. ⎡PLL lock check⎦ and ⎡PLL check⎦ – functions used by
Manufacturing Dept.
3. ⎡TCXO freq meas⎦ – this function is used to measure and input
TCXO frequency to the EEPROM
4. ⎡TCXO check⎦ – this function is used to output the TCXO frequency
and confirm it by frequency counter
UNIT CHECK 1. ⎡Reticle LED ON⎦ – reticle illumination ON and OFF check
2. ⎡LD ON (non-prism⎦ – LD power turned ON and OFF, ⎡Normal
phase⎦ emitting signal in normal and reverse phase, ⎡F11+F21+F31⎦
– modulation of emitting beam in 3 configurations within combination
of 3 frequencies (total 7 frequencies are used)
3. ⎡Shutter check⎦ – shutter operation check
4. ⎡ATT check⎦ – ATT operation check
5. ⎡TEMP⎦ – temperature measured by temperature sensor on the PX
board is confirmed (approx. “room temperature” + 10°C)
6. ⎡nd_out⎦ – ND filter operation check (ND filter of solenoid unit set to
OPEN position (out of emitting beam path) and CLOSED position (set
in the emitting beam path)
ATT_SHUT_LD 1. ⎡Reticle LED ON⎦ – reticle illumination ON and OFF check
2. ⎡GL_ON⎦ – guide light ON and OFF check
3. ⎡Shutter check⎦ – shutter operation check
4. ⎡ATT check⎦ – ATT operation check
5. ⎡CHECKINFO⎦ – CPU/FPGA memory check
6. ⎡nd_out⎦ – ND filter of solenoid unit set to OPEN position (out of
emitting beam path) and CLOSED position (set in the emitting beam
path)
7. ⎡LD ON (non-prism⎦ – LD power turned ON and OFF, ⎡Normal
phase⎦ emitting signal in normal and reverse phase, ⎡F11+F21+F31⎦
– modulation of emitting beam in 3 configurations within combination
of 3 frequencies (total 7 frequencies are used)
12-37
RV_TEMP 1. ⎡RV OFFSET input⎦ – RV offset input

2. ⎡OFFSET check⎦ – RV offset voltage level check after offset input
3. ⎡PX temp meas.⎦ – PX AMP temperature check
4. ⎡Vbr measurement⎦ – automatic RV voltage (breakdown voltage)
adjustment
5. ⎡m_vbr_read⎦ – reading of registered RV voltage
GAIN 1. ⎡IF auto (non-prism)⎦ – IF Gain for each individual signal modulated
by 1 of 7 frequencies check and adjustment (performed automatically)
2. ⎡Check input value⎦ – check of digital potentiometers setting
3. ⎡IF check⎦ – check of signal levels after IF gain adjustment in normal
and reverse phase ⎡Phase change⎦
4. ⎡ATT_FO check⎦ – check of ATT filter operation and fully OPEN
position
5. ⎡CAL/lval111⎦ – check of CAL signal level in order to adjust the
maximum value by positioning of the CAL fiber head
6. ⎡NP_ACAL registration⎦ – adjustment of CAL signal and registration
of ACAL level
7. ⎡Input value check⎦ – confirmation of designated ACAL signal level
setting in coarse and fine mode
8. ⎡ACAL check⎦ – ACAL check (confirmation of RV voltages in
ACALOFF mode, ACAL (NDOUT – reflectorless) mode and ACAL
(NDIN- prism) mode
CONSTANT 1. ⎡Auto ATT check⎦ – ATT level setting confirmation (sight the prism
AP01AR at 10m and confirm signal level within range of 600 ± 120)
2. ⎡ATT_FB check⎦ – check of ATT filter setting to fully block position
(opaque zone of the ATT filter in front of the receiving diode) and ATT
operation
3. ⎡coincidence set⎦ – setting of coincidence constant in prism mode
3. ⎡Read CC⎦ – reading of the memorized coincidence constant
4. ⎡Coincidence chk (P)⎦ – coincidence test in prism mode (if all
displayed counts 0 or 1, OK)
5. ⎡Coincidence chk (S)⎦ – coincidence test in reflective sheet mode (if
all displayed counts 0 or 1, OK)
6. ⎡Coincidence chk (N)⎦ – coincidence test in reflectorless mode (if all
displayed counts 0 or 1, OK)
7. ⎡Phase meas.⎦ – phase difference check for “Normal” and “Reverse”
phase of signals modulated with F11 and F12 frequencies
8. ⎡Mispoint Meas. (center)⎦ , ⎡Mispoint (meas)⎦ – mispointing error
check (sight the AP01AR prism center at 10m, and then 4’ out of the
prism center. Confirm the distance measurement results and calculate
the mispointing error)
9. ⎡DST (P)⎦ , ⎡DST (P) trk⎦ – distance measurement results in prism
fine mode and prism tracking mode
12-38
10. ⎡DST (N)⎦ , ⎡DST (N) trk⎦ – distance measurement results in

reflectorless fine mode and reflectorless tracking mode
11. ⎡DEVCHECK⎦ – confirm that “NO ERROR” message is displayed
as a result of EDM unit check
12. ⎡IR_ENOISE meas & write⎦ – the optical and electrical noise
parameters are checked while using the special EDM noise
measurement tool and input to the ECPU board internal memory.
13. ⎡R_IRNOISE⎦ – the noise parameters memorized by the instrument
will be outputted to the “1131edm-adj.exe” communication interface
program
14. ⎡IR_ENOISE meas. only⎦ – the optical and electrical noise
parameters are checked while using the special EDM noise
measurement tool. The measured parameters are not inputted to the
ECPU board internal memory
15. ⎡save parameter⎦ – all EDM parameters can be saved in the
computer as a text file. The file will be automatically created and save
in the folder, in which the “1131edm-adj.exe” communication
interface program is stored
Caution! If any problem happens during adjustment procedures, stop program operation by the
relevant button, or close the Excel file without saving any changes. Regardless of the
inspection results always press ⎡No⎦ button when closing the Excel file. When you start
inspection and adjustment always use the original “1131edm-adj.xls” file provided by
Topcon Corp.
It is recommended to save the “1131edm-adj.xls” file as an additional backup copy.
12-39
" The following settings can be changed in the “1131edm-adj.ini” file:

(1) Edit the .ini file by “Notepad” (Windows accessory)
(2) Select settings:
type the COM port no. if

different than 1 is used
1: screen of “1131edm-adj.exe”
communication program will be
displayed in English language default setting
0: screen of “1131edm-adj.exe”
communication program will be Do not change
displayed in Japanese language baud rate setting
(3) Click “File” Æ “Save” and then “File” Æ “Exit”.

(4) Confirm language version of “1131edm-adj.exe” program and communication with the
CX instrument.
12-40
12-41
X. TOOLS
X.1 STANDARD TOOLS
2 3 4
1
5 6 7 8 9 10 11
12 13 14 15 16 17
18 19 20 21 22 23
Fig. 12-9
1. Screwdrivers 16. Soldering iron

2. Screwdrivers 17. De-solder braid
3. Adjusting pin (FA0200-02 18. Heat controller
FA0200-01) 19. Hexagonal wrench 0.89mm, 1.5mm, 2mm
4. Rotary table (S1 or S1-1) (S132, S73, FB0400-05), 1.27mm, 2.5mm
5. Dust blower (S22) 3mm
6. Plastic bar (S28) 20. Oil - type O2
7. Alcohol fountain (S37) 21. Injector w/needle
8. Lens tissue (S39, S40, S41) 22. Greases (G21, G31, G38, G41, G42, G46,
9. Torque driver (S89, S-6LTDK) G51, G53, gasket Three Bond 1121 (S148),
10. Spanner (ST-TK-20) No.7, No.7-2, SH-33M
11. Tweezers 23. Adhesives: Three Bond 1401C (S91),
12. Spanner (S122 or ST-TK-17) Three Bond 1401 (S102), EC 3M-1368
13. Bakelite hammer Loctite 222 (S118),
14. Mascot hammer Cemedine Super X, No. 8008 (clear S168C),
15. Solder 3M EC-1368, Cemedine 1500 (S113)
12-42
X.2 MEASURING INSTRUMENTS

Regulated DC power supply Digital multimeter
Fig. 12-10 Fig. 12-11
X.3 SPECIAL TOOLS

Ext. power supply &
communication cable (ST-CX-01) Power supply cable tool (ST-CX-04)
Fig. 12-13
Fig. 12-12
12-43
LD power measure tool (2290046900 (S990-029 – discontinued) or S863-003)

Optical power meter (SSS-ADCE8230)
Optical sensor (SSS-Q82321) EDM gain adjustment tool (ST-CX-05)
Fig. 12-15
Fig. 12-14
Caution! Do not attempt to change position
of the prism in the tool
EDM collimation tool (S774-002)
Fig. 12-16
12-44
EDM collimation tool (compact type) (S863-001)
SHUTTER GAIN CONTROL

POWER
POWER
GND 12V
v
Fig. 12-17
EDM collimation tool (compact type) (2290048600)
Fig. 12-18
12-45
Temperature chamber:
One of recommended models: SU-641, manufacturer: Espec Corp., specifications:
- power supply: 100VAC/18A 1ø 50/60Hz, 200VAC/10A 1ø 50/60Hz, 220VAC/9A 1ø
50/60Hz, 230VAC/8.5A 1ø 50Hz
- temperature control: Balanced Temperature Control system
- temperature range: -40 to +150°C
- inside dimensions (W x H x D mm/in): 400 x 400 x 400 / 16 x 16 x 16 (excluding
protrusions)
- outside dimensions: (W x H x D mm/in): 540 x 660 x 890 / 21.6 x 26.4 x 35.6
Fig. 12-19
CMOS frame base setting tool (ST-CX-03) EDM noise measurement tool (2290008200)
Fig. 12-20
Fig. 12-21
12-46
Tilt sensor positioning tool (2290008310) Collimator system
Fig. 12-22
Torque driver bit for CN-COAX-HNS

(ST-ES-10)
Fig. 12-24
The bit can be used with a commercially
available torque driver (when placing the
order use the following part code: ST-RS-01
(torque range: 1∼6 kgfcm) or ST-BA-06
(torque range: 2∼12 kgfcm)) Fig. 12-23
APD illuminator tool (ST-ES-08)
Fig. 12-25
Prism AP01AR, reflective sheet target RS10N-K, RS20N-K, (RS90N-K),

Kodak gray card (white side: 90% reflectance)
Communication cable DOC27
12-47
Optional tools:
Absolute encoder Test Box with power supply cable (part No. ST-CX-02)
ext. power supply &

communication cable
(ST-CX-01)
connector
board
(spare part)
ST-CX-02-1)
Fig. 12-26
Cold light illumination tool with guide light (S585-004)

Illumination tool:
“Megalight 100” (with 100W halogen lamp, power supply AC100∼120V /
200∼240V 50 / 60Hz), manufacturer: Hoya-Schott
Guide light:
FGS6S500-SA (length: 500mm)
illumination tool
guide light
attachment*
* attachment is not
supplied with tool
Fig. 12-27
12-48
Vertical disk centering tool (S048-003) Vertical disk centering tool adapter (S778-002) and
Series 30R vertical disk centering tool adapter (S863-002)
S778-002 S863-002
Fig. 12-29
Series 30R vertical disk centering tool adapter (S863-

002) will not be necessary, if the DT5 vertical disk
Fig. 12-28 centering tool S048-003 is modified. The inner collar
of the tool tube should be cut by 2.0∼2.5mm to fit the
SETx30R (CX series) horizontal axis (for details refer
to Fig. 12-30). Modification will not change the tool
effectiveness, while older models are adjusted.
DT5 vertical disk centring tool modification (option) A=4.5

metal L attachment
horizontal axis
side
ø31
ø35
ø34
cut inside collar A by 2.0∼2.5mm

from A= 4.5mm to 2.5-0.5mm
A=2.5-0.5
ø35
ø31
ø34
Fig. 12-30
12-49
Horizontal axis base tool (ST-ES-09)

" This tool is a part of V CCD frame setting tool for SRX (S990-015)
Fig. 12-31
12-50
12-51
XI. POWER SUPPLY SYSTEM

Operate the CX with the following combinations of power equipment. Never use any combination
other than those indicated below. If you do, the CX could be damaged.
* : Optional accessories for CX-101/CX-102 and Low Temperature Models.
12-52
External power supply equipment

• When using EDC2A mount the BDC70 in place to maintain the balance of the instrument.
• Make sure that the car cigarette lighter is 12 V DC and that its negative terminal is grounded.
Use it with the car engine running.
• When using a 12 V DC battery, be sure to connect the red clip of the dedicated power cable
EDC213 to the positive side of the battery and the black one to the negative side. When
using a car battery, be sure to stop the car engine before use.
• When using the EDC115, leave the car engine running. Use the 12 V DC battery with the
negative side grounded. When using the EDC213, be sure to stop the car engine before use.
Connect the red clip to the positive side of the 12 V DC battery and the black one to the
negative side.
12-53
XII. LOW TEMPERATURE MODELS AND HIGH

TEMPERATURE MODELS
The following specifications are different between the Standard and Low / High Temperature
Models:
Low Temperature High Temperature

Specification Standard Models
Models Models
Operating -30 to 50°C -20 to 60°C -20 to 50°C
Temp. (-22 to 122°F) (-4 to 140°F) (-4 to 122°F)
(no direct sunlight)
Measuring Measurement at -20∼50°C Measurement at -20∼50°C Reflective sheet RS90N-K:
range (-4∼122°F) (-4∼122°F) 1.3 to 500m (1,640ft)
Reflective sheet RS90N-K: Reflective sheet RS90N-K: Reflective sheet RS50N-K:
1.3 to 500m (1,640ft) 1.3 to 500m (1,640ft) 1.3 to 300m (980ft)
Reflective sheet RS50N-K: Reflective sheet RS50N-K: Reflective sheet RS10N-K:
1.3 to 300m (980ft) 1.3 to 300m (980ft) 1.3 to 100m (320ft)
Reflective sheet RS10N-K: Reflective sheet RS10N-K:
1.3 to 100m (320ft) 1.3 to 100m (320ft)
Measurement at Measurement at
-30 to -20° (-22∼ -4°F) 50 to 60° (122∼ 140°F)
1.3 to 300m (980ft) 1.3 to 300m (980ft)
1.3 to 180m (590ft) 1.3 to 180m (590ft)
1.3 to 60m (190ft) 1.3 to 60m (190ft)
12-54
Different parts between the Standard and Low Temperature Models:

Low Temperature Models Standard Models
Display complete Different LCD is used
Combined communication All Low Temperature Models are Only CX-101/CX-102 are equipped
and power source equipped with the combined with the combined communication
connector communication and power source and power source connector mounted
connector mounted in the axis flange in the axis flange
base
Horizontal axis Parts are different (except for metal L) and not compatible between standard CX-
103/CX-105/CX-107 and Low Temperature Models
LD lens frame complete Different optical glue is applied for installing the lens
Sticker 1 Low Temperature Model sticker is --------
attached to the standard base
" The horizontal axis of some of standard models is different than that of Low
Temperature models.
Caution! Do not disassemble the horizontal axis. It is supplied together with the disk as an
assembled and adjusted unit.
CX-103/CX-105/CX-107 CX-101/CX-102/Low Temperature Models
horizontal axis
horizontal axis metal L
metal L
spacer
nut spring
Fig. 12-32 nut
All parts of the High Temperature Models, all adjustments and settings are the same as those of
Standard Models.
12-55
Label attached to the Low Temperature Models
same distance
sticker 1
Fig. 12-33
sticker 1 sticker 1
correct position improper setting
12-56
Adjustment of the Low Temperature Models is same as that of Standard Models. Please
refer to chapters 4, 5 and 8 of this service manual for details of adjustments.
The only difference it the setting of display contrast:
Availability and options of several instrument functions can be selected and memorized in the
internal memory as the “instrument flags”.
(a) Select service function “Inst. flg” in “Initialize” mode of Service mode:
(b) Move between the displayed items using { T }or Inst. flag
{ S } key. Media : Yes
Key define : Free
(c) Select options of the respective items using { X } or Guide light : Yes
--------- : ---
{ W } key. o OKo
In the Low Temperature Model highlight “Contrast”
and select “L-temp” option. Inst. flag
Contrast: Norm* / L-tmp --------- : ---
Select L-temp for contrast setting of the Bluetooth : No
BT Power : Norm
Low Temperature Models Russia : No
o OKo
Inst. flag
Contrast : L-temp
L-plummet : Yes
o OKo
" For the instruments manufactured for the Russian market set “Yes” option for “Russia”
function.
Russia: No* / Yes
Select [Yes] for the instruments manufactured for the Russian market
* standard factory setting
To enter Service mode of Low Temperature Models, which are equipped with the display
complete, which is different from the standard model, carry out the following procedures to
observe the Service mode screen with the proper contrast:
– Confirm that the instrument is turned OFF. While holding {F1}, {F4} and {FUNC} keys,
press { } to enter Service mode.
– Press { } key to change to Low Temperature Model assigned screen.
Service Mode <L-Temp>

Initialize
EDM
Encoder,Tilt
Test
" Each time when { } key is pressed the display toggles between standard “Service
Mode” screen and “Service Mode <L-Temp>” screen. The display may not be readable
when the setting (software function) does not match the instrument hardware – display
type, which is different between the standard models and Low Temperature Models.
12-57
INSPECTION OF LOW AND HIGH TEMPERATURE MODELS

" Inspections described below are not strictly required. You can conduct them on the conditions
that the proper workshop facilities as mentioned below are available.
Put the instrument in the temperature chamber and proceed with the inspections under low
temperature (-30°C) for Low Temperature Models and high temperature (+60°C) for High
Temperature Models.. Make sure that the inspection results are within standard.
" The tests must be conducted with the CX kept at the specified temperatures. When low
temperature is set avoid condensation of vapor in the instrument, do not tighten the telescope
and fine motion clamps and do not retighten the handle fixing screws.
Reference Low and High Temperature

Inspection standard at Inspection
room temp.
–30°C +60°C
DT Collimation (double centre) ≤ 8”, ≤ 10” ≤ 22.5” ≤ 22.5”
Horizontal axis wobble ≤ 5” ≤ 10” ≤ 10”
Force needed to rotate H axis ≤ 250g ≤ 300g ≤ 300g
V0 index error ≤ 15”, ≤ 20”, ≤45” ≤ 45”
≤ 30”
Force needed to rotate V axis ≤ 150g ≤ 180g ≤ 180g
Horizontal axis wobble when − ≤ 10” (movement of ≤ 10” (movement of
turning telescope fine motion screw vertical hair-line vertical hair-line
against collimator against collimator
reticle) reticle)
Tilt sensor accuracy − (*1) −
EDM LD position ) Fig. 8-24, ) Fig.12-34 ) Fig.12-34
page 8-15
Display Contrast − (*2) (*2)
Motion Standard base fine motion screw − ≤ 350gcm −
units (*3)
Telescope fine motion screw − ≤ 350gcm −
(*3)
External interface hatch (USB port) − *4 −
Battery cover open / close − *5 −
Battery insert − *6 −
H axis rotation torque: check the force by the tension gauge attached to the telescope eyepiece.
V axis rotation torque: check the force by the tension gauge attached to the optical plummet
eyepiece.
Check the V0 index when the tilt correction is turned off.
12-58
(*1) Check that there are no abnormalities in the tilt sensor operation.
LD spot adjustment tolerances:

for Low Temperature Models as checked at -30°C
for High Temperature Models as checked at +60°C
EDM collimation tool:
(CM400 type) (compact type)
40”
-50” +35”
-45” +30” -50” +35”
-40” +25” -45” +30”
-40” +25”
90”
40” – distance between

double hair-lines of CX
(same for thedolite)
Fig. 12-34
(*2) At low temperature (-30°C) and high temperature (+60°C) select the appropriate contrast
level, ensuring best conditions of observation. Confirm the display contrast for both low and
high temperatures.
(*3) Check rotation torque when the upper and telescope clamp is not tightened.
Check fine motion screw rotation torque within standard.
(*4) Make sure that the external interface hatch can be opened and closed easily.
(*5) Make sure that the battery case can be opened and closed easily.
(*6) Make sure that the battery can be inserted and removed easily.
After inspection at low (-30°C) and high (+60°C) temperature, recheck the instrument at room
temperature (set the temperature of chamber to +25°C). Proceed with the following inspections:
(1) Index error of tilt angle sensor () section 2.2.11).
(2) Horizontality of horizontal axis (height of standard, inclination) () section 2.2.18).
(3) Double center adjustment of horizontal axis and telescope axis (collimation) () section
2.2.19).
(4) Vertical 0 point error () section 2.2.21).
(5) Sight any target and check that the distance can be measured.
12-59
XIII. CX SERIES WITH BLUETOOTH FUNCTIONALITY

XIII.1 PARTS OF BLUETOOTH COMMUNICATION UNIT
The following additional parts must be installed in the instrument if the original IF cover is not
equipped with the Bluetooth unit:
(1) Bluetooth board complete ()section 11.7 Fig. 11-7 illust. No. 7-26 and parts catalogue)
(2) BT label () section 11.7 Fig. 11-7 illust. No. 7-33 and parts catalogue)
(3) Screws PTP2x4S Ni () section 11.7 Fig. 11-7, illust. No. 7-27A and parts catalogue)
(4) Screws PTP2x6S Ni () section 11.7 Fig. 11-7, illust. No. 7-28 and parts catalogue)
(5) BT antenna () section 11.7 Fig. 11-7, illust. No. 7-24 and parts catalogue)
(6) BT explanatory label () section 11.4 and parts catalogue)
" The “IF cover complete w/BT” can be ordered as a unit including all parts required for set up of
Bluetooth functionality () section 11.7 fig. 11-4, illustr. No. 7-29 and parts catalogue).
Refer to section 3.7.1 for assembling procedures.
XIII.2 ACTIVATION OF BLUETOOTH FUNCTION USING

SERVICE MODE
(1) Confirm that the instrument is turned OFF. While holding {F1}, {F4} and {FUNC} keys,
press {ON} to enter Service mode.
(2) Select service function “Inst. flg” in “Initialize” submenu and confirm the display.
(3) Highlight option setting of “Bluetooth” function using { T } or { S } key.
{ENT}
Service Mode
Initialize
Initialize
EDM
Default & Clear
Encoder,Tilt
V offset,ES,EL
Test
Tilt offset
Other
ID
ROM View
{ENT}
Inst. flg
Clear Password Inst. flag
Bluetooth Media : Yes
Date and time Key define : Free
TS_COMM Guide light : Yes
--------- : ---
o OKo
Inst. flag
--------- : ---
Bluetooth : WT
BT Power : Norm
Russia : No
o OKo
12-60
(4) Using { X } or { W } key select “WT” option.

" The Bluetooth power “BT Power” can be changed. The Inst. flag
default setting is normal power “Norm”. Select “Low” --------- : ---
Bluetooth : WT
for the instruments exported to the designated markets. BT Power : Norm
BT Power: Norm* / Low Russia : No
o OKo
(5) Press [OK] to memorize the respective settings.

(6) Select service function “Bluetooth” in “Initialize” submenu and press {ENT} key.
Service Mode Initialize

Initialize Default & Clear
EDM {ENT} V offset,ES,EL
Encoder,Tilt Tilt offset
Test ID
Other ROM View
Inst. flg
Clear Password
Bluetooth
Date and time
TS_COMM
(7) In “Bluetooth” screen select “Initialize Device” and Bluetooth

press {ENT} key to initialize the Bluetooth unit. Initialize Device
View Setting
" The Bluetooth device initialization is carried out in 19 BT <–––> PC
steps. The progress is shown on the screen. Make sure
that “OK” message is finally displayed at the bottom
line.
Bluetooth Device
Initializing…
01 of 19
(8) After initialization press {ESC} key.

…
Bluetooth Device
Initializing…
19 of 19
OK
" Settings of the Bluetooth device can be confirmed by “View Setting” function in
“Bluetooth” screen.
(8) Check communication between the Bluetooth module of the instrument and other device
equipped with Bluetooth functionality () section 2.2.6) and turn the instrument OFF.
12-61
XIV. TROUBLESHOOTING
Referring to the general inspection, determine the origin of trouble: DT unit, EDM unit or others.
XIV.1 TROUBLE IN ANGLE AND DT UNIT

• E190 error code displayed
START
Carry out “Constant” and “Slit check” functions

for horizontal encoder using Service mode
Check error code displayed and take

countermeasures referring to section 10.2
END
" For detail check of the encoder signals use “Running test” service function.
12-62
• E191 error code displayed
START
Carry out “Constant” and “Slit check” functions

for vertical encoder using Service mode
Check error code displayed and take

countermeasures referring to section 10.2
END
" For detail check of the encoder signals use “Running test” service function.
12-63
• Power is not turned ON
START
Check if the battery is charged

and properly installed
Supply power from external power source

Problem No through combined communications and
solved? power source connector
Yes
Yes
Problem solved?
No
Check battery terminal, Check/ replace flexible cable(s) –

CN8 connector (DCPU board) display/DCPU, DCPU/JX
and FC-4 flexible cable No
Yes
Problem solved?
No
Yes
Problem solved?
Replace
No DCPU board
Replace
IF cover
Yes
Problem solved?
No
Replace
JX board
Yes
Problem solved?
No
END Replace
each display board
12-64
Hints: (1) If VCONS (Z9 on JX board) is NG ( power for ON/OFF flip-flop, relay and power
switches), the JX board may be defective
(2) If VCC3P3 (Z19 on DCPU board) is NG (power for display and power ON key), the
JX board or DCPU board may be defective
For details of inspection refer to section 3.1.2
12-65
• Power is not turned ON from external power source only
START
Check CN12 connector

on JX board
Problem No Check / replace EXT-

solved? CN1 (EXT-CN2) unit
Yes
Yes Problem
solved?
No
Clean / replace
H slipring unit
Yes Problem
solved?
No
Replace
JX board
END
12-66
• Tilt over range / tilt error
START
Check with service function

“Encoder,Tilt” Æ “Tilt”
Yes
Is error Confirm error code and take
code displayed? countermeasures referring to section 10.2
No
Check tilt counts relative to tilt angle

using “Tilt” service function
Is levelling No Level tilt sensor

possible within mechanically using tool
standard?
Yes Problem
solved?
Replace
Tilt sensor
Yes Problem
solved?
No
Input updated
tilt offset Replace
JX board or DCPU board
END
12-67
XIV.2 TROUBLE IN EDM UNIT

• Fluctuation of distance data
START
Check cable connections

of EDM unit
Are RV voltage,
Is LD and APD Yes Yes
ACAL, CAL and
Collimation OK?
MEAS signals OK?
No
No
Carry out optical Perform electrical adjustment of EDM
alignment of unit taking care of RV adjustment
LD and APD
Yes
Problem solved?
Perform electrical
adjustment of EDM unit No
Replace / adjust ECPU

Yes
board () section 7.1.2)
No
Problem solved?
Yes Yes
Problem solved?
No
Replace / adjust PX unit – PX board

and (or) ALC unit () section 7.2.2)
Yes
Problem solved?
No
Replace / adjust
CX/LD unit () section 7.5.2)
END
12-68
• E205
START
Check connections DCPU board

JX board ECPU board
Is V contact ring No Clean / replace V contact ring

OK? (apply grease G51)
Yes
Yes Problem
solved?
No
Replace
ECPU board
Yes Problem
solved?
No
Replace
JX board or DCPU board
END
12-69
• E096 (Bad Conditions)
START
Input updated coincidence constant

and perform coincidence test
Problem No Carry out optical

solved? alignment of LD and APD
Yes
Perform electrical
adjustment of EDM unit
Yes Problem
solved?
No
Replace
ALC complete
Yes Problem
solved?
No
Replace
PX board
Yes Problem
solved?
No
Replace
END CX/LD unit
12-70
• E031 (ACAL adjustment error)
START
Confirm RV adjustment, LD power, CAL signal adjustment,

check ACAL function by “1131edm-adj.xls” program file
Problem No Replace
solved? ECPU board
Yes
Yes Problem
solved?
No
Replace
PX board
END
12-71
XIV.3 OTHERS
• Abnormal operation of interface for USB flash memory
START
Replace USB
flash memory
Problem No Check CN8 connector on DCPU

solved? board (connection with FC-4 cable)
Yes
Yes Problem
solved?
No
Replace
FC-4 flexible cable
Yes Problem
solved?
No
Replace
JX or (and)
DCPU board
END
Hints: If MBAT voltage (Z2 on JX board) is NG, the JX board may be defective
If VCCUSB voltage (Z17 on DCPU board) is NG, the DCPU board may be defective
For details of inspection refer to section 3.1.2
" Read / write operation for USB port can be confirmed by “Test” Æ “Media Check” service
function.
12-72
• Abnormal operation of Bluetooth unit
START
Confirm Service mode Æ “Initialize” Æ “Inst.flg”

Æ “Bluetooth” setting “WT”. Initialize Bluetooth
(Service mode Æ “Initialize” Æ “Bluetooth” Æ
“Initialize Device” Check connections of FC-4
flexible cable (CN8
connector on DCPU board,
Problem No board to board connector on
solved? BT board, antenna connector
on BT board
Yes
Yes Problem
solved?
No
Replace
BT board
Yes Problem
solved?
No
Replace dipole
antenna (w/IF cover)
Yes Problem
solved?
No
Replace
FC-4 flexible cable
Yes Problem
solved?
No
END Replace
DCPU board
12-73
Hint: If BTVCC voltage is NG, the DCPU board may be defective

Caution! BTVCC at Z16 test point on DCPU board is output only when Bluetooth is
turned ON
12-74

Repair Manual CX

Uploaded by

Document Informationclick to expand document information

Document Informationclick to expand document information

Copyright:

Available Formats

Repair Manual CX

Uploaded by

Document Information

Original Title

Copyright

Available Formats

Share this document

Share or Embed Document

Sharing Options

Did you find this document useful?

Is this content inappropriate?

Copyright:

Available Formats

Repair Manual CX

Uploaded by

Copyright:

Available Formats

Tplljb

1st edition FEBRUARY 2012

Any unauthorized use, duplication, reproduction, modification, disclosure, distribution

Copyright © 2012 Topcon Corporation. All rights reserved.

1. ELECTRICAL AND OPTICAL DIAGRAMS ..................1-1

2. EXTERNAL APPEARANCE CHECK AND

2.2.22 VERTICAL 0 POINT / ES / EL OFFSET ADJUSTMENT ................................. 2-25

3. DT UNIT PARTS REPLACEMENT AND ADJUSTMENT. 3-1

4. HORIZONTAL ENCODER (VERTICAL AXIS) UNIT....4-1

5. VERTICAL ENCODER (HORIZONTAL AXIS) UNIT....5-1

6. INSPECTION OF DISTANCE DATA WITH BASELINE 6-1

7. TELESCOPE UNITS AND EDM PCB SYSTEM ............ 7-1

7.10 EYEPIECE ............................................................................................................7-18

8.10 LASER DIODE POWER ADJUSTMENT ......................................................8-36

10. ERROR MESSAGES AND ERROR CODES..................10-1

11. EXPLODED VIEW

12. APPENDICES ...................................................................... 12-1

• Optionally the laser plummet and Bluetooth functionality is available.

TSshield sticker is attached to

Caution! Use of controls, adjustment, or performance of procedures other than those

* : only for instruments with laser plummet option

Restoring Default Settings

1. ELECTRICAL AND OPTICAL DIAGRAMS

1.2 DT UNIT - BLOCK DIAGRAM

1.3 EDM UNIT - BLOCK DIAGRAM

1.4 DT UNIT - CONNECTION DIAGRAM

1.5 EDM UNIT –CONNECTION DIAGRAM

2. EXTERNAL APPEARANCE CHECK AND INSPECTION

2.2 INSPECTION PROCEDURES

2.2.1 EXTERNAL APPEARANCE CHECK

2.2.2 ROTATING/MOVING PARTS FUNCTION CHECK

2.2.3 KEY FUNCTION CHECK Example:

holding {F1}, {F4} and {FUNC} keys, press { } to ( F4 )

2.2.4 DATE AND TIME SETTING CHECK

2.2.5 USB PORT FUNCTION CHECK

2.2.6 BLUETOOTH FUNCTION CHECK

(3) Select “Link device list”. Link device list

(6) When the device identification code(s) is shown on the Inquiry…

(10) Turn the instrument OFF.

2.2.7 SIGHTING COLLIMATOR CHECK

Fig.2-1 Fig. 2-2

2.2.8 H AND V CONSTANT INPUT AND SLIT CHECK

(2) Select service function “Constant” in “Encoder, Tilt”

2.2.9 OPTICAL PLUMMET CHECK

(b) Remove the optical plummet reticle

2.2.9A LASER PLUMMET CHECK

(7) Note the current position (x) of the laser beam.

Tighten “Up” screw

Tighten “Down” screw

Laser plummet adjustment cap

2.2.10 INSPECTION WITH COLLIMATORS – PREPARATION

collimator A position of levelling screws collimator B

2.2.11 INDEX ERROR OF TILT SENSOR

If out of the tolerance:

Confirm data (ENT)

(4) Turn the instrument OFF and repeat steps (1)∼(5).

2.2.12 ACCURACY OF TILT SENSOR